MEPCO SCHLENK ENGINEERING COLLEGE, SIVAKASI (AUTONOMOUS)
AFFILIATED TO ANNA UNIVERSITY, CHENNAI 600 025
REGULATIONS: MEPCO - R2015 (FULL TIME)
(CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM)
B. E. MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Department Vision Department Mission
Rendering services to the global needs of
engineering industries by educating students to
become professional mechanical engineers of
excellent calibre
To produce mechanical engineering technocrats with a
perfect knowledge of intellectual and hands on
experiences and to inculcate the spirit of moral values and
ethics to serve the society
Programme Educational Objectives (PEOs)
Self-Learning : Continual receptiveness for leadership and social challenges.
Breadth : Inculcate good scientific and engineering knowledge to create
novel
product for the real life issues.
Analytical reasoning : Integrate fundamentals and new concepts from engineering
practices.
Communication Skills : Excel in vocabulary and interpersonal skill as a Professional
Engineer.
Programme Outcomes (POs)
a. Imparting strong foundation in the technical know-how of mechanical engineering.
b. Root cause analysis of mechanical engineering problem through basic and engineering sciences.
c. Solving complex mechanical engineering problems.
d. Critical thinking/analysing mechanical engineering problems using research based methods.
e. Handling latest engineering tools with advanced software knowledge.
f. Tuning Mechanical engineering advancements to the benefits of society.
g. Mechanical engineering solutions to green and sustainable development.
h. Adopting Professional ethics in technical field.
i. Perform individual activity/Leadership ability in a multifaceted group.
j. Communication competency in presenting technocrats reports.
k. Capability in completing a project with financial management.
l. Up-to-date in current events.
1
CURRICULUM (I to VIII SEMESTER)
SEMESTER I (Common to all UG Programmes)
SL. NO. COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C
THEORY
1. 15HS101 Technical English – I 3 0 2 4
2. 15BS101 Mathematics – I 3 2 0 4
3. 15BS102 Engineering Physics 3 0 0 3
4. 15BS103 Engineering Chemistry 3 0 0 3
5. 15GE101 Computer Programming 3 0 0 3
6. 15GE102 Engineering Graphics 2 0 4 4
PRACTICAL
7. 15BS151 Physics and Chemistry Laboratory 0 0 4 2
8. 15GE151 Computer Programming Laboratory 0 0 4 2
9. 15GE152 Engineering Practices Laboratory 0 0 4 2
TOTAL 17 2 18 27
SEMESTER II
SL.NO. COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C
THEORY
1. 15HS201 Technical English – II* 3 0 0 3
2. 15BS201 Mathematics – II* 3 2 0 4
3. 15BS202 Environmental Science and Disaster Management* 3 0 0 3
4. 15BS203 Applied Materials Science (Common to Civil and Mechanical Engineering)
3 0 0 3
5. 15GE201 Engineering Mechanics (Common to Civil / Mechanical)
3 2 0 4
6. 15GE202 Basic Electrical and Electronics Engineering (Common to Civil, Mechanical & Bio-Tech)
3 0 0 3
PRACTICAL
7. 15BS251 Applied Physics And Environmental Chemistry Laboratory (Common to EEE/ECE/CSE/MECH/IT/BT) (Laboratory classes on alternate weeks for Physics and Environmental Chemistry)
0 0 4 2
8. 15EE253 Electrical and Electronics Lab 0 0 4 2
TOTAL 18 4 8 24
* Common to all UG Programmes
SEMESTER III
SL.NO. COURSECODE COURSE TITLE L T P C
THEORY
1. 15MA305 Mathematics III - Boundary Value Problems and Probability Distribution
3 2 0 4
2. 15ME301 Engineering Thermodynamics 3 0 0 3
3. 15ME302 Strength of Materials 3 0 0 3
4. 15ME303 Fluid Mechanics and Machinery 3 2 0 4
5. 15ME304 Manufacturing Technology – I 3 0 0 3
6. 15EC306 Microprocessors and Control 3 0 0 3
PRACTICAL
7. 15ME351 Strength of Materials and Hydraulics Laboratory 0 0 4 2
8. 15ME352 Manufacturing Technology Laboratory – I 0 0 4 2
9. 15ME353 Computer Aided Machine Drawing Laboratory 0 0 4 2
TOTAL 18 4 12 26
SEMESTER IV
SL.NO. COURSECODE COURSE TITLE L T P C
THEORY
1. 15MA402 Mathematics IV - Numerical and Statistical Techniques (Common to EEE & MECH)
3 2 0 4
2
2. 15ME401 Thermal Engineering 3 2 0 4
3. 15ME402 Kinematics of Machinery 3 2 0 4
4. 15ME403 Design of Machine Elements 3 0 0 3
5. 15ME404 Engineering Metallurgy 3 0 0 3
6. 15ME405 Manufacturing Technology –II 3 0 0 3
PRACTICAL
7. 15ME451 Thermal Engineering Laboratory 0 0 4 2
8. 15ME452 Manufacturing Technology Laboratory –II 0 0 4 2
9. 15HS451 Presentation Skills Laboratory (Common to IT/ ECE / MECH / Bio-Tech)
0 0 2 1
TOTAL 18 6 10 26
SEMESTER V
SL.NO. COURSECODE COURSE TITLE L T P C
THEORY
1. 15ME501 Heat and Mass Transfer 3 2 0 4
2. 15ME502 Dynamics of Machinery 3 0 0 3
3. 15ME503 Design of Transmission Systems 3 2 0 4
4. Core Elective I 3 0 0 3
5. Open Elective I 3 0 0 3
6. Allied Elective I 3 0 0 3
PRACTICAL
7. 15ME551 Heat Transfer and Metallurgy Laboratory 0 0 4 2
8. 15ME552 CAD and CAM Laboratory 0 0 4 2
TOTAL 18 4 8 24
SEMESTER VI
SL.NO. COURSECODE COURSE TITLE L T P C
THEORY
1. 15ME601 Finite Element Analysis 3 0 0 3
2. 15ME602 Power Plant Technology 3 0 0 3
3. 15ME603 Applied Hydraulics and Pneumatics 3 0 0 3
4. Core Elective II 3 0 0 3
5. Open Elective II 3 0 0 3
6. Allied Elective II 3 0 0 3
PRACTICAL
7. 15ME651 Mechatronics and Dynamics Laboratory 0 0 4 2
8. 15HS651 Professional Communication Skills Laboratory (Common to ECE /MECH/IT/Bio-Tech)
0 0 4 2
9. 15ME652 Design and Fabrication Project 0 0 8 4
TOTAL 18 0 16 26
SEMESTER VII
SL.NO. COURSECODE COURSE TITLE L T P C
THEORY
1. 15ME701 Instrumentation and Metrology 3 0 0 3
2. 15ME702 Industrial Economics, Psychology and Management 3 0 0 3
3. Core Elective III 3 0 0 3
4. Core Elective IV 3 0 0 3
5. Core Elective V 3 0 0 3
6. Open Elective III 3 0 0 3
PRACTICAL
7. 15ME751 Instrumentation and Metrology Laboratory 0 0 4 2
8. 15ME752 Computer Aided Simulation and Analysis Laboratory 0 0 4 2
9. 15ME753 Comprehensive Skill Development** 0 0 2 1
TOTAL 18 0 10 23
** Internal Assessment only
SEMESTER VIII
SL.NO. COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C
THEORY 1. Core Elective VI 3 0 0 3
2. Open Elective IV 3 0 0 3
3
PRACTICAL
3. 15ME851 Project Work 0 0 12 6
TOTAL 6 0 12 12
Total Credits: 188 (Regular)
Total Credits: 137 (LES)
LIST OF CORE ELECTIVES
SL.NO. COURSECODE COURSE TITLE L T P C
1. 15MEC01 Advances in I.C. Engines 3 0 0 3
2. 15MEC02 Artificial Intelligence and Robotics 3 0 0 3
3. 15MEC03 Automobile Engineering 3 0 0 3
4. 15MEC04 Composite Materials 3 0 0 3
5. 15MEC05 Computational Fluid Dynamics 3 0 0 3
6. 15MEC06 Computer Integrated Manufacturing 3 0 0 3
7. 15MEC07 Cryogenics 3 0 0 3
8. 15MEC08 Design of Thermal Systems 3 0 0 3
9. 15MEC09 Design of Jigs, Fixtures and Press Tools 3 0 0 3
10. 15MEC10 Enterprise Resource Planning 3 0 0 3
11. 15MEC11 Entrepreneurship Development 3 0 0 3
12. 15MEC12 Fracture Mechanics 3 0 0 3
13. 15MEC13 Gas Dynamics and Jet Propulsion 3 0 0 3
14. 15MEC14 Industrial Tribology 3 0 0 3
15. 15MEC15 Maintenance Engineering 3 0 0 3
16. 15MEC16 Marketing Management 3 0 0 3
17. 15MEC17 Micro Electro Mechanical system 3 0 0 3
18. 15MEC18 Non Destructive Testing 3 0 0 3
19. 15MEC19 Nuclear Engineering 3 0 0 3
20. 15MEC20 Plant Layout and material handling 3 0 0 3
21. 15MEC21 Pressure Vessels and Piping Design 3 0 0 3
22. 15MEC22 Principles of Flight 3 0 0 3
23. 15MEC23 Process Planning and Cost Estimation 3 0 0 3
24. 15MEC24 Production Planning and Control 3 0 0 3
25. 15MEC25 Project Management 3 0 0 3
26. 15MEC26 Refrigeration and Air conditioning 3 0 0 3
27. 15MEC27 Renewable Energy Systems 3 0 0 3
28. 15MEC28 Resource Management Techniques 3 0 0 3
29. 15MEC29 Thermal Turbomachines 3 0 0 3
30. 15MEC30 Total Quality Management and Reliability Engineering 3 0 0 3
31. 15MEC31 Unconventional Machining Processes 3 0 0 3
32. 15MEC32 Vibration and Noise Control 3 0 0 3
33. 15MEC33 Waste Management and Energy Recovery 3 0 0 3
ALLIED ELECTIVES - CURRICULUM
Offered by Civil Department
V Semester
SL.NO. COURSECODE COURSE TITLE L T P C
1. 15CEA01 Industrial Pollution Prevention and Control 3 0 0 3
2. 15CEA02 Introduction to Engineering Seismology 3 0 0 3
3. 15CEA03 Solar Energy Utilization 3 0 0 3
4. 15CEA04 Environmental Geotechnology 3 0 0 3
4
5. 15CEA05 Principles of Global Positioning System 3 0 0 3
VI Semester
SL.NO. COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C
1. 15CEA06 Non-Conventional Energy Resources 3 0 0 3
2. 15CEA07 Energy Conservation and Management 3 0 0 3
3. 15CEA08 Environmental Impact Assessment 3 0 0 3
4. 15CEA09 Fundamentals of Supply Chain 3 0 0 3
5. 15CEA10 Coastal Engineering 3 0 0 3
6. 15CEA11 Manufacturing Cost Estimation 3 0 0 3
Offered by EEE Department
V Semester
SL.NO. COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C
VI Semester
SL.NO. COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C
1. 15EEA06 Real Time Embedded Systems 3 0 0 3
2. 15EEA07 Fundamentals of Electric Power Utilization 3 0 0 3
3. 15EEA08 Soft Computing Techniques and Applications 3 0 0 3
4. 15EEA09 Fundamentals of Power Quality 3 0 0 3
5. 15EEA10 Wiring, Estimation and Costing 3 0 0 3
Offered by ECE Department
V SEMESTER
SL.NO. COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C
1. 15ECA01 Communication Systems 3 0 0 3
2. 15ECA02 Microprocessors and Applications 3 0 0 3
3. 15ECA03 MATLAB Programming 2 0 2 3
4. 15ECA04 Antenna Fundamentals 3 0 0 3
5. 15ECA05 Television Engineering 3 0 0 3
VI SEMESTER
SL.NO. COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C
1. 15ECA06 Remote Sensing Techniques 3 0 0 3
2. 15ECA07 Embedded Systems 3 0 0 3
3. 15ECA08 Optical Communication 3 0 0 3
4. 15ECA09 Mobile Communication 3 0 0 3
5. 15ECA10 Very Large Scale Integrated Circuits 3 0 0 3
Offered by CSE Department
V SEMESTER
SL NO. COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C
1. 15CSA01 Internet Programming 3 0 0 3
2. 15CSA02 Fundamentals of Software Engineering 3 0 0 3
3. 15CSA03 Introduction to Database 3 0 0 3
4. 15CSA04 Introduction to Data Structures and Algorithms 3 0 0 3
5. 15CSA05 Fundamentals of Operating Systems 3 0 0 3
1. 15EEA01 Industrial Instrumentation 3 0 0 3
2. 15EEA02 Illumination Engineering 3 0 0 3
3. 15EEA03 Switched Mode Power Converters 3 0 0 3
4. 15EEA04 Power Plant Instrumentation and Control 3 0 0 3
5. 15EEA05 Electrical Machines and Drives 3 0 0 3
5
VI SEMESTER
SL NO. COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C
1. 15CSA06 Fundamentals of Cloud Computing 3 0 0 3
2. 15CSA07 Principles of Multimedia 3 0 0 3
3. 15CSA08 Introduction to Genetic Algorithms 3 0 0 3
4. 15CSA09 XML Programming 3 0 0 3
5. 15CSA10 Introduction to UML 3 0 0 3
6. 15CSA11 Introduction to Computer Organization 3 0 0 3
Offered by IT Department
V SEMESTER
SL.NO. COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C
1. 15ITA01 Introduction to Computer Graphics 3 0 0 3
2. 15ITA02 Rich Internet Application 3 0 0 3
3. 15ITA03 Introduction to Java 3 0 0 3
4. 15ITA04 Perl 3 0 0 3
5. 15ITA05 Fuzzy Systems 3 0 0 3
VI SEMESTER
SL.NO. COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C
1. 15ITA06 Graphics Programming 3 0 0 3
2. 15ITA07 PHP Programming 3 0 0 3
3. 15ITA08 Android Application Development 3 0 0 3
4. 15ITA09 Python Programming 3 0 0 3
5. 15ITA10 Decision Making Methods 3 0 0 3
Offered by Bio-Tech Department
V SEMESTER
SL.NO. COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C
1. 15BTA01 Basic Cell and Molecular Biology 3 0 0 3
2. 15BTA02 Basic Microbiology 3 0 0 3
3. 15BTA03 Basic Biochemistry 3 0 0 3
4. 15BTA04 Basic immunology 3 0 0 3
VI SEMESTER
SL.NO. COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C
1. 15BTA05 Chemicals in Environment and Public Health 3 0 0 3
2. 15BTA06 Biological Waste Management 3 0 0 3
3. 15BTA07 Nanobiotechnology 3 0 0 3
4. 15BTA08 Human Physiology 3 0 0 3
Offered by MBA Department
VI SEMESTER
SL.NO. COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C
1. 15BAA01 Essentials of Finance 3 0 0 3
2. 15BAA02 Essentials of Marketing 3 0 0 3
3. 15BAA03 Essentials of Human Resource Management 3 0 0 3
6
15HS101 Technical English – I
(Common to all UG Programmes)
L T P C
3 0 2 4
Course Objectives are to:
enable the students of Engineering and Technology build up vocabulary
improve grammatical accuracy
develop language functions
understand the basic nuances of language
Course Outcomes:
The students of Engineering and Technology will be able to build up their vocabulary
Grammatical accuracy will be improved
Language functions will be developed
The basic nuances of language will be understood
UNIT-I 12
Listening–Importance of listening- Types of listening - Listening to audio files and understanding the concept;
Speaking -Speaking about one’s place, important festivals etc. – Introducing oneself, one’s family / friend; Asking
for Information; Reading - Skimming and Scanning - Note-making - Reading comprehension exercises; Writing -
Free writing on any given topic (My favourite place / Hobbies / School life, etc.) - Sentence completion-
Autobiographical writing (writing about one’s leisure time activities, hometown, etc.) - Creative Writing;
Grammar–Parts of Speech- Kinds of Sentences- Framing questions; Vocabulary -Word formation - Word
expansion
UNIT-II 12
Listening - Listening and responding to video lectures / talks; Listening exercises with sample telephone
conversations; Speaking - Describing a simple process (filling a form, etc.) - Asking & answering questions on
various everyday activities: Telephone skills – Telephone etiquette. Reading – Critical reading - Finding key
information in a given text and paraphrasing - Sifting facts from opinions; Value Based Text Reading and
thematic analysis. Writing: Informal letter – Letter to the editor (Regarding Social Issues) - Single line Definitions
– Recommendations- Paragraph Writing; (cause & effect / compare & contrast / narrative / analytical)
Grammar– tense - Use of sequence words - Adverbs -; Vocabulary –prefixes and Suffixes -Compound words.
UNIT-III 12
Listening - Listening to specific task - focused audio tracks - Listening to different accents - Watching videos /
documentaries and responding to questions based on them and giving personal opinion.
Speaking - Speaking in formal situations (teachers, officials, foreigners); Role-play and Simulation
Reading - Reading and interpreting data given as visual material. Writing– Coherence and cohesion in writing- -
Channel conversion -Process descriptions – interpretations of Pictures of flow charts, graphs, pie charts and
tables - Essay writing – Different types of essays. Grammar– Articles - Connective adverbs – Subject-verb
agreement-; Vocabulary – Same word in a different parts of speech & Word Association
UNIT-IV 12
Listening - Excerpts from films focusing on theme and follow up exercises - film scenes; Speaking - Responding
to questions - Giving impromptu talks, Making presentations on given topics- Group interaction; Reading -
Making inference from the reading passage - Predicting the content of a reading passage; Jumbled sentences;
Writing - Business Letters- Sales and Credit letters; Letter of Enquiry; Letter of Quotation, Order, Claim and
Adjustment Letters. Grammar – Preposition – future time reference; Vocabulary - Single word substitutes - Use
7
of abbreviations & acronyms.
UNIT-V 12
Listening - Listening to Speeches/Presentations, Listening to broadcast & telecast from Radio & TV; Sample
interview; Speaking; Different forms of interviews - Speaking at different types of interview; Reading - Email
communication - Reading the attachment files having a poem/joke/proverb - Sending their responses through
email Writing; Writing: invititation letter, accepting, declining letter and permission letter, Creative writing,
Poster making, Interpreting posters; Grammar –Editing-Direct and indirect speech; Vocabulary - Lexical items
(fixed / semi fixed expressions).
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Dept. of English, Anna University, Chennai. Mindscapes: English for Technologists and Engineers.
Orient Black Swan, Chennai. 2012.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Raman, Meenakshi & Sangeetha Sharma. Technical Communication: English Skills for Engineers.
Oxford University Press, New Delhi. 2011.
2. Dhanavel, S.P. English and communication skills for students of science and Engineering.
Orient Black Swan publications, Chennai, 2011.
3. Rizvi M, Ashraf. Effective Technical Communication. Tata McGraw-Hill publishing company limited,
New Delhi, 2007.
4. Rutherford, Andrea J. Basic Communication Skills for Technology. Pearson Edition
(II Edition), New Delhi, 2001.
Extensive reading:
1. Kalam, Abdul. The Wings of Fire, Universities Press, Hyderabad. 1999.
15BS101 MATHEMATICS I
(Common to all UG Programmes)
L T P C
3 2 0 4
Course Objectives are to:
To know the matrix algebra techniques needed by engineers for practical applications
To make the student knowledgeable in the area of infinite series and their convergence so that he/ she
will be familiar with limitations of using infinite series approximations for solutions arising in
mathematical modeling
To familiarize the student with functions of several variables. This is needed in engineering problems
To introduce the concepts of improper integrals, Gamma, Beta functions which are needed in
engineering problems
To acquaint the student with mathematical tools needed in evaluating multiple integrals and their usage
Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course, the students are able to
Expertise matrix algebra
Apply tests of convergence
Understand and apply functions of several variables
Evaluate integrals using Beta and Gamma functions
8
Expertise multiple integrals and their usage
UNIT 0 (Not for Examination) 5+ 0
Basic concepts on limits, continuity, derivative & integrals of a single variable
UNIT-I MATRICES 9 + 3
Characteristic equation - Eigen values and Eigenvectors of a real matrix– Properties of eigen values and
eigenvectors – Cayley-Hamilton Theorem – Diagonalization of matrices – Reduction of a quadratic form to
canonical form by orthogonal transformation – Nature of quadratic forms
UNIT-II FUNCTIONS OF SEVERAL VARIABLES 9 + 3
Partial derivatives –Homogeneous functions and Euler’s theorem-Total derivative – Differentiation of implicit
functions-Change of variables - Jacobians – Partial differentiation of implicit functions – Taylor’s series for
functions of two variables – Errors and approximations - Maxima and minima of functions of two variables –
Lagrange’s method of undetermined multipliers
UNIT-III INFINITE SERIES 9 + 3
Sequences – Convergence of series – General properties – Series of positive terms – Tests for convergence:
Comparison test, Integral test, Comparison of ratios and D’Alembert’s ratio test (Proofs excluded) – Alternating
series – Series of positive and negative terms – Absolute and conditional convergence – Power Series –
Convergence of exponential, logarithmic and Binomial Series
UNIT-IV IMPROPER INTEGRALS 9 + 3
Improper integrals of the first and second kind and their convergence – Evaluation of integrals involving one
parameter by Leibnitz rule – Beta and Gamma functions – Properties – Evaluation of integrals using Beta and
Gamma functions – Error functions
UNIT-V MULTIPLE INTEGRALS 9 + 3
Double integrals – Change of order of integration – Double integrals in polar coordinates – Area enclosed by
plane curves – Triple integrals– Triple integrals in cylindrical and spherical coordinates – Volume of Solids
L= 45 hours T = 15 hours Total = 60 hours
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Grewal B.S., “Higher Engineering Mathematics”, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 43rd
Edition, 2013
2. Erwin Kreyszig, “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, John Wiley & Sons (ASIA) Pvt. Ltd, Singapore,
9th
Edition, 2013
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Jain R.K. and Iyengar S.R.K., “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Narosa Publications, New Delhi,
4th
Edition, 2014
2. Greenberg M.D., “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2nd
Edition,
11th
Reprint, 2013
3. Peter V.O’Neil, “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Cengage Learning India Pvt., Ltd, New Delhi, 7th
Edition, 2012
4. Monty J. Strauss, Gerald L. Bradley, Karl J. Smith, “Calculus”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 3rd
Edition 2007 (For Unit 0-Section 2.1,2.3,3.1,5.2, Unit – 2,3,5)
5. Ramana B.V, “Higher Engineering Mathematics”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing
Company, New Delhi, 11th
Reprint, 2010
9
15BS102 ENGINEERING PHYSICS
(Common to all UG Programmes)
LT PC
30 0 3
Course Objective
To impart sound knowledge about basic concepts of physics.
To introduce the basic physics concepts relevant to different branches of Engineering and Technology
To introduce the fundamentals of physics and its applications in engineering.
Course Outcomes:
The students are able to understand the elastic properties of the materials.
The students will acquire knowledge about solid state physics.
The students will acquire knowledge about the basic concepts of physics in the topics such as
acoustics, ultrasonics, thermal physics, and applied optics.
UNITI PROPERTIES OF MATTER 9
Elasticity - Poisson’s ratio and relationship between moduli (qualitative) - Stress-strain diagram and its uses -
factors affecting tensile strength - bending of beams - cantilever - bending moment - theory and experiment of
Young’s modulus determination - Uniform and non-uniform bending - I shaped girders - twisting couple - hollow
cylinder - shaft - torsion pendulum - determination of rigidity modulus- moment of inertia of a body (regular and
irregular).
UNITII ACOUSTICS AND ULTRASONICS 9
Classification of sound - loudness and intensity - Weber-Fechner Law - standard intensity and intensity level -
decibel - reverberation - reverberation time - rate of growth and decay of sound intensity - derivation of Sabine’s
formula - absorption coefficient and its determination – factors affecting acoustics of buildings : focusing,
interference, echo, Echelon effect, resonance - noise and their remedies. Ultrasonics - production -
magnetostriction and piezoelectric methods - detection of ultrasound - acoustic grating - industrial applications -
NDT – Ultrasonic method: scan modes and practice.
UNITIII THERMAL PHYSICS 9
Thermal expansion - thermal stress - expansion joints - bimetallic strips - thermal conductivity- conductions in
solids - Forbe’s and Lees’ disc methods - Rectilinear flow of heat through a rod -flow of heat through a
compound media - radial flow of heat – thermal insulation of buildings – Laws of blackbody radiation: Kirchhoff’s
law, Stephens law, Wien’s law, Raleigh-Jean’s law and Planck’s law (derivation). Laws of thermodynamics -
Otto and diesel engines and their efficiency - entropy - entropy of Carnot’s cycle - reverse Carnot’s cycle -
refrigerator.
UNITIV APPLIED OPTICS 9
Interference - Michelson interferometer: construction, working, determination of wave length and thickness - anti-
reflection coating - air wedge and its application - Lasers - Einstein’s coefficients - CO2, Nd:YAG and
semiconductor lasers - homojunction and heterojunction -construction and working - applications - Optical fibers -
classification (index & mode based) - principle and propagation of light in optical fibers - acceptance angle and
numerical aperture - fiber optic communication system - active and passive sensors.
UNITV SOLID STATE PHYSICS 9
Growth of single crystals-Czochralski method and Bridgeman-Stockbarger method - unit cell, crystal systems,
Bravais space lattices - crystal planes and directions, Miller indices - expressions for interplanar distance -
coordination number and packing factor for simple structures: SC, BCC, FCC and HCP - structure and
significance of NaCl, ZnS, diamond and graphite - crystal imperfections: point defects, dislocations and stacking
faults.
10
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
T1. Marikani A, Engineering Physics, PHI, New Delhi, 2013.
T2. Gaur R.K., and Gupta, S.L., Engineering Physics, Dhanpat Raj Publications, 2013
REFERENCE BOOKS:
R1. Sankar, B.N., Pillai.S.O., Engineering Physics, New Age International (P) Ltd., 2009.
R2. Palanisamy, P.K., Engineering Physics, Scitech Publications (P) Ltd, 2009.
R3. Arumugam, M., Engineering Physics, Anuradha Publications, 2000.
R4. John W. Jewett. Jr, and Raymon A. Serway, Physics for Scientists and Engineers with Modern Physics
– Seventh Edition, Cengage Learnings, Delhi, India, 2013.
R5. David Halliday, Robert Resnick and Jearl Walker, Fundamentals of Physics, sixth edition, John Wiley
and Sons, New Delhi, 2010.
15BS103 ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY
(Common to all UG Programmes)
LT PC
30 0 3
Course Objective
The student should be familiar with
1. The treatment of water for potable and industrial purposes.
2. The principles of electrochemistry, electrochemical cells, emf and applications of emf measurements.
3. The principles of corrosion and corrosion control techniques.
4. Different materials and their engineering applications.
Different types of fuels and combustion.
Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course the student will be able to
1. Understand the basic principles of water quality parameters, their analysis and various water treatment
processes for domestic and industrial applications.
2. Understand the basic principles of electrochemistry and its applications.
3. Know the principles, various types of corrosion and corrosion control techniques.
4. Have a sound knowledge on various engineering materials and their industrial applications.
Have a sound knowledge on different types of fuels.
UNITI WATER TECHNOLOGY 9
Characteristics of water – alkalinity – types of alkalinity and determination – hardness – types of hardness and
estimation by EDTA method (problems on calculation of hardness only); Boiler feed water – requirements –
disadvantages of using hard water in boilers – priming and foaming – scales and sludges – caustic embrittlement
– boiler corrosion – external conditioning (demineralization process) – internal conditioning (colloidal, phosphate,
carbonate and calgon conditionings) – Domestic water treatment – disinfection methods (Chlorination,
Ozonation, UV treatment) – break point chlorination – salinity – desalination by reverse osmosis.
UNITII ELECTROCHEMISTRY 9
Electrochemical cells – reversible and irreversible cells – EMF – measurement of emf – Single electrode potential
– Nernst equation (problems) – reference electrodes – Standard Hydrogen electrode – Calomel electrode – Ion
11
selective electrode – glass electrode and measurement of pH – Standard Cell – electrochemical series –
significance – potentiometric redox titration – conductometric titrations (Strong acid Vs Strong base and Weak
acid Vs Strong base)
UNITIII CORROSION AND ITS CONTROL 9
Chemical corrosion – Pilling-Bedworth rule – electrochemical corrosion – differential aeration corrosion – factors
influencing corrosion – different types – galvanic corrosion – erosion corrosion – pitting corrosion – crevice
corrosion – waterline corrosion – stress corrosion – corrosion control – sacrificial anode and impressed current
cathodic methods – corrosion inhibitors – Protective coatings – metallic coating – pretreatment of surface –
hotdipping – spraying – cladding – cementation – electroplating (Cr, Cu, Ni and Au) – electrolessplating
(electroless nickel plating only).
UNITIV ENGINEERING MATERIALS 9
Refractories – classification – acidic, basic and neutral refractories – properties (refractoriness, refractoriness
under load, dimensional stability, porosity, thermal spalling) – manufacture of alumina, magnesite and zirconia
bricks.
Lubricants – mechanism of lubrication, liquid lubricants – properties (viscosity index, flash and fire points, cloud
and pour points, oiliness) – solid lubricants – graphite and molybdenum disulphide – semi solid lubricants and
emulsions.
Nanomaterials – introduction to nano chemistry – carbon nanotubes and their applications.
UNITV FUELS AND COMBUSTION 9
Fuels – Classification – Calorific value (Problems using Dulong’s formula) – Coal – proximate and ultimate
analysis – Hydrogenation of coal – Petroleum – processing and fractions – cracking – catalytic cracking and
methods – knocking – octane number and cetane number – synthetic petrol – Fischer-Tropsch and Bergius
processes – Gaseous fuels – Natural gas, CNG and LPG – Flue gas analysis – Orsat apparatus – Combustion –
theoretical calculation of air (Problems on calculation of weight of air only).
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
T1. P.C. Jain and Monika Jain, Engineering Chemistry, Dhanpat Rai Publishing Co.(P) Ltd., 16th
Edition,
New Delhi (2013).
T2. S.S.Dara, A text book of engineering chemistry, S. Chand & Co. Ltd., New Delhi (2010).
REFERENCE BOOKS:
R1. Mars G. Fontana, Corrosion Engineering, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company (P) Ltd., New Delhi
(2009).
R2. B. K. Sharma, Engineering chemistry, Krishna Prakasan Media (P) Ltd., Meerut (2006).
R3. B. Sivasankar, Engineering Chemistry, Tata McGraw-Hill Pub. Co. Ltd, New Delhi (2008).
15GE101 COMPUTER PROGRAMMING
(Common to all UG Programmes)
L T P C
3 0 0 3
Course Objectives:
To gain knowledge on problem solving techniques
To learn how to write modular and readable C programs
To understand the usage of arrays and strings
To learn to use pointers to access and manipulate memory
12
To exploit the notion of derived data types and files
Course Outcomes:
Solve problems using sound techniques
Develop modular C programs for a given problem
Store and manipulate homogeneous data using arrays and strings
Write programs that uses memory based on the run time needs
Store and manipulate heterogeneous data using structures
Write programs that manipulate data stored on permanent storage
UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF C 9
Basic Organization of a Computer - Problem Solving Techniques: Introduction to Algorithm, Pseudo code, Flow
Chart.
Structure of ‘C’ program, compilation and linking processes - C Tokens: Keywords, Data Types, Constants,
Variables - Declaration - Qualifiers - typedef - Enumeration - Pre-processor directives (#include, #define)
UNIT II BASIC CONSTRUCTS IN C 9
Managing simple Input and Output operations - Operators and Expressions - Decision Making: Branching
statements, Looping statements - Function: Declaration, Definition - Recursion - Storage classes
UNIT III ARRAYS AND STRINGS IN C 8
Arrays: Initialization - One dimensional, Two dimensional, and Multi-dimensional arrays - String: String
operations, Manipulating Strings - Pre-processor directives (#if, #else, #elif, #ifdef, #ifndef)
UNIT IV POINTERS IN C 10
Pointers - Parameter passing mechanism in functions - Dynamic Memory Allocation - Pointer arithmetic -
Pointers and one dimensional array - Pointers and Multi-Dimensional Array: Array of Pointers, Pointer to Pointer,
Pointer to an array - void Pointer - Pointer to function - Command Line Arguments
UNIT V STRUCTURES, UNIONS AND FILE HANDLING IN C 9
Structure: Declaration, Definition-Array of Structures - Pointer to Structure - Structure within a Structure - Bit
fields in Structure - Union - Files: File Management functions, Working with Text Files and Binary Files
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Pradip Dey, Manas Ghosh, “Fundamentals of Computing and Programming in C”, First Edition, Oxford
University Press, 2009
2. Byron S Gottfried, “Programming with C, Schaum’s Outlines”, Third Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2010
reprint.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Brian.W.Kernighan and Dennis.M.Ritchie, “The C Programming language”, Second Edition, Pearson
Education, 2006 reprint.
2. R.G. Dromey, “How to Solve it by Computer”, Pearson Education, 2008
3. Al Kelley, Ira Pohl, “A Book on C : Programming in C”, Fourth Edition, Pearson Education, 2008 reprint
4. Deitel.P.J and Deitel.H.M, “C How to Program”, Sixth Edition, Prentice-Hall of India, 2009 reprint.
5. Ashok N. Kamthane, “Computer programming”, Second Edition, Pearson Education, 2012.
13
6. Yashavant P. Kanetkar, “Let Us C”, Thirteenth Edition, BPB Publications, 2012.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://www.tutorialspoint.com/cprogramming/index.htm
2. http://www.cprogramming.com/tutorial/c-tutorial.html
3. http://www.w3schools.in/c
4. http://fresh2refresh.com/c-tutorial-for-beginners
15GE102 ENGINEERING GRAPHICS
(Common to all UG Programmes)
L T P C
2 0 4 4
Course Objectives:
To gain knowledge on the basics of Engineering Drawing construction procedures.
To understand the principles involved in graphic skill for communication of concepts, ideas and design
of Engineering products.
To draw the drawing of various solids.
To expose the above to existing national standards related to technical drawings.
An ability to draw the drawing for any given object to the required standard.
Course Outcomes:
Sketch multiple views of Engineering components
Create the projection of point, straight line and plane
Project the solid objects
Section the solid
Develop lateral surfaces of solids
Apply isometric and perspective projections
Concepts and Conventions (Not For Examination) 5
Importance of graphics in engineering applications – Use of drafting instruments – BIS
conventions and specifications – Lettering and Dimensioning-Size, layout and folding of drawing sheets.
UNITI PLANE CURVES AND PICTORIAL VIEWS TO ORTHOGRAPHIC
VIEWS
14
Geometrical Constructions like bisection of a straight line, division of a straight line into n equal parts, bisection
of angles, Curves used in engineering practices: Conics – Construction of ellipse, parabola and hyperbola by
eccentricity method – Construction of cycloid – Construction of involutes of square and circle – Drawing of
tangents and normal to the above curves.
Orthographic projection – Principles – Principal planes- Representation of Three Dimensional objects – Layout
of views– Sketching of multiple views (Front, Top and Side views) from pictorial views of simple objects and
Engineering Components.
UNITII PROJECTION OF POINTS, LINES AND PLANE SURFACES 14
First Angle projection–Projection of points in four quadrants. Projection of straight lines (only First angle
projection) inclined to both the principal planes – Determination of true lengths and true inclinations by rotating
line method and traces.
Projection of planes (polygonal and circular surfaces) inclined to both the principal planes by change of position
method.
UNITIII PROJECTION OF SOLIDS 14
Projection of simple solids like prisms, pyramids, cylinder and cone when the axis is inclined to one of the
principal planes by change of position method. Projection of simple solids when the axis inclined to both planes.
14
UNITIV SECTION OF SOLIDS AND DEVELOPMENT OF LATERAL
SURFACES OF SOLIDS
14
Sectioning of above solids in simple vertical position when the cutting plane is inclined to the one of the principal
planes and perpendicular to the other – Obtaining true shape of the section.
Development of lateral surfaces of simple solids – Prisms, pyramids, cylinders and cones. Development of
lateral surfaces of sectioned solids and simple applications like funnel.
UNITV ISOMETRIC AND PERSPECTIVE PROJECTIONS 14
Principles of isometric projection – Isometric scale –Isometric View– Isometric projections of simple solids and
cut solids – Prisms, pyramids, cylinders, cones– Combination of two solid objects in simple vertical positions.
Perspective projection of simple solids–Prisms, pyramids and cylinders by visual ray method.
TOTAL: 75 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. N.D. Bhatt, “Engineering Drawing” Charotar Publishing House, 50th
Edition, (2010).
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Gopalakrishna K.R., “Engineering Drawing” (Vol. I&II combined), Subhas Stores, Bangalore, 2007.
2. Luzzader, Warren.J. and Duff,John M., “Fundamentals of Engineering Drawing with an
introduction to Interactive Computer Graphics for Design and Production, Eastern Economy Edition,
Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi, 2005.
3. Shah M.B., and Rana B.C., “Engineering Drawing”, Pearson, 2nd Edition, 2009.
4. Venugopal K. and Prabhu Raja V., “Engineering Graphics”, New Age International (P) Limited, 2008.
5. Natrajan K.V., “A text book of Engineering Graphics”, Dhanalakshmi Publishers, Chennai, 2009.
6. Basant Agarwal and Agarwal C.M., “Engineering Drawing”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company
Limited, New Delhi, 2008.
Publication of Bureau of Indian Standards:
1. IS 10711 – 2001: Technical products Documentation – Size and lay out of drawing
sheets.
2. IS 9609 (Parts 0 & 1) – 2001: Technical products Documentation – Lettering.
3. IS 10714 (Part 20) – 2001 & SP 46 – 2003: Lines for technical drawings.
4. IS 11669 – 1986 & SP 46 – 2003: Dimensioning of Technical Drawings.
5. IS 15021 (Parts 1 to 4) – 2001: Technical drawings – Projection Methods.
Special points applicable to End Semester Examinations on Engineering Graphics:
1. There will be five questions, each of either or type covering all units of the syllabus.
2. All questions will carry equal marks of 20 each making a total of 100.
3. The answer paper shall consist of drawing sheets of A3 size only. The students will be permitted
to use appropriate scale to fit solution within A3 size.
4. The examination will be conducted in appropriate sessions on the same day
15BS151 PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY LABORATORY
(Common to all UG Programmes)
(Classes on alternate weeks for Physics and Chemistry)
L T PC
0 0 4 2
Course Objectives:
To have a study on determination of Rigidity modulus and Young’s modulus
To be familiar with findings thickness of a thin paper
15
To deal with the determination of Ultrasonic velocity
To have a study on estimation of hardness and alkalinity of water
To deal with Conductometric titration and Potentiometric titration
Course Outcomes:
Find the moment of inertia of disc and Rigidity modulus of wire
Determine thickness of a thin sheet of paper
Find the specific resistance of wire
Estimate hardness and Alkalinity of water sample
Do Conductometric titration and Potentiometric titration
Find corrosion rate
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS FOR PHYSICS LABORATORY (Any FIVE Experiments)
1. Torsional pendulum – Determination of rigidity modulus of wire and moment of inertia of disc.
2. Non-uniform pending- Young’s modulus determination
3. Air-wedge- Determination of thickness of a thin sheet of paper
4. Spectrometer- Determination of wavelength of Hg spectrum using grating
5. Lee’s disc-Determination of thermal conductivity of bad conductor
6. Determination of ultrasonic velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid – Ultrasonic interferometer.
7. Carey Foster Bridge- Determination of specific resistance of the given coil of wire.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Physics Laboratory Manual, Department of Physics, Mepco Schlenk Engineering College, Sivakasi.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS FOR CHEMISTRY LABORATORY (Any FIVE Experiments)
1. Estimation of hardness of water by EDTA method
2. Estimation of alkalinity of water sample
3. pH-metric titration (acid & base)
4. Conductometric titration (strong acid Vs strong base)
5. Conductometric titration (mixture of acids Vs Strong base)
6. Potentiometric titration between ferrous ion and potassium dichromate
7. Determination of corrosion rate by weight loss method
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. J. Mendham, R.C. Denney, J. D. Barnes, M.J.K. Thomas, Vogel's Quantitative Chemical Analysis,
Prentice Hall, India, 2000.
2. D.P. Shoemaker and C.W. Garland, Experiments in Physical Chemistry, McGraw Hill, London, 2001.
15GE151 COMPUTER PROGRAMMING LABORATORY
(Common to all UG Programmes)
L T PC
0 0 4 2
Course Objectives:
To develop C programs using conditional and looping statements
To understand the principles of arrays and strings
To learn to access memory using pointers
To group different kinds of information related to a single entity
16
To understand the manipulation of data in permanent storage
Course Outcomes:
Implement programs using control statements
Write programs using arrays and strings
Access data in memory using pointers
Use structures to manipulate heterogeneous data
Manipulate data stored on permanent storage
SYLLABUS FOR THE LABORATORY:
0. Study of simple Document Processing & Presentation Preparation
Study of basic OS commands, Software Engineering Practices -2 sessions (Not for End Examination)
1. Programs using simple statements
2. Programs using decision making statements
3. Programs using looping statements
4. Programs using user defined functions and recursive functions
5. Programs using one dimensional and two dimensional arrays
6. Solving problems using string functions
7. Programs using pointers and dynamic memory allocation
8. Programs using structures and unions
9. Programs using pointers to structures and other data types
10. Programs using text files
11. Programs using binary files
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Pradip Dey, Manas Ghosh, “Fundamentals of Computing and Programming in C”, First Edition, Oxford
University Press, 2009
2. Brian.W.Kernighan and Dennis.M.Ritchie, “The C Programming language”, Second Edition, Pearson
Education, 2006 reprint.
3. Byron S Gottfried, “Programming with C”, Schaum’s Outlines, Third Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2010
reprint.
4. Deitel.P.J and Deitel.H.M, “C How to Program”, Sixth Edition, Prentice-Hall of India,2009
5. Yashavant P. Kanetkar, “Let Us C”, Thirteenth Edition, BPB Publications, 2012.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://www.tutorialspoint.com/cprogramming/index.htm
2. http://www.cprogramming.com/tutorial/c-tutorial.html
3. http://www.w3schools.in/c
4. http://fresh2refresh.com/c-tutorial-for-beginners
15GE152 ENGINEERING PRACTICES LABORATORY
(Common to all UG Programmes)
LT P C
0 0 4 2
Course Objectives:
To provide exposure to the students with hands on experience on various basic engineering practices
17
in Civil, Mechanical, Electrical and Electronics Engineering.
To have a study and hands-on-exercise on plumbing and carpentry components.
To have a practice on gas welding, foundry operations and fitting
To have a study on measurement of electical quantities, energy and resistance to earth.
To have a practice on soldering
Course Outcomes:
Do pipe connections with different joining components.
Create joints for roofs, doors, windows and furniture
Prepare square fitting and vee fitting models
Do residential house wiring
Measure energy and resistance to earth of an electrical equipment
Apply soldering
GROUP A (CIVIL & MECHANICAL)
I CIVIL ENGINEERING PRACTICE 9
Buildings:
Study of plumbing and carpentry components of residential and industrial buildings, Safety aspects.
Plumbing Works:
1. Study of pipeline joints, its location and functions: valves, taps, couplings, unions, reducers, and elbows
in household fittings.
2. Study of pipe connections requirements for pumps and turbines.
3. Preparation of plumbing line sketches for water supply and sewage works.
4. Hands-on-exercise: Basic pipe connections – Mixed pipe material connection – Pipe connections with
different joining components.
5. Demonstration of plumbing requirements of high-rise buildings.
Carpentry using Power Tools only:
1. Study of the joints in roofs, doors, windows and furniture.
2. Hands-on-exercise: Wood work, joints by sawing, planning and cutting.
II MECHANICAL ENGINEERING PRACTICE 13
Welding:
Preparation of arc welding of butt joints, lap joints and tee joints.
Basic Machining:
1. Simple Turning, Step turning
2. Drilling Practice using drilling machine.
Sheet Metal Work:
1. Forming & Bending:
2. Model making – Trays, funnels, etc.
18
3. Different type of joints.
Machine assembly practice:
1. Study of centrifugal pump
2. Study of air conditioner
Demonstration on:
1. Gas welding practice
2. Smithy operations, upsetting, swaging, setting down and bending. Example –Exercise – Production of
hexagonal headed bolt.
3. Foundry operations like mould preparation for gear and step cone pulley.
4. Fitting – Exercises – Preparation of square fitting and vee – fitting models.
GROUP B (ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS)
III ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING PRACTICE 10
1. Residential house wiring using switches, fuse, indicator, lamp and energy meter.
2. Fluorescent lamp wiring.
3. Stair case wiring
4. Measurement of electrical quantities – voltage, current, power & power factor in RLC circuit.
5. Measurement of energy using single phase energy meter.
6. Measurement of resistance to earth of an electrical equipment.
IV ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING PRACTICE 13
1. Study of Electronic components and equipments – Resistor, colour coding measurement of AC signal
parameter (peak-peak, rms period, frequency) using CRO.
2. Study of logic gates AND, OR, EXOR and NOT.
3. Generation of Clock Signal.
4. Soldering practice – Components Devices and Circuits – Using general purpose PCB.
5. Measurement of ripple factor of HWR and FWR.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. K.Jeyachandran, S.Natarajan & S, Balasubramanian, “A Primer on Engineering Practices Laboratory”,
Anuradha Publications, (2007).
2. T.Jeyapoovan, M.Saravanapandian & S.Pranitha, “Engineering Practices Lab Manual”, Vikas Publishing
House Pvt. Ltd, (2006)
3. H.S. Bawa, “Workshop Practice”, Tata McGraw – Hill Publishing Company Limited, (2007).
4. A.Rajendra Prasad & P.M.M.S. Sarma, “Workshop Practice”, Sree Sai Publication, (2002).
5. P.Kannaiah & K.L.Narayana, “Manual on Workshop Practice”, Scitech Publications, (1999).
SEMESTER EXAMINATION PATTERN
The Laboratory examination is to be conducted for Group A & Group B, allotting 90 minutes for each group, with
19
a break of 15 minutes. Both the examinations are to be taken together in sequence, either in the FN session or in
the AN session. The maximum marks for Group A and Group B lab examinations will be 50 each, totaling 100 for
the Lab course. The candidates shall answer either I or II under Group A and either III or IV under Group B,
based on lots.
List of equipment and components
(For a Batch of 30 Students)
CIVIL ENGINEERING
1. Assorted components for plumbing consisting of metallic pipes, plastic pipes,
flexible pipes, couplings, unions, elbows, plugs and other fittings.
15 Sets.
2. Carpentry vice (fitted to work bench) 15 Nos.
3. Standard woodworking tools 15 Sets.
4. Models of industrial trusses, door joints, furniture joints 5 each
5. Power Tools:
(a) Rotary Hammer 2 Nos.
(b) Demolition Hammer 2 Nos.
(c) Circular Saw 2 Nos.
(d) Planer 2 Nos.
(e) Hand Drilling Machine 2 Nos.
(f) Jigsaw 2 Nos.
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
1. Arc welding transformer with cables and holders 5 Nos.
2. Welding booth with exhaust facility 5 Nos.
3. Welding accessories like welding shield, chipping hammer, wire brush, etc. 5 Sets.
4. Oxygen and acetylene gas cylinders, blow pipe and other welding outfit. 2 Nos.
5. Centre lathe 10 Nos.
6. Drilling machine 2 Nos.
7. Hearth furnace, anvil and smithy tools 2 Sets
8. Moulding table, foundry tools 2 Sets
9. Power Tool: Angle Grinder 2 Nos.
10. . Study-purpose items: centrifugal pump, air-conditioner 1 each.
ELECTRICAL
1. Assorted electrical components for house wiring 10 Sets
2. Electrical measuring instruments 15 Sets.
3. Study purpose items: Iron box, fan and regulator, emergency lamp 1 each
4. Megger (250V/500V). 1 No.
5. Power Tools: (a) Range Finder 2 Nos.
(b) Digital Live-wire detector 2 Nos.
ELECTRONICS
1. Soldering guns 10 Nos.
2. Assorted electronic components for making circuits 50 Nos.
3. Small PCBs 10 Nos.
4. Multimeters 10 Nos.
5. Study purpose items: Telephone, FM radio, low-voltage power supply 2 Nos.
20
15HS201 Technical English – II
(Common to all UG Programmes)
L T P C
3 0 0 3
Course Objectives are to:
make the students of Engineering and Technology enhance their communicative skills
strengthen LSRW skills
boost up creative and critical thinking
master the skills of writing
face the challenges of the competitive world
Course Outcomes:
The students of Engineering and Technology will be able to enhance LSRW skills
Their creative and critical thinking will be enriched
The students will be able to face the challenges of the competitive world
UNIT I 15
Listening - Listening to informal conversations and participating; Listening to different types of conversation and
answering questions. Speaking - Opening a conversation (greetings, comments on topics like weather) - Turn
taking - Closing a conversation (excuses, general wish, positive comment, and thanks); narrating personal
experience. Reading - Developing analytical skills, Deductive and inductive reasoning - intensive reading.
Writing - Biography Writing- Effective use of SMS for sending short notes and messages - Using ‘emoticons’ as
symbols in messages -e-mail/blogs - Posting reviews in blogs. Grammar – Regular and irregular verbs - Modal
verbs - Purpose expressions. Vocabulary – Match the Synonyms- Homonyms and Homophones.
UNIT II 7
Listening - Listening to situation based dialogues - Conversations between great leaders and celebrities.
Speaking - Conversation practice in real life situations, asking for directions (using polite expressions), giving
directions (using imperative sentences), Purchasing goods from a shop, Discussing various aspects of a film
(they have already seen) or a book (they have already read); Dialogues (Fill up exercises), Recording students’
dialogues. Reading - Reading a short story or an article from newspaper, Critical reading, Comprehension skills;
Extensive reading activity (reading stories / novels); Writing - Writing a review / summary of a story /article -
Product Description -Dialogue Writing- memos and circulars. Grammar - Use of clauses - Conditional clauses -
Phrasal verbs and their meanings, Using phrasal verbs in sentences– Conjunctions. Vocabulary :
Descriptive words & phrases,
UNIT III 6
Listening - Listening to the conversation with various accents/dialects - Understanding the structure of
conversations. Speaking -Conversation skills with a sense of stress, intonation, pronunciation and meaning –
Seeking information – expressing feelings (affection, anger, regret, etc.). Reading - Speed reading – reading
passages with time limit - Skimming; Writing - Minutes of meeting – format and practice in the preparation of
minutes - Writing summary after reading articles from journals - Giving instructions Grammar - Reported speech
- Active and passive voice - American and British English.
Vocabulary - Words used as nouns and verbs without any change in the Spelling.
UNIT IV 7
Listening - Listening to a telephone conversation, Viewing model interviews (face-to-face, telephonic
and video conferencing); Speaking - Role play practice in telephone skills - listening and responding - asking
questions, -note taking – passing on messages, Role play and mock interview for grasping interview skills;
21
Telephonic interview – recording the responses. Reading - Reading the job advertisements and the profile of the
company concerned. Writing - Applying for a job – cover letter - résumé preparation – vision, mission and goals
of the candidate; e-résumé writing. Writing Advertisements for a Product. Grammar - Numerical expressions -
discourse markers -Adjectives and comparative Adjectives. Vocabulary -Idioms and their meanings – Using
idioms in sentences - Phrases used for Advertisements
UNIT V 10
Listening - Viewing a model debate and reviewing the performance of each participant - Identifying the
characteristics of a good listener; Sample Debate Speaking - Group communication skills –assertiveness in
expressing opinions – mind mapping technique; Reading - making notes from books, Newspaper or any form of
written materials. Writing – Itinerary - Checklist - report writing – recommendations / suggestions – interpretation
of data (using charts for effective presentation) - Note making skills. Grammar–Infinitives and Gerunds - Cause
and effect expressions.Vocabulary – Collocation.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Dept. of English, Anna University, Chennai. Mindscapes: English for Technologists and Engineers.
Orient Black Swan, Chennai. 2012.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Raman, Meenakshi & Sangeetha Sharma. Technical Communication: English Skills for Engineers.
Oxford University Press, New Delhi. 2011.
2. Dhanavel, S.P. English and communication skills for students of science and Engineering.
Orient Black Swan publications, Chennai, 2011.
3. Rizvi M, Ashraf. Effective Technical Communication. Tata McGraw-Hill publishing company limited,
New Delhi, 2007.
4. Rutherford, Andrea J. Basic Communication Skills for Technology. Pearson Edition
(II Edition), New Delhi, 2001.
Extensive reading:
1. Wells, H.G. The Time machine, Peacock, India, 2008.
15BS201 MATHEMATICS II
(Common to all UG Programmes)
L T P C
3 2 0 4
Course Objectives are to:
To make the student acquire sound knowledge of techniques in solving ordinary differential equations
obtained from engineering problems
To acquaint the student with the concepts of vector calculus that is needed for problems in engineering
disciplines
To know the standard techniques of complex variable theory so as to enable the student to apply them
with confidence, in application areas such as heat conduction, elasticity, fluid dynamics and flow of the
electric current
To make the student for appreciating the purpose of using transforms to create a new domain in which it
is earlier to handle the problem that is being investigated.
22
Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course, the students are able to
Apply different techniques to solve ordinary differential equations
Solve engineering problems using vector calculus
Use complex variable theory for applications like heat conduction, fluid dynamics etc.
Transform given problem to a new domain for solving it efficiently
UNIT 0 (Not for Examinations) 5+0
Reviews of integration concepts
UNIT I DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 9+3
Method of variation of parameters –Method of undetermined coefficients – Homogeneous equation of Euler’s
and Legendre’s type – System of Simultaneous first order linear equations with constant coefficients
UNIT II VECTOR CALCULUS 9+3
Gradient and Directional derivative – Divergence and Curl – Irrotational and solenoidal vector fields – Line
integral over a plane curve – Surface integral and Volume integral– Green’s, Gauss divergence and Stokes’
theorems (excluding proofs) – Verification and application in evaluating line, surface and volume integrals
UNIT III ANALYTIC FUNCTIONS 9+3
Analytic functions – Necessary and Sufficient conditions for analyticity – properties – Harmonic conjugates –
Construction of analytic functions – Conformal mapping – Mapping by functions w= z+c, cz, 1/z, z+1/z, and -
Bilinear transformation.
UNIT IV COMPLEX INTEGRATION 9+3
Line integral – Cauchy’s theorem and integral formula – Taylor’s and Laurent’s series – Singularities – Residues
– Residue theorem – Application of residue theorem for evaluation of real integrals – Use of circular contour and
semi-circular contour with no pole on real axis
UNIT V LAPLACE TRANSFORM 9+3
Laplace transform – Transforms of elementary functions – Basic properties – Transform of derivatives and
integrals – Transform of periodic functions - Initial and Final value theorems – Inverse Transforms – Convolution
theorem –Application to solution of linear ODE with constant coefficients
TOTAL: 65 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Grewal. B.S, “Higher Engineering Mathematics”,, Khanna Publications, New Delhi, 43rd
edition (2013)
2. Erwin Kreyszig, “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, John Wiley & Sons Pvt. Ltd, Singapore, 9th
Edition, 2006, (Reprint 2013)
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Jain R.K. and Iyengar S.R.K., “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Narosa Publications, New Delhi,
4th
Edition, 2014
2. Greenberg M.D., “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2nd
Edition,
11th
Reprint, 2013
3. Peter V.O’Neil, “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Cengage Learning India Pvt., Ltd, New Delhi, 7th
Edition, 2012
23
4. Monty J. Strauss, Gerald L. Bradley, Karl J. Smith, “Calculus”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 3rd
Edition 2007 (For Unit 0-Section 5.2, Unit – 1,2)
5. Ramana B.V, “Higher Engineering Mathematics”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing
Company, New Delhi, 11th
Reprint, 2010
15BS202 ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE AND DISASTER MANAGEMENT
(Common to all UG Programme)
L T P C
3 0 0 3
Course Objectives:
The student is expected to understand
What constitutes the environment, what are precious resources in the environment, how to conserve
these resources, what is the role of a human being in maintaining a clean environment and useful
environment for the future generations and how to maintain ecological balance and preserve bio-
diversity.
The role of government and non-government organizations in environment management.
About Disaster and its management.
Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course the student will be able to
Understand the basic concepts of environment studies and natural resources.
Get the thorough knowledge about ecosystem and biodiversity.
Have an elaborate knowledge about causes, effects and control measures of various types of pollution.
Understand the social issues and various environmental acts.
Get the knowledge about types of disaster and mitigation measures.
UNITI INTRODUCTION TO ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES AND NATURAL
RESOURCES
9
Definition, scope and importance – Need for public awareness – Forest resources: Use and over-exploitation,
deforestation, case studies. Timber extraction, mining, dams and their effects on forests and tribal people –
Water resources: Use and over-utilization of surface and ground water, floods, drought, conflicts over water,
dams – benefits and problems – Mineral resources: Use and exploitation, environmental effects of extracting and
using mineral resources, case studies – Food resources: World food problems, changes caused by agriculture
and overgrazing, effects of modern agriculture, fertilizer, pesticide problems, water logging, salinity, case studies
– Energy resources: Growing energy needs, renewable and non renewable energy sources, use of alternate
energy sources. Case studies – Role of an individual in conservation of natural resources – Equitable use of
resources for sustainable lifestyles
UNITII ECOSYSTEMS AND BIODIVERSITY 10
Concept of an ecosystem – Structure and function of an ecosystem – Producers, consumers and decomposers –
Energy flow in the ecosystem (single channel energy flow model) – Concept of nutrient cycling (Nitrogen cycle) –
Ecological succession – Food chains, food webs and ecological pyramids – Introduction to Biodiversity –
Definition: genetic, species and ecosystem diversity – Value of biodiversity: consumptive use, productive use,
social, ethical, aesthetic and option values – Biodiversity at global, National and local levels – India as a mega-
diversity nation – Hot-spots of biodiversity – Threats to biodiversity: habitat loss, poaching of wildlife, man-wildlife
conflicts – Endangered and endemic species of India – Conservation of biodiversity: In-situ and Ex-situ
conservation of biodiversity.
UNITIII ENVIRONMENTAL POLLUTION AND SOCIAL ISSUES 12
Definition – Causes, effects and control measures of: (a) Air pollution (b) Water pollution (c) Marine pollution (d)
Noise pollution (e) Nuclear hazards – Solid waste Management: Causes, effects and control measures of urban
and industrial wastes – Role of an individual in prevention of pollution.
24
Unsustainable and Sustainable development – Unsustainable practices – Issues – possible solutions –
Water conservation, rain water harvesting – Environmental ethics –Acts for Prevention of Environmental
Pollution – Wildlife Protection Act – Forest Conservation Act - Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act –
Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act – Environment Protection Act – Issues involved in enforcement of
environmental legislation – Public awareness.
UNITIV DISASTER AND ITS IMPACTS 7
Definition of Disaster, Hazard, Vulnerability, Risk – Types – Natural disasters (earthquake, landslides, flood,
cyclones, tsunami and drought) – Manmade disasters (Chemical, nuclear and biological) Disaster impacts
(environmental, physical, social, ecological and economical) – Case studies.
UNITV DISASTER MANAGEMENT 7
Need and concept of Disaster management – Disaster Management cycle – Prevention, mitigation,
preparedness, relief, recovery – Post–disaster environmental response (water, sanitation, food safety, waste
management, disease control) – Role and responsibilities of government, community, local institutions and
NGOs.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Gilbert M. Masters and Wendell P. Ela, Introduction to Environmental Engineering and Science,
Pearson Education Pvt., Ltd., Third Edition, 2014.
2. Miller T.G. Jr, Environmental Science, Wadsworth Publishing Co.
3. Townsend C., Harper J., and Michael Begon, Essentials of Ecology, Blackwell Science, Third Edition.
4. Trivedi R.K. and P.K. Goel, Introduction to Air Pollution, Techno-Science Publications.
5. Anubha Kaushik and Kaushik C.P., Environmental Science and Engineering, New Age International
(P) Ltd, Fourth Edition, ISBN: 978-81-224-3647-1, 2014.
6. Mukesh Dhunna., 2009, Disaster Management, Vayu Education of India, New Delhi.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Bharucha Erach, The Biodiversity of India, Mapin Publishing Pvt. Ltd., Ahmedabad India, 2004.
2. Trivedi R.K., Handbook of Environmental Laws, Rules, Guidelines, Compliances and Standards, Vol. I
and II, Enviro Media.
3. Cunningham, W.P. Cooper, T.H. Gorhani, Environmental Encyclopaedia, Jaico Publ. House, Mumbai,
2001.
4. Wager K.D., Environmental Management, W.B. Saunders Co., Philadelphia, USA, 1998.
5. Benny Joseph, Environmental Science and Engineering, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Ltd,
New Delhi, ISBN: 0070601690, 2006.
6. Singh B.K., 2008, Handbook of Disaster Management: techniques & Guidelines, Rajat Publication.
7. Ghosh G.K., 2006, Disaster Management, APH Publishing Corporation.
15BS203 APPLIED MATERIALS SCIENCE
(Common to Civil and Mechanical Engineering)
L T P C
3 0 0 3
Course Objectives:
To introduce the essential principles of material science for Mechanical and related Engineering
applications
To transform the basic principles and concepts to understand the utility of Engineering Materials for
industrial applications in terms of their structure and properties
25
To identify the fleet of scientific channels exploring the generation of high-tech Engineering materials
Course Outcomes:
The students are able to understand the crystal structure and structure related properties of the
materials
The students will acquire knowledge about magnetic and superconducting materials
The students will acquire knowledge about the non-ferrous materials like polymers and ceramics
The students will acquire knowledge about the composite materials
The students are able to understand the application of nano devices
UNIT I PLASTIC DEFORMATION OF MATERIALS 9
Crystal imperfections: point, line, planar and volume defects–Frank Reed source of dislocations–Plastic and
elastic deformation, twinning, cold/hot work hardening–Recovery, recrystallization and grain growth–grain size,
ASTM grain size number–Strengthening methods–Strain hardening–Refinement of the grain size–Solid solution
strengthening–Precipitation hardening
UNIT II MAGNETIC AND SUPERCONDUCTING MATERIALS 9
Origin of magnetic moment–Bohr magneton–Dia and para magnetism–Ferro magnetism–Domain theory–
Hysteresis–Soft and hard magnetic materials–antiferromagnetic materials–Ferrites–applications
Superconductivity: properties–Types–BCS theory (qualitative) –High Tc superconductors –Application of
superconductors–SQUID, cryotron, magnetic levitation.
UNIT III POLYMERIC AND CERAMIC MATERIALS 9
Polymers–Types of polymers–Thermal, Mechanical, Electrical and Viscoelastic Properties–Conducting Polymers,
Bio-Polymers and High temperature polymers and their applications Engineering ceramics–Properties and
applications–ZrO2, Al2O3, SiC, Si3N4
UNIT IV COMPOSITE MATERIALS 9
Definition–function of matrix and reinforcement in composites–classification of composites based on
reinforcement–types of composite materials–polymers, metallic and ceramic matrix composites. Law of mixtures.
Comparison with conventional materials. Fabrication of metal matrix and ceramic matrix composites–properties
and uses.
UNIT V NANOMATERIALS 9
Introduction–low dimensional structures–quantum well, wires and dots–Electronic and optical properties–
nanoclusters and nanocrystals–properties of nanomaterials. Synthesis–CVD, electrodeposition, sol-gel.
Fabrication and characterization of nano electronic devices and MEMS. CNT– Fabrication techniques–properties
and applications.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. William D. Callister, Jr. Material Science and Engineering, Seventh Edition, John Wiley & Sons Inc. New
Delhi, 2010
2. Kasap, S.O., Principle of electronic materials and devices, Tata Mc-Graw Hill, 2007
3. Koch C, Nanostructured materials: processing, properties and applications, William Andrew Pub., 2008
4. The Science and Engineering of Materials, Sixth Edition, Donald R. Askeland, Pradeep, P. Fulay,
Wendelin J. Wright, SI Edition Prepared by D.K. Bhattacharya
26
5. Cengage Learning, 2011
6. Ragavan, V. Material science and Engineering, Prentice Hall of India, 2004.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Kenneth G. Budinski and Micheal K. Budinski, Engineering Materials, PHI, New Delhi, 2013.
2. Flinn R. A. and Trojan P.K. Engineering Materials and their application, Wiley, 2009.
3. Pradeep T. Nano: The essential, McGraw Hill Professional, 2012.
4. J.C. Anderson, K.D. Leaver, P. Leevers, R. D. Rawlings, Material Science of Engineers, 5th
Edition,
Nelson Thomas Ltd. UK, 2003.
5. Polymer Science and Technology, Third Edition, by Joel R. Fried, Prentice Hall; 3 Edition, 2014.
15GE201 ENGINEERING MECHANICS
(Common to Civil / Mechanical)
L T P C
3 2 0 4
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To understand the vectorial and scalar representation of forces and moments
To apply static equilibrium of particles and rigid bodies both in two dimensions and also in three
dimensions.
To comprehend the effect of friction on equilibrium.
To understand the principle of work and energy, the laws of motion, the kinematics of motion.
To write the dynamic equilibrium equation.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course the student will be able to
Understand the vectorial and scalar representation of forces and moments
Static equilibrium of particles and rigid bodies both in two dimensions and also in three dimensions.
Understand the principle of work and energy.
Comprehend the effect of friction on equilibrium.
Understand the laws of motion, the kinematics of motion and the interrelationship.
Write the dynamic equilibrium equation.
UNIT I BASICS & EQUILIBRIUM OF PARTICLES 12
Introduction – Rigid Bodies –Laws of Mechanics – Lame’s theorem, Parallelogram and triangular Law of forces
,Principle of transmissibility – Coplanar Forces – Resolution and Composition of forces – Equivalent systems of
forces – Single equivalent– force Equilibrium of a particle – Forces in space – Equilibrium of a particle in space –
Vectorial representation of forces.
UNIT II EQUILIBRIUM OF RIGID BODIES 12
Free body diagram – Types of supports and their reactions – requirements of stable equilibrium – Moments and
Couples – Scalar components of a moment– Moment of a force about a point and about an axis – Vectorial
representation of moments and couples –– Varignon’s theorem – Equilibrium of Rigid bodies in two dimensions –
Equilibrium of Rigid bodies in three dimensions – Examples.
27
UNIT III FRICTION 12
Frictional force – Laws of Coulomb friction – simple contact friction –Sliding Friction–Inclined planes–Angle of
Repose– Belt friction – Ladder friction– Wedge Friction– Rolling resistance.
UNIT IV PROPERTIES OF SURFACES AND SOLIDS 12
Significance of properties of Sections - First moment of area and the Centroid of Simple sections – Rectangle,
circle, triangle from integration method– T section, I section, – Angle section, Hollow section by using standard
formula – Theorem of Pappus Guldinus– Parallel axis theorem and perpendicular axis theorem - Second and
product moments of plane area – Rectangle, triangle, circle from integration method – T section, I section, Angle
section, Hollow section by using standard formula –Polar moment of inertia – Principal moments of inertia of
plane areas – Principal axes of inertia – mass moment of inertia of solid rectangular prisms, cylinders and cones.
UNIT V DYNAMICS OF PARTICLES & RIGID BODIES 12
Displacements, Velocity and acceleration, their relationship – Relative motion – Curvilinear motion – Newton’s
law of motion – D’Alembert principle – Work Energy Equation of particles – Impulse and Momentum – Impact of
elastic bodies. General Plane motion–Translation and rotation of rigid bodies.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
TEXT BOOK:
1. Beer, F.P and Johnson Jr. E.R., “Vector Mechanics for Engineers”, Vol. 1 Statics and Vol. 2 Dynamics,
McGraw–Hill International Edition, 1997.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Rajasekaran, S, Sankarasubramanian, G., “Fundamentals of Engineering Mechanics”, Vikas Publishing
House Pvt. Ltd., 2000.
2. Hibbeller, R.C., “Engineering Mechanics”, Vol. 1 Statics, Vol. 2 Dynamics, Pearson Education Asia Pvt.
Ltd., 2000.
3. Palanichamy, M.S., Nagam, S., “Engineering Mechanics – Statics & Dynamics”, Tata McGraw–Hill,
2001.
4. MeriamJ.L, KraigeL.G, “Engineering Mechanics-Statics”, 6th
Edition, Wiley, 2010.
5. Irving H. Shames, “Engineering Mechanics – Statics and Dynamics”, Pearson Education Asia Pvt. Ltd.,
4th
Edition, 2003.
6. Ashok Gupta, “Interactive Engineering Mechanics – Statics – A Virtual Tutor (CDROM)”, Pearson
Education Asia Pvt., Ltd., 2002.
15GE202 Basic Electrical and Electronics Engineering
(Common to Civil, Mechanical & Bio-Tech)
L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To make the students to have a clear knowledge of the basic electrical and electronics engineering.
To analyze DC and AC circuits using basic laws.
To understand the operating principles of measuring instruments.
To familiarize the construction, working principle, EMF equation of DC machines, single phase
transformer, alternator, synchronous motor and induction motor.
To acquaint the students with construction, operation, characteristics and applications of semiconductor
28
devices.
To make the students understand the concepts of logic gates and their applications.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, students will be able to
Analyze DC and AC circuits using basic laws.
Apply the basic laws governing the operation of the instruments.
Demonstrate about DC machines, AC machines and its applications.
Analyze and compare the construction, theory and characteristics of the semiconductor devices.
Design basic combinational and sequential logic circuits.
UNITI ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS & MEASUREMENTS 12
Ohm’s Law – Kirchhoff’s Laws –Reduction of series and parallel circuits-Mesh and Nodal Analysis of DC circuits –
Introduction to AC Circuits - RMS Value, Average value, Form factor and peak factor phasor representation – Single
Phase AC series circuits with R,RL, RC & RLC- Power and Power factor. Introduction to three phase circuits- Star
and delta connected balanced load.
Electrical measurements - Introduction, Operating torques, Operating Principles of Moving Coil and Moving Iron
Instruments, Dynamometer type Watt meters and Energy meter.
UNITII DC MACHINES & TRANSFORMER (Qualitative treatment only) 8
DC Generators - construction, principle of operation, Types, EMF equations and applications. DC Motors -
operation, Types, Speed and torque equation – speed control of DC shunt motors. Single Phase Transformer -
Constructional details and operation, Types, EMF equation, transformation ratio.
UNITIII AC MACHINES (Qualitative treatment only) 8
Synchronous generators - construction and operation, EMF equation - Synchronous motors – principle of
operation. Three phase induction motor – Types, Construction and operation, Torque equation, slip torque
characteristics, Single phase induction motor - construction, operation and applications.
UNITIV SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES AND APPLICATIONS (Qualitative
treatment only)
9
Introduction to semiconductors-PN Junction Diode – characteristics, breakdown effect and applications - Half wave
and Full wave rectifiers, Zener Diode - characteristics and voltage regulator. Bipolar Junction Transistor – operation
of NPN and PNP, characteristics of CB, CE, CC configurations. Transducer - Thermistor, Thermocouple, Hall
effect, peltier effect.
UNITV DIGITAL ELECTRONICS (Qualitative treatment only) 8
Number System – Binary, octal, hexadecimal, Logic Gates (AND, OR,NOT,NAND,NOR,XOR,XNOR), Half and Full
Adders – Flip-Flops –RS, JK, T and D - Counters – synchronous up counter, synchronous down counter,
asynchronous up counter, asynchronous down counter, shift registers – shift right and shift left register
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. V N Mittle, Arvind Mittle “Basic Electrical Engineering”, McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2005.
2. R.S. Sedha, “A Textbook of Applied Electronics” S. Chand & Co., 2008.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Muthusubramanian R, Salivahanan S, “Basic Electrical, Electronics and Computer Engineering”, McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2009.
2. Nagsarkar T K and Sukhija M S, “Basics of Electrical Engineering”, Oxford University press (2012).
29
3. V K Mehta, Rohit mehta “Principles of Electronics”, S.Chand & Company Ltd, (2015).
4. Mahmood Nahvi and Joseph A. Edminister, “Electric Circuits”, Schaum’ Outline Series, McGrawHill,
(2014).
15BS251 APPLIED PHYSICS AND ENVIRONMENTAL CHEMISTRY LABORATORY
(Common to EEE/ECE/CSE/MECH/IT/BT)
(Laboratory classes on alternate weeks for Physics and Environmental
Chemistry)
L T P C
0 0 4 2
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To determine particle size and wavelength
To find the viscosity of liquid
To find band gap of a semiconductor
To determine dissolved oxygen and chloride content in water
To estimate chromium, iron, sodium and chlorine using various methods
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Use Post Office Box to determine band gap of a semiconductor
Use spectrometer to determine the dispersive power of the prism
Use Winkler’s method to determine dissolved oxygen in water
Use Argentometric method to estimate chloride content in water
Use flame photometry to estimate sodium in water
PHYSICS LABORATORY
List of Experiments (Any FIVE Experiments)
1. Laser- (i) Particle size and wavelength determination
(ii) Numerical aperture and acceptance angle measurement of an optical fiber
2. Post Office Box-Determination of band gap of a semiconductor
3. Indexing of Powder Diffraction Pattern
4. Characteristics of a photodiode
5. Uniform pending- Young’s modulus determination
6. Spectrometer-Dispersive power of the prism
7. Viscosity of liquids- Determination of co-efficient of viscosity of a liquid by Poiseuille’s method.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Physics Laboratory Manual, Department of Physics, MepcoSchlenk Engineering College, Sivakasi.
ENVIRONMENTAL CHEMISTRY LABORATORY
List of Experiments (Any FIVE Experiments)
1. Determination of DO in water by Winkler’s method
30
2. Estimation of Chloride in water sample by Argentometric method
3. Determination of COD value of industrial effluents
4. Estimation of chromium in tannery wastes
5. Estimation of available chlorine in bleaching powder
6. Estimation of iron by spectrophotometry
7. Estimation of sodium by flame photometry
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. A. L. Vogel, A Text Book of Quantitative Inorganic Analysis, ELBS London, 1995.
2. D. P. Shoemaker and C. W. Garland, Experiments in Physical Chemistry, McGraw Hill, London, 2001.
3. N. Manivasakam, Industrial Effluents – Origin, Characteristics, Effects Analysis & Treatment, Sakthi
Publications, Coimbatore, 1987.
15EE253 Electrical and Electronics Lab LT PC
0 0 4 2
Course Objectives:
To expose the students to apply the basic laws and give them experimental skill.
To expose the students to the operation of DC Machines, transformer, synchronous generator and
induction motors and give them experimental skill.
To expose the students to the characteristics of Diode, Zener Diode and BJT and their applications.
Course Outcomes:
Students will be able to
Apply the circuit theory concepts and analyze the outcome.
Obtain various characteristics of AC and DC Machines.
Explain the operation of various simple semiconductor devices and obtain their characteristics.
List of Experiments
1. Speed Control of D.C. Shunt Motor
2. Open Circuit characteristic of self excited D.C. shunt generator
3. Load Test on Single phase transformer
4. Load Test on three phase squirrel cage induction motor
5. Open Circuit characteristic of an Alternator
6. Verification of Kirchhoff’s voltage and current laws
7. V – I characteristics of P-N Junction Diode and Zener Diode
8. Input and Output characteristics of CE configuration of NPN transistor
9. Half wave Rectifier
10. Full wave Rectifier
TOTAL: 45 Periods
31
15MA305 : MATHEMATICS III - BOUNDARY VALUE PROBLEMS AND
PROBABILITY DISTRIBUTION
L T P C
3 2 0 4
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To know a sound knowledge on Partial Differential Equations.
To acquaint the student with the concepts of Fourier series that is needed for problems in engineering
disciplines.
To know the standard techniques for solving boundary value problem.
To familiarize the student with Fourier transform which is used to solve problems in engineering and
technology.
To make the student knowledgeable in the area of probabilistic models.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course, the students will be able to
Solve various Partial Differential Equations.
Express any periodic functions as a series of well-known periodic functions sine and cosine.
Obtain the solution of boundary value problem such as displacement of string and heat conduction.
Use Fourier transform in engineering applications.
Familiar with the concepts of probability and distributions.
UNIT I PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 12
Formation of PDE – Solutions of first order PDE – Lagrange’s linear PDE - Singular solution for Standard types
- Equations reducible to standard types – Classification of second order PDE – Solution of second and higher
order linear homogeneous PDE with constant coefficients – Linear non-homogeneous partial differential
equations with constant coefficients.
UNIT II FOURIER SERIES 12
.Dirichlet’s conditions – General Fourier series – Odd and even functions – Half-range Sine and Cosine series
– Parseval’s identity – Harmonic Analysis – Complex form of Fourier series.
UNIT III FOURIER TRANSFORM 12
Fourier integral theorem (Statement only) – Fourier transform pair – Sine and Cosine transforms – Properties –
Transform of elementary functions – Convolution theorem – Parseval’s identity.
UNIT IV BOUNDARY VALUE PROBLEMS IN PDE 12
Method of separation of variables – Solutions of one dimensional wave equation and one dimensional heat
flow equation – Steady state solution of two-dimensional heat flow equation – Fourier series solutions in
Cartesian coordinates.
UNIT V PROBABILITY RANDOM VARIABLES AND DISTRIBUTIONS 12
Axiomatic definition of probability – Conditional Probability – Baye’s Theorem - Discrete and Continuous
random variables – Cumulative distribution function – properties – Moments – Moments about mean – Moment
generating function – Uniform and Exponential distributions.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Grewal B.S., “Higher Engineering Mathematics”, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 43rd Edition, 2014.
2. Gupta, S.C, and Kapoor, V.K., “Fundamentals of Mathematical Statistics”, Sultan Chand and Sons,
32
New Delhi, Reprint 2014.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Bali N., Goyal M. and Watkins C., “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Firewall Media (An imprint of
Lakshmi Publications Pvt., Ltd.,), New Delhi, 8th Edition, 2011.
2. Peter V.O’Neil, “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Cengage Learning India Pvt., Ltd, New Delhi,
7th Edition, 2012.
3. Glyn James, “Advanced Modern Engineering Mathematics”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 5th
Edition, 2015.
4. Hwei Hsu, “Schaum’s Outline of Theory and Problems of Probability, Random Variables and Random
Processes”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 3rd Edition, 2014.
5. Oliver C. Ibe, “Fundamentals of Applied Probability and Random Processes”, Elsevier India Pvt Ltd,
New Delhi, Reprint-2012.
15ME301 : ENGINEERING THERMODYNAMICS L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To achieve an understanding of principles of thermodynamics and to be able to use it in accounting
for the bulk behavior of the simple physical systems.
To provide in-depth study of thermodynamic principles, thermodynamics of state, basic
thermodynamic relations, principles of psychrometry and properties of pure substances.
To enlighten the basic concepts of vapour power cycles.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course students will:
Have a fundamental understanding of basic concepts and first law of thermodynamics.
Be able to understand the second law and its statements, concept of entropy and availability.
Familiarize the concepts of real and ideal gases, equations of state and various thermodynamic
relations and applications.
Recognize the significance of thermodynamic properties of pure substances in various phases and
detailed concepts of steam power cycles.
Acquire knowledge about the concepts of psychrometry, different psychrometric process and its
applications.
UNIT I BASIC CONCEPTS AND FIRST LAW OF THERMODYNAMICS 9
Basic concepts - concept of continuum, macroscopic approach. Thermodynamic systems - closed, open and
isolated. Property, state, path and process, quasi-static process, work, modes of work, Zeroth law of
thermodynamics – concept of temperature and heat. Concept of ideal and real gases. First law of
thermodynamics – application to closed and open systems, internal energy, specific heat capacities, enthalpy,
steady flow process with reference to various thermal equipments.
UNIT II SECOND LAWOF THERMODYNAMICS 9
Second law of thermodynamics – Kelvin-Planck and Clausius statements of second law, Reversibility and
irreversibility. Carnot theorem, Carnot cycle, reversed Carnot cycle, efficiency, Coefficient of Performance
(COP). Thermodynamic temperature scale, Clausius inequality, concept of entropy, entropy of ideal gas,
principle of increase of entropy –Availability (Elementary treatment only).
UNIT III PROPERTIES OF PURE SUBSTANCE 9
33
Properties of pure substances, thermodynamic properties of pure substances in solid, liquid and vapour
phases, phase rule, P-V, P-T, T-V, T-S, H-S diagrams, PVT surfaces, thermodynamic properties of steam,
Calculations of work done and heat transfer in non-flow and flow processes.
UNIT IV IDEAL AND REAL GASES AND THERMODYNAMIC RELATIONS 9
Properties of ideal and real gases, equation of state, Avogadro’s Law, Van der Waals equation of state,
compressibility factor, Exact differentials. Thermodynamic relations, Maxwell relations, Clausius - Clapeyron
equations, relations for changes in Entropy, Enthalpy & Internal Energy, Joule-Thomson coefficient & inversion
curve.
UNIT V PROPERTIES OF MIXTURES 9
Ideal gas mixtures – Evaluation of properties, Dalton’s law of partial pressure, properties of air-water vapour
mixtures: DBT, WBT, RH, dew point temperature, degree of saturation, thermodynamic wet bulb temperature,
enthalpy of moist air, sensible heating and cooling, bypass factor, calculations using psychrometric table and
chart.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
(Use of standard thermodynamic tables, Mollier diagram, Psychrometric chart and Refrigerant
property tables are permitted)
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Nag.P.K, “Engineering Thermodynamics”, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 5th Edition. 2013.
2. Yunus Cengel, Michael Boles, ‘Thermodynamics – An Engineering Approach’ 8th Edition 2014 – Tata
McGraw Hill, New Delhi.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Holman.J.P, “Thermodynamics”, 3rd Ed. McGraw-Hill, 1995.
2. Vanwylen and Sontag, “Classical Thermodynamics”, Wiley Eastern, 4th Edition 1994.
3. Arora C.P, “Thermodynamics”, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2008.
4. Merle C, Potter, Craig W, Somerton, “Thermodynamics for Engineers”, Schaum Outline Series, Tata
McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 3rd Edition 2013.
15ME302 : STRENGTH OF MATERIALS L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To gain knowledge of simple stresses, strains and deformation in components due to external loads.
To assess stresses and deformations through mathematical models of beams, Twisting bars or
combinations of both.
Effect of component dimensions and shape on stresses and deformations are to be understood.
The study would provide knowledge for use in the design courses (Design of M/C Elements, FEA).
Review Topics: Resultant forces, Free Body Diagram- Moment of a force- Equilibrium Equations.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course the students will be able to:
Understand the basic concepts of deformable body mechanics, stress, strain and fundamentals of
elasticity.
Construct shear force diagram, Bending moment diagram for different beam configurations with
combination of transverse loading and understand theory of simple bending.
34
Determine the deflection of different beam configurations and emphasize on buckling of Columns.
Compute stresses on inclined plane and principal planes by graphical and analytical method.
Acquire knowledge in pure Torsion of shafts and deformation of helical springs and apply it in
different situations.
UNIT I STRESS, STRAIN AND DEFORMATION OF SOLIDS 8
Rigid and Deformable bodies – Strength, Stiffness and Stability-Stresses; Tensile, Compressive and Shear –
Basics of Elasticity- Elastic constants - Stress-Strain Diagram for ductile and brittle material – Deformation of
simple and compound bars under axial load –Thermal stress – Strain energy and unit strain energy – Strain
energy in Uniaxial loads.
UNIT II ANALYSIS OF STRESSES IN TWO DIMENSIONS 10
Biaxial state of stresses – Thin cylindrical and spherical shells – Deformation in thin cylindrical and spherical
shells – Applications of thin cylindrical and spherical shells-Biaxial stresses at a point – Stresses on inclined
plane – Principal planes and stresses – Mohr’s circle for biaxial stresses – Maximum shear stress.
UNIT III BEAMS - LOADS AND STRESSES 10
Types and applications of beams: Supports and Loads – Shear force and Bending Moment in beams –
Cantilever, Simply supported and overhanging beams – Stresses in beams – Theory of simple bending –
Bending Stress variation along the length and in the beam section – Effect of shape of beam section on stress
induced – Variation of Shear stresses in beams – Shear flow.
UNIT IV BEAM & COLUMN DEFLECTION 10
Elastic curve of Neutral axis of the beam under normal loads – Evaluation of beam deflection and slope:
Double integration method, Macaulay Method, and Moment-area Method – Columns – Applications- End
conditions – Equivalent length of a column – Euler equation –Slenderness ratio – Rankine formula for
columns.
UNITV TORSION & SPRINGS 7
Torsion of circular bars – Torsion Equation-Shear stress distribution – Bars of Solid and hollow circular section
– Stepped shaft – Twist and torsion stiffness – Compound shafts – Fixed and simply supported shafts –
Application to close-coiled helical springs – Maximum shear stress in spring section including Wahl Factor –
Deflection of helical coil springs under axial loads – stresses in helical coil springs under torsion loads.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Software demonstration should be given to the students for the simple simulation of bars, beams, springs,
columns using Educational Softwares for Mechanics of Materials like MDSolids etc.,
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Beer F. P. and Johnston R, “Mechanics of Materials”, McGraw-Hill Book Co, 7th Edition, 2014.
2. Bansal R.K, “A Textbook of Strength of Materials”, Laxmi Publications (P) Ltd., New Delhi, 2013.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Popov E.P, “Engineering Mechanics of Solids”, Prentice-Hall of India, New Delhi, 2003.
2. Timoshenko S.P, “Elements of Strength of Materials”, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi 1997.
3. Kazimi S.M.A, “Solid Mechanics”, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Co, New Delhi, Revised 1st Edition,
2004.
4. Ryder G.H, “Strength of Materials”, Macmillan India Ltd., 3rd Edition, 2002.
5. Khurmi R.S, Khurmi N, “Strength of Materials”, S.Chand, New Delhi, 2013.
6. Singh D.K, “Mechanics of Solids” Pearson Education 2008.
35
15ME303 : FLUID MECHANICS AND MACHINERY L T P C
3 2 0 4
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To understand the structure and the properties of the fluid.
To analyze and appreciate the complexities involved in solving the fluid flow problems.
To study the mathematical techniques already in vogue and apply them to the solutions of practical
flow problems.
To understand the energy exchange process in fluid mechanics handling incompressible fluids.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course the students will be able to:
Demonstrate the structure and the properties of the fluid.
Analyze the complexities involved in solving the fluid flow problems.
Understand the mathematical techniques already in vogue and apply to the solutions of practical flow
problems.
Acquire knowledge about the energy exchange process in fluid mechanics handling incompressible
fluids.
UNIT I BASIC CONCEPTS AND PROPERTIES 12
Fluid – definition, distinction between solid and fluid - Units and dimensions - Properties of fluids - density,
specific weight, specific volume, specific gravity, temperature, viscosity, compressibility, vapour pressure,
capillary and surface tension - Fluid statics: concept of fluid static pressure, absolute and gauge pressures –
Pascal’s law, Hydrostatic Law - pressure measurements by manometers and pressure gauges.
UNIT II FLUID KINEMATICS AND FLUID DYNAMICS 12
Fluid Kinematics - lines of flow - types of flow - velocity field and acceleration – circulation and vorticity -
continuity equation (one and three dimensional differential forms)- Equation of streamline - stream function -
velocity potential function -fluid dynamics - equations of motion - Euler's equation along a streamline -
Bernoulli's equation – applications – Venturi meter, Orifice meter, Pitot tube.
UNIT III INCOMPRESSIBLE FLUID FLOW 12
Viscous flow - Navier-Stoke's equation (Statement only) - Shear stress, pressure gradient relationship -
laminar flow between parallel plates - Laminar flow through circular tubes (Hagen poiseulle's) - Hydraulic and
energy gradient - flow through pipes - Darcy -weisback's equation - friction factor- Moody's diagram-minor
losses - flow through pipes in series and in parallel - power transmission.
UNIT IV HYDRAULIC TURBINES 12
Fluid machines: definition and classification - exchange of energy - Euler's equation for turbo machines -
Construction of velocity vector diagrams - head and specific work - components of energy transfer - degree of
reaction.
Hydro turbines: definition and classifications - Pelton turbine - Francis turbine - Kaplan turbine - working
principles - velocity triangles - work done – efficiencies.
UNIT V HYDRAULIC PUMPS 12
Pumps: definition and classifications - Centrifugal pump: classifications, working principle, velocity triangles,
specific speed, efficiency and performance curves - Reciprocating pump: classification, working principle,
indicator diagram, work saved by air vessels and performance curves - rotary pumps: working principles of
gear and vane pumps.
36
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Victor L.Streeter, Wylie E. Benjamin and Bedford W. Keith W, “Fluid Mechanics”,Tata McGraw-Hill
Publishing CompanyLtd, New Delhi, 9th Edition, 2010.
2. Kumar, K. L., “Engineering Fluid Mechanics”, Eurasia Publishing House (P) Ltd, New Delhi, 7th
Edition, 2010.
3. Vasandani, V. P., “Hydraulic Machines - Theory and Design”, Khanna Publishers, 11th Edition, 2010.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Bansal, R.K., “Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulics Machines”, Laxmi publications (P) Ltd, New Delhi, 5th
Edition, 2013.
2. White, F.M., “Fluid Mechanics”, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 5th Edition, 2013.
3. Ramamirtham, S., "Fluid Mechanics, Hydraulics and Fluid Machines", Dhanpat Rai and Sons, New
Delhi, 2012.
15ME304 : MANUFACTURING TECHNOLOGY - I L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To make the student to understand the important concepts of basic manufacturing processes.
To understand the principles of various fabrication and forming processes.
To study about bulk deformation processes, sheet metal and plastics manufacturing processes.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
After studying this course students will be able:
To gain an understanding and appreciation of the breadth and depth of the field of manufacturing.
To indicate which types of casting process are suited to produce different shapes of a product using a
specific material.
To understand the principles of various fabrication and cutting processes.
To describe and explain applications of the metal forging, rolling, extrusion and drawing processes
and select the most appropriate metal forming process to a particular component.
To become familiar with forming, welding, casting, and forming (metal/plastic) processes.
UNIT I METAL CASTING PROCESSES 9
Sand casting – Sand moulds - Type of patterns – Pattern materials – Pattern allowances – Types of Moulding
sand – Properties – Core making – Methods of Sand testing – CO2 process - Moulding machines – Melting
furnaces.
Working principle of Special casting processes – Shell, investment casting – Ceramic mould – Pressure die
casting – Centrifugal casting –– Sand Casting defects – Inspection methods.
UNIT II JOINING PROCESSES 9
Fusion welding processes – Types of Gas welding – Equipments used – Flame characteristics – Filler and
Flux materials - Arc welding equipments - Electrodes – Coating and specifications. Principles of Resistance
welding – Spot/butt, seam welding – Percussion welding - Gas metal arc welding – Flux cored – Submerged
arc welding – Electro slag welding – TIG welding.
Principle and application of special welding processes - Plasma arc welding – Thermit welding – Electron
beam welding, Laser Beam Welding, Friction stir welding, Ultrasonic Welding – Weld defects – Brazing and
soldering process – Methods and process capabilities – Filler materials and fluxes.
37
UNIT III METAL FORMING PROCESSES 9
Hot working and cold working of metals – Forging processes – Open, impression and closed die forging –
Characteristics of the process – Types of Forging Machines – Typical forging operations.
Rolling of metals – Types of Rolling mills - Flat strip rolling – Shape rolling operations – Defects in rolled parts
- Principle of rod and wire drawing - Tube drawing - Principles of Extrusion – Types of Extrusion – Hot and
Cold extrusion - Equipments.
UNIT IV SHEET METAL PROCESSES 9
Sheet metal characteristics - Typical shearing operations, bending and drawing operations – Stretch forming
operations – Formability of sheet metal and Bending force calculations – Test methods.
Working principle and application of special forming processes - Hydro forming – Rubber pad forming – Metal
spinning –Explosive forming - Magnetic pulse forming - Peen forming - Super plastic forming.
UNIT V PROCESSING OF PLASTIC COMPONENTS 9
Types of plastics - Characteristics of the forming and shaping processes – Moulding of Thermoplastics –
Working principles and applications of Injection moulding – Plunger and screw machines – Compression
moulding - Transfer moulding – Typical industrial applications –Blow moulding – Rotational moulding – Film
blowing – Extrusion - Thermoforming - Bonding of Thermoplastics. Elastomers – Processing Reinforced
plastics.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Hajra Choudhury, “Elements of Workshop Technology, Vol. I”, Media PromotorsPvt Ltd., Mumbai,
2012.
2. S.Gowri, P.Hariharan, and A.SureshBabu, “Manufacturing Technology 1”, Pearson Education, 2008.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. B.S. NagendraParashar& R.K. Mittal, “Elements of Manufacturing Processes”, Prentice Hall of India,
2004.
2. P.N. Rao, “Manufacturing Technology: Foundry, Forming and Welding - Volume 1”, Tata McGraw-Hill
Publishing Limited, 4th Edition, 2013.
3. P.C. Sharma, “A text book of Production Technology (Manufacturing Processes)”, S. Chand and
Company, 7th Edition 2008.
4. Bergman, “Manufacturing Process”, John Wilely& Sons, 8th Edition, 2005.
5. SeropeKalpajian, Steven R.Schmid, “Manufacturing Engineering and Technology”, Pearson
Education, 7th Edition 2013.
6. Beddoes.J and Bibby M.J, “Principles of Metal Manufacturing Processes”, Elsevier, 2006.
7. Rajput R.K, “A text book of Manufacturing Technology”, Lakshmi Publications, 2015
15EC306 : MICROPROCESSORS AND CONTROL L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To give a complete understanding of the Architecture of 8085 and 8086 Microprocessor.
To impart the knowledge of programming 8085 and 8086 Microprocessor.
To make the students to solve real life problem using Microprocessor based systems.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Analyse the Architecture of 8085 and 8086 Microprocessor.
38
Develop applications on 8085 and 8086 Microprocessor.
Design advanced processor based system within realistic constraint.
Develop an ability to read and understand the architecture of other Processors.
UNIT I 8085 MICROPROCESSOR 9
Introduction to microprocessor, computer and its organization, Programming system, Evolution of
Microprocessors, Block diagram of Microcomputer, Architecture of Intel 8085, Pin configuration and description
of signals, Data transfer Mechanisms-Memory-mapped and I/O mapped Data transfer, Programmed Data
transfer, Direct Memory access, parallel data transfer, serial data transfer, Interrupts, Memory interfacing,
interfacing I/O devices.
UNIT II 8086 MICROPROCESSOR 9
Architecture of 8086, Pin Details of 8086- Function of pins common to minimum and maximum modes,
Function of pins used in minimum mode, Function of pins used in maximum mode, Minimum mode Bus cycles-
Maximum mode bus cycles- Memory Interfacing- 8086 Interrupts.
UNIT III 8086 INSTRUCTION SET AND PROGRAMMING 9
Programmer’s model of 8086, operand types, Addressing modes in 8086, Instruction set of 8086, Data transfer
instructions, Arithmetic instructions, Logical instructions, Flag manipulation instructions, Control transfer
instructions, Shift/rotate instructions, Machine or processor control instructions, 8086 Assembly Language
Programming
UNIT IV PERIPHERALS AND INTERFACING 10
Serial and parallel I/O (8251 and 8255), key board display controller (8279), Programmable Interval timers
(Intel 8254), Interfacing Switches and LEDs, Interfacing Seven-segment Displays, ADC/DAC interfacing
UNIT V 8086 MICROPROCESSOR BASED CONTROL APPLICATIONS 8
High Power devices, Optical motor shaft encoders, Traffic Light control-stepper motor control-speed control of
DC motors, Analog interfacing and Industrial control, Industrial Process control system.
TOTAL: 45 Periods
TEXT BOOKS:
1. N.Senthil Kumar, M.Saravanan, S. Jeevanathan, “Microprocessors and Microcontrollers”, Oxford
University Press 2011.
2. Krishna Kant, “Microprocessors and Microcontrollers Architecture, programming and system design
using 8085, 8086, 8051 and 8096”. PHI 2007.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Ramesh S. Gaonkar, “Microprocessor Architecture Programming and Applications with the 8085”, 5th
Edition, PHI 2002.
2. Douglas V.Hall, “Microprocessor and Interfacing, Programming and Hardware”, Tata McGraw Hill,
2004.
3. Kenneth J.Ayala, “The 8086 Microprocessor, Programming and Interfacing the PC”, Thomson press
India Ltd. 2012.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://www.wiki.saitjbp.org/wp-content/uploads/2015/03/UNIT-IIB.pdf
2. http://www.eastaughs.fsnet.co.uk/cpu/execution-instructions.htm
3. http://www.zseries.in/embedded%20lab/8085%20microprocessor/#.VqMMrk9enIU
15ME351 : STRENGTH OF MATERIALS AND HYDRAULICS
LABORATORY
L T P C
0 0 4 2
39
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
The experimental work involved in this laboratory should make the student understand the
fundamental modes of loading of the structures and also make measurements of loads,
displacements and strains. Relating these quantities, the student should be able to obtain the
strength of the material and stiffness properties of structural elements.
Student should be able to verify the principles studied in theory by conducting the experiments.
The students should be able to perform basic measurements in fluid mechanics.
They should also be able to write and extract dimensionless groups in fluid mechanics problems.
In addition, the students should formulate and apply fluid mechanics equations in turbo machinery
and compressible flow applications.
The course lab provides skills in performing experiments and writing lab reports.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Introduce the concept of determining stresses and strains from the member forces.
Provide the basic concepts and effects of axial loads, bending, shear, and torsion on structural
components.
Ability to determine the behavior of structural elements, such as bars, beams and columns subjected
to tension, compression, shear, bending, and torsion by means of experiments.
Physical insight into the behavior materials and structural elements, including distribution of stresses
and strains, deformations and failure modes.
Conduct designed experiments, and analyze and evaluate data.
Measure fluid flow through ducts, selecting appropriate methods of measurements.
Evaluate the performance of centrifugal pumps and compressors.
Evaluate the performance of turbines: tangential and radial.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
STRENGTH OF MATERIALS
1. Tests involving axial compression, axial tension to obtain the stress – strain curve.
2. Test involving torsion to obtain the torque vs. angle of twist and hence the stiffness.
3. Tests on springs.
4. Hardness tests.
5. Shear test.
6. Test for impact resistance.
FLUID MECHANICS AND MACHINERY LABORATORY
1. Determination of co-efficient of discharge for venturimeter.
2. Study of friction losses in pipes.
3. Study on performance characteristics of Pelton turbine.
4. Study on performance characteristics of Francis turbine.
5. Study on performance characteristics of Centrifugal pumps. (Constant speed / Variable speed)
6. Study on performance characteristics of submersible pump.
LISTOFEQUIPMENTS (For a batch of 30 students)
STRENGTH OF MATERIALS LABORATORY
Sl.No. Description of Equipments Quantity
1. UTM of minimum 400 KN capacity 1
2. Torsion testing machine for steel rods 1
3. Izod impact testing machine 1
4. Hardness testing machine
Rockwell Vicker’s (any2) Brinnel
1
5. Extensometer 1
6. Compressometer 1
40
7. Dial gauges Few
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Modi, P.N. & Seth, S.M., “A Text book of Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulic Machines”, Standard Book
House, New Delhi, 10th Edition, 1991.
2. Rajput, R.K.,” A Text book of Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulic Machines”, S.Chand and Co., New
Delhi, 1998.
3. Bansal, R.K., Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulic Machines, Laxmi Publications, New Delhi, 1998.
4. The Testing of Engineering Materials – H.E. Daris, G.E. Troxell, G.F.W. Hauck – 4th Edition,
International Student Edition. Mc Graw Hill International Book Company.
FLUID MECHANICS AND MACHINERY LABORATORY
Sl. No. Description of Equipments Quantity
1. Flowmeasurementinpipes
Venturimeter,U-tubemanometerfixtureslike Valves,collectingtank
1 Unit
2. LossesinPipes
- Major loss–Frictionloss
- Pipe lengths(min.3m) ofdifferent diameters with Valves and
pressure rapping & collecting tank
1 Unit
3. Pumps
(i) Centrifugal pump assembly with accessories (single
stage)
(ii) Centrifugal pump assembly with accessories (multi stage)
(iii) Submersible pump assembly with accessories
1 Unit
1 Unit
1 Unit
4. Turbine
(i) Impulse turbine assembly with fittings & accessories
(ii) Francis turbine assembly with fittings & accessories
1 Unit
1 Unit
STANDARDS:
1. IS 4460: Parts 1 to 3: 1995, Gears – Spur and Helical Gears – Calculation of Load Capacity.
2. IS 7443: 2002, Methods of Load Rating of Worm Gears.
3. IS 15151: 2002, Belt Drives – Pulleys and V-Ribbed belts for Industrial applications – PH, PJ, PK,
Pl and PM Profiles: Dimensions.
4. IS 2122: Part 1: 1973, Code of practice for selection, storage, installation and maintenance of
belting for power transmission: Part 1 Flat Belt Drives.
5. IS 2122: Part 2: 1991, Code of practice for selection, storage, installation and maintenance of
belting for power transmission: Part 2 V-Belt Drives.
15ME352 : MANUFACTURING TECHNOLOGY LABORATORY – I L T P C
0 0 4 2
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To have a study and hands-on-experience on working of various lathe operations.
To provide exposure to the students with hands on experience on various manufacturing processes
such as gas welding and cutting, brazing and sheet metal work.
To have a practice on preparing sand mould, foundry operations.
To know the process of injection moulding.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Do lathe operations such as turning, facing, boring, etc. with lathe in an industry.
Students can do welding, gas cutting, and brazing by taking hands on training in this laboratory.
41
Students can fabricate funnel, Dust bin, and Soap tray using sheet metal.
To prepare sand moulds for making casting in the foundries.
UNIT I LATHE WORKS LEADING TO SIMPLE PRODUCTS 12
1.1. Facing, plain turning and step turning leading to a simple Product.
1.2. Taper turning using compound rest, Tailstock set over, etc.
1.3. Single start and multi start V thread cutting and knurling.
1.4. Boring and internal thread cutting. Dismantling and assembly of tailstock
1.5. Dismantling and assembly of tailstock
UNIT II WELDING EXCERCISES 10
2.1.Horizontal, Vertical and overhead welding.
2.2. Gas Cutting, Gas Welding.
2.3. Brazing - for demonstration purpose.
UNIT III SHEET METAL WORK 11
3.1. Fabrication of Soap tray or Dust bin using sheet metal.
3.2. Fabrication of a funnel using sheet metal.
UNIT IV PREPARATION OF SAND MOULD 12
4.1. Mould with solid, split patterns.
4.2. Mould with loose-piece pattern.
4.3. Mould with Core.
4.4. Injection Moulding- Demonstration.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
LIST OF EQUIPMENTS:
1. Centre Lathe with accessories
2. Welding
2.1. Arc welding machine.
2.2. Gas welding machine.
2.3. Brazing machine.
3. Sheet Metal Work facility
3.1. Hand Shear 300mm.
3.2. Bench vice.
3.3. Standard tools and callipers for sheet metal work.
4. Sand moulding Facility
4.1. Moulding Table.
4.2. Moulding boxes, tools and patterns.
5. Plastic Moulding
5.1. Injection Moulding Machine.
15ME353 : COMPUTER AIDED MACHINE DRAWING LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 4 2
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To make the students understand and interpret drawings of machine components so as to prepare
assembly drawings by manually and using standard CAD packages.
42
To familiarize the students with Indian Standards on drawing practices and standard components.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Identifying model parameters and the finite element method.
Understand the integrated design and manufacture systems.
Apply the Knowledge of computer recording of designs and methods for constructing solid objects.
Analyze the collisions of assembled elements, connecting parts and complex objects.
Build, edit and parameterize properties of complex solid objects.
Ability to perform strength verification of a simple machine component using FEM and prepare
technical documentation of a selected machine component.
UNIT I DRAWING STANDARDS 5
Code of practice for Engineering Drawing, BIS specifications – Welding symbols, riveted joints, keys, fasteners
– Reference to hand book for the selection of standard components like bolts, nuts, screws, keys etc.
UNIT II 2-D DRAWINGS 5
Limits, Fits – Tolerancing of individual dimensions- Specification of Fits- Manual Preparation of production
drawings and reading of part and assembly drawings
UNIT III CAD PRACTICE (USING APPLICATION PACKAGES) 10
Drawing, Editing, Dimensioning, Plotting Commands, Layering Concepts, Hatching, Detailing, Assembly,-
Exercises involving a Product, basic principles of GD&T (geometric dimensioning & tolerancing)
UNIT IV ASSEMBLY DRAWING (MANUAL & USING APPLICATION PACKAGES) 25
Manual part drawing and preparation of assembled views for given part details, followed by practicing the
same using CAD packages.
Suggested Assemblies:
Shaft couplings – Plummer block – Screw jack- Lathe Tailstock – Universal Joint – Machine Vice – Stuffing
box- safety Valves - Non-return valves- Connecting rod –Piston and crank shaft- Multi plate clutch- Preparation
of Bill of materials and tolerance data sheet.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Use of standard CAD application packages is recommended from the point of view of requirement by industries.
However to encourage our national efforts in indigenous development of software packages with focus on open
source, students may be encouraged to work with “CollabCAD Software”, developed by: National Informatics Centre
(CAD Group), Govt. of India, A-Block, C.G.O. Complex, Lodhi Road, New Delhi 110003, 2003” www.collabcad.com.
EQUIPMENTS NEEDED ( FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS)
1. Computer System
17” Graphics Terminal
Pentium IV Processor
80 GB HDD
512 MB RAM
Advanced graphics accelerator
2. Laser Printer
3. Plotter (A2 size)
4. Software
30 seats of latest/recent versions of
43
AutoCAD/CATIA/SOLIDWORKS/SOLID EDGE/NX/PRO-E/COLLABCAD or equivalent software.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Bhatt.N.D. and Panchal.V.M, “Machine Drawing”, Charotar Publishing House, 388001, 38th Edition,
2003.
2. P.S.G. College of Technology, “Design Data”, Kalaikathir Achchagam, 2012.
3. Luzadder, Warren.J, and Duff, Jon.M. “Fundamentals of Engineering Drawing”, Prentice Hall India
Pvt. Ltd., Eastern Economy Edition, 11th Edition.
EXTENSIVE READING :
Kulkarni, “Machine Design”, Tata McGraw-Hill Education, 2008.
WEB REFERENCES:
http://www.onesmartclick.com/engineering/machine-design.html
15MA402 : MATHEMATICS IV - NUMERICAL AND STATISTICAL
TECHNIQUES
(COMMON TO EEE & MECH)
L T P C
3 2 0 4
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To know the techniques for solving the transcendental equations, system of equations and eigenvalue
problem.
To construct an approximate polynomial to represent the data and to find the intermediate values.
To find differentiation and integration when the functions are in the analytical form which is too
complicated or the huge amounts of data are given.
To acquire the notion of sampling distributions and knowledge of statistical techniques useful in
making rational decision in management problems.
To expose the statistical methods designed to contribute to the process of making scientific
judgments in the face of uncertainty and variation.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course, the students will be able to
Apply the techniques for solving the transcendental equations, system of equations and eigenvalue
problem.
Construct an approximate polynomial to represent the given data and know to find the intermediate
values.
Obtain the differentiation and integration from the given data.
Justify about the behavior of the samples
Understand the statistical methods designed to contribute to the process of making scientific
judgments in the face of uncertainty and variation.
UNIT I SOLUTION OF EQUATIONS AND EIGEN VALUE PROBLEMS 12
Iteration method - Regula-Falsi method – Newton-Raphson method – Gauss elimination method – Gauss
Jordan method – Matrix inversion by Gauss Jordan method - Gauss-Seidel method – Eigenvalues of a matrix
by Power method and Gauss-Jacobi method
UNIT II INTERPOLATION AND APPROXIMATIONS 12
Newton’s forward and backward difference interpolation – Gauss forward and backward difference
44
interpolation –Newton’s divided difference interpolation – Lagrange’s interpolation– Cubic spline interpolation.
UNIT III NUMERICAL DIFFERENTIATION AND INTEGRATION 12
Approximation of derivatives using Newton’s forward and backward difference interpolation, Newton’s divided
difference interpolation and Lagrange’s interpolation – Numerical integration using Trapezoidal rule, Simpson’s
1/3 and 3/8 rule – Gaussian two point and three point quadrature formula.
UNIT IV TESTING OF HYPOTHESIS 12
Sampling distributions – Type I and Type II errors -One sample and two sample tests for means and
proportions of large samples (z-test) - One sample and two sample tests for means of small samples (t-test) -
F-test for two sample standard deviations - Chi-square distribution - Tests for independence of attributes and
goodness of fit.
UNIT V DESIGN OF EXPERIMENTS 12
Analysis of variance – One way classification – Completely Randomized Design (CRD) - Two way
classification – Randomized Block Design (RBD) - Latin square Design.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Grewal, B.S. and Grewal,J.S., “Numerical methods in Engineering and Science”, Khanna Publishers,
New Delhi, 9th Edition, 2010 (7th Reprint 2012).
3. R.A. Johnson and C.B. Gupta, “Miller and Freund’s Probability and Statistics for Engineers”, Pearson
Education, Asia, 8th Edition, 2011.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Sankar Rao.K, “Numerical Methods for Scientists and Engineers”, 3rd Edition, Prentice Hall of India
Private, New Delhi, 2009.
2. P.Kandasamy,K.Thilagavathy and K.Gunavathy, “NumericalMethods”, S. Chand Co. Ltd., New Delhi,
3rd Edition, 2010.
3. Walpole, R. E., Myers, R. H. Myers R. S. L. and Ye. K, “Probability and Statistics for Engineers and
Scientists”, 8th Edition, Pearsons Education, Delhi, 2007.
4. Lipschutz. S and Schiller. J, “Schaum’s outlines - Introduction to Probability and Statistics”, Tata
McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 1st Edition, 2011.
5. Gupta, S.C, and Kapur, V.K., “Fundamentals of Mathematical Statistics”, Sultan hand, New Delhi,
Reprint 2014.
15ME401 : THERMAL ENGINEERING L T P C
3 2 0 4
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To make the student understand the big picture of applied thermodynamics through topics such as
Power cycles, IC Engines, Steam nozzles, air compressors and Refrigeration and Air Conditioning.
This subject enables the students to understand the principle of operation, construction and control of
several thermal equipments which find wide applications in a variety of fields like power generation,
automobile industry, process industries, food preservation and human comfort.
It provides the fundamentals for Power plant Engineering, Automobile Engineering, Turbo machinery,
Advanced IC engine design and Refrigeration & Air conditioning.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
45
Upon completion of the course students will
Able to do thermodynamic analysis of cycles.
Understand the construction, operation and performance of different IC engines.
Analyse and design different steam nozzles.
Analyse and design different reciprocating air compressors.
Analyse and design different RAC systems.
UNIT I POWER CYCLES AND IC ENGINES 15
Otto, Diesel and Dual cycles, mean effective pressure, air standard efficiency – Comparison of efficiencies,
Theoretical and Actual PV diagrams.
Classification of internal combustion engines, Components and their function - Comparison of two stroke and
four stroke engines and petrol and diesel engines - valve timing diagram and port timing diagram-,
performance calculations - methods of calculating friction power, Morse test, heat balance test.
UNIT II STEAM NOZZLES 9
Flow of steam through nozzles, shapes of nozzles, effect of friction, critical pressure ratio, supersaturated flow.
UNIT III RECIPROCATING AIR COMPRESSORS 11
Classification and working principle, work of compression with and without clearance, Volumetric efficiency,
Isothermal efficiency and Isentropic efficiency, Multistage air compressor and intercooling –work of multistage
air compressor.
UNIT IV REFRIGERATION 12
Vapour compression refrigeration cycle- super heat, sub cooling – Performance calculations, Principle and
working of Ammonia–Water vapour absorption refrigeration system (Description only), Comparison between
vapour compression and absorption systems, Alternate refrigerants.
UNIT V APPLIED PSYCHROMETRY AND AIR CONDITIONING 13
Applied Psychrometry: Sensible and latent heat exchange, effectiveness, different psychrometric processes,
adiabatic mixing.
Comfort air conditioning: Requirements, GSHF, RSHF - Simple designs of air conditioning system.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
TEXTBOOK:
1. Kothandaraman.C.P, Domkundwar.S, Domkundwar. A.V, “A course in thermal engineering”, Dhanpat
Rai & Sons, 2015.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Rajput.R.K,”Thermal Engineering”,S.Chand Publishers, 2010.
2. Mahesh.M.Rathore,“Thermal Engineering”, McGraw Hill Education (India) Pvt. Ltd.,2015.
3. Sarkar.B.K, “Thermal Engineering”,Tata McGraw-Hill Publishers, 2011.
4. Arora.C.P, “Refrigeration and Air Conditioning,” Tata McGraw-Hill Publishers, 2012.
15ME402 : KINEMATICS OF MACHINERY L T P C
3 2 0 4
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To understand the concept of machines, mechanisms and related terminologies.
To analyze a mechanism for displacement, velocity and acceleration at any point in a moving link.
To understand the theory of gears, gear trains and cams.
To understand the role of friction in drives and brakes.
46
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course the students will be able to:
Understand the basic concepts of Mechanisms, Machines and their relative motions, then apply it to
appropriate environments.
Carry out kinematic analysis (Displacement, Velocity and Acceleration) of simple mechanisms (Single
slider Crank Mechanism and four bar Mechanisms) by graphical and analytical method.
Construct & Design different CAM profiles for given conditions using graphical & Theoretical
methods.
Understand basic terminologies and apply laws and principles of gears and gear trains.
Acquire knowledge of friction in various mechanical components and apply it in different situations.
UNIT I BASICS OF MECHANISMS 7
Definitions – Link, Kinematic pair, Kinematic chain, Mechanism, and Machine. - Degree of Freedom – Mobility
- Kutzbach criterion (Gruebler’s equation) - Grashoff's law - Kinematic Inversions of four-bar chain and slider
crank chain - Mechanical Advantage- Transmission angle.
Description of common Mechanisms - Offset slider mechanism as quick return mechanisms, Pantograph,
Straight line generators (Peaucellier and Watt mechanisms), Steering gear for automobile, Hooke’s joint,
Toggle mechanism, Ratchets and escapements - Indexing Mechanisms.
UNIT II VELOCITY & ACCLERATION ANALYSIS 10
Analysis of simple mechanisms (Single slider crank mechanism and four bar mechanism) - Graphical
Methods for displacement, velocity and acceleration: Shaping machine mechanism - Coincident points –
Coriolis acceleration – concepts and applications - Instantaneous Centre & Kennedy’s theorem (Theory only)
- Analytical method of analysis of slider crank mechanism and four bar mechanism. Approximate analytical
expression for displacement, velocity and acceleration of piston of reciprocating engine mechanism.
UNIT III KINEMATICS OF CAMS 8
Classifications - Cam Nomenclature –Types of follower-Displacement diagrams - Parabolic, Simple harmonic
and cycloidal motions – Graphical construction of displacement diagrams and layout of plate Cam profiles –
Pressure angle - Circular arc with Flat faced follower - Tangent cams with Roller Follower
UNIT IV GEARS 10
Classification of gears – Gear tooth terminology - Characteristics of Involute action - Fundamental Law of
toothed gearing and involute gearing – Length of path of contact and contact ratio - Interference and
undercutting - Gear trains – Simple, compound and epicyclic gear trains - Differentials.
UNIT V FRICTION 10
Dry friction – Friction in power screws – Self-locking- Pivot, collar and conical bearings - Plate and Conical
clutches - Belt and rope drives - Block brakes – Single – Pivoted - Band brake.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Ambekar A. G., “Mechanism and Machine Theory”, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2007.
2. Uicker J.J., Pennock G.R., Shigley J.E., “Theory of Machines and Mechanisms” (Indian Edition),
Oxford University Press, 3rd Edition, 2009.
3. Khurmi R.S & Gupta J.K, “Theory of Machines”, S.Chand Publications, 2015.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Thomas Bevan, “Theory of Machines”, CBS Publishers and Distributors, 3rd Edition, 2005.
47
2. Ramamurti, V., “Mechanism and Machine Theory”, 3rd Edition, Narosa Publishing House,
2011.
3. Ghosh A and A.K.Mallick, “Theory of Mechanisms and Machines”, East West Press, New Delhi, 3rd
Edition, 2006.
4. Rao J.S and Dukkipati R.V, “Mechanism and Machine Theory”, New Age International Publishers,
2006.
5. John Hannah and Stephens R.C, “Mechanics of Machines”, Viva Low-Prices Student Edition, 2006.
BIS CODES OF PRACTICE
1. IS 2458: 2001, Vocabulary of Gear Terms – Definitions Related to Geometry.
2. IS 2467: 2002 (ISO 701: 1998), International Gear Notation – Symbols for Geometric Data.
3. IS 5267: 2002 Vocabulary of Gear Terms – Definitions Related to Worm Gear Geometry.
4. IS 5037: Part 1: 2004, Straight Bevel Gears for General Engineering and Heavy Engineering -
Part 1: Basic Rack.
5. IS 5037: Part 2: 2004, Straight Bevel Gears for General Engineering and Heavy Engineering -
Part 2: Module and Diametral Pitches.
WEB REFERENCE:
1. http://www.howstuffworks.com
15ME403 : DESIGN OF MACHINE ELEMENTS
L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To familiarize the steady stresses and variable stresses in machine members.
To understand the various stages involved in design of shafts and couplings
To learn about design of temporary and permanent joints
To impart strong design knowledge about energy storing elements.
To acquire knowledge about the bearings and engine components design.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course the students will be able to:
Familiarize the various steps involved in the design process, steady stresses and variable stresses in
machine members.
Understand the procedures involved in the design of shafts keys, splines and couplings.
Gain the design knowledge about threaded fasteners, Knuckle joints, Cotter joints, welded and
riveted joints.
Acquire knowledge about the design of springs and flywheels and apply it in practical problems.
Effectively analyze the design of bearings and engine components.
UNIT I STEADY STRESSES AND VARIABLE STRESSES IN MACHINE
MEMBERS 9
Introduction to the design process - factor influencing machine design, selection of materials based on
mechanical properties – Preferred numbers, fits, Limits and tolerances – Direct, Bending and torsional stress
equations – Impact and shock loading – calculation of principle stresses for various load combinations,
eccentric loading – Design of curved beams – crane hook and ‘C’ frame - Factor of safety - theories of failure –
stress concentration – design for variable loading – Soderberg, Goodman and Gerber relations - Design for
finite and infinite life under variable loading.
48
UNIT II DESIGN OF SHAFTS AND COUPLINGS 9
Design of solid and hollow shafts based on strength, rigidity and critical speed – Design of keys, key ways and
splines - Design of rigid and flexible couplings.
UNIT III DESIGN OF TEMPORARY AND PERMANENT JOINTS 9
Threaded fasteners - Design of bolted joints including eccentric loading, Knuckle joints, Cotter joints – Design
of welded joints, riveted joints for pressure vessel.
UNIT IV DESIGN OF ENERGY STORING ELEMENTS 9
Design of various types of springs, helical springs, leaf springs, torsion springs, Belleville springs - Design of
flywheels considering stresses in rims and arms for engines and punching machines.
UNIT V DESIGN OF BEARINGS AND ENGINE COMPONENTS 9
Sliding contact and rolling contact bearings – Design of hydrodynamic journal bearings, McKee's Eqn.
Sommerfeld Number, Raimondi & Boyd graphs, – Selection of Rolling Contact bearings – Design of
crankshafts - Design of Connecting Rod.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Note: (Use of P S G Design Data Book is permitted in the University examination)
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Shigley J.E and Mischke C. R., “Mechanical Engineering Design”, 8th Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill,
2008.
2. Bhandari V.B, “Design of Machine Elements”, 3rd Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill Book Co, 2010.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Sundararajamoorthy T.V, Shanmugam .N, "Machine Design", Anuradha Publications, Chennai, 2007.
2. Orthwein W, “Machine Component Design”, Jaico Publishing Co, 2004.
3. Ugural A.C, “Mechanical Design – An Integral Approach”, McGraw-Hill Book Co, 2003.
4. Spotts M.F., Shoup T.E “Design and Machine Elements” Pearson Education, 2004.
5. PSG College of Technology, “Design Data”, Kalaikathir Achchagam, 2012.
STANDARDS:
1. IS 10260: Part 1: 1982 Terms, definitions and classification of Plain bearings Part 1: Construction.
2. IS 10260: Part 1: 1982 Terms, definitions and classification of Plain bearings Part 2: Friction and
Wear.
3. IS 10260: Part 1: 1982 Terms, definitions and classification of Plain bearings Part 3: Lubrication.
15ME404 : ENGINEERING METALLURGY L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To impart knowledge on the phase structure of metals/alloys.
To study the heat treatment process employed for various materials.
To learn the applications of metals and non-metallic materials.
To impart knowledge on mechanical testing tools for engineering materials.
To study the non-destructive testing methods.
49
COURSE OUTCOMES:
By studying this subject, the students are able to
Know the phase reactions of various metals and alloys.
Have a great exposure in heat treatment process and know their purpose in engineering applications.
Have the knowledge in the classification, properties and applications for various ferrous and non-
ferrous materials.
Identify the various mechanical properties for the above said materials using sophisticated facilities.
Able to do non-destructive testing for materials.
UNIT I BINARY PHASE DIAGRAM 9
Solid solutions: Substitutional and interstitial –Compound – Classification of Phase diagram - Phase reactions
with an example: Isomorphous, eutectic, eutectoid, peritectic, and peritectoid, Iron – Iron carbide diagram.
UNIT II HEAT TREATMENT PROCESSES 9
Full, stress relief, recrystallisation and spheroidizing annealing – normalising, hardening and tempering of steel
– phase transformation - Isothermal transformation (TTT) diagrams – cooling curves - CCR - Hardenability,
Jominy end quench test - Austempering, martempering – case hardening - carburising, nitriding, cyaniding,
carbonitriding, flame and induction hardening - precipitation hardening.
UNIT III FERROUS AND NON FERROUS METALS 9
Classification, properties, microstructure, processing and applications of plain carbon steels & cast iron – effect
of alloying elements on steel (Mn, Si, Cr, Mo, V, Ti & W) - stainless and tool steels - HSLA &maraging steels -
Copper and its alloys - Brass, Bronze and Cupronickel – Aluminium and its alloys – Bearing alloys.
UNIT IV MECHANICAL TESTING AND CHARACTERISATION 9
Mechanical properties - stress strain curve for ferrous and non-ferrous alloys - Mechanism of plastic
deformation, slip and twinning – types of fracture – Griffith theory - testing of materials under tension,
compression and shear loads – Hardness tests (Brinell, Rockwell and Vickers) - Impact test (Izod and Charpy)
- Fatigue and creep tests - fracture toughness tests - characterisation techniques: Optical, SEM, XRD.
UNIT V NON DESTRUCTIVE TESTING 9
Basic principles and testing method for Radiographic testing - Ultrasonic testing - Magnetic particle inspection -
Liquid penetrant inspections - Eddy current testing - acoustic emission testing – applications.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Sydney H. Avner “Introduction to Physical Metallurgy”, McGraw Hill Book Company, 2nd Edition,
2007.
2. Selvakumar N, “Engineering Metallurgy and Nanotechnology” Scitech, Publications (India) Pvt. Ltd.,
2016.
3. Kenneth G.Budinski and Michael K.Budinski, “Engineering Materials: Properties and Selection”
Prentice-Hall, 2010.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Raghavan.V,“Materials Science and Engineering”, Prentice-Hall, 6th Edition, 2015.
2. William D Callister and David G. Rethwisch, “Material Science and Engineering: An Introduction”,
John Wiley, 8th Edition, 2009.
3. George E. Dieter, Jr, “Mechanical Metallurgy”, CreateSpace Independent Publishing Platform, 2014.
4. Jindal. U.C “Material science and metallurgy”, Pearson New Delhi, 2013.
50
15ME405 : MANUFACTURING TECHNOLOGY-II L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To understand the concept and mechanics of metal cutting, working of standard machine tools such
as lathe, shaping and allied machines, milling, drilling and allied machines, grinding and allied
machines and broaching.
To understand the basic concepts of Computer Numerical Control (CNC) machine tool and CNC
programming.
To gain knowledge of Surface Finishing Processes.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course students will be able to
Gain an understanding and appreciation of breadth and depth of the field of manufacturing.
Understand the concepts and mechanics of metal cutting, working of standard machine tools such as
lathe, shaping and allied machines, milling, drilling and allied machines, grinding and allied machines
and broaching.
To become familiar with Surface Finishing Processes.
Understand the basic concepts of Computer Numerical Control (CNC) machine tool and CNC
programming.
UNIT I THEORY OF METAL CUTTING 9
Introduction: Material removal processes, types of machine tools – Theory of metal cutting: Mechanics of metal
cutting, chip formation, orthogonal cutting, cutting tool materials, tool wear, tool life, surface finish, cutting fluids
- Influence of tool angles - Influence of tool height.
UNIT II CENTRE LATHE AND SPECIAL PURPOSE LATHES 9
Centre lathe, constructional features, cutting tool geometry, various operations, taper turning methods, thread
cutting methods, special attachments, machining time and power estimation. Capstan and turret lathes –
Automats – Single spindle, Swiss type, multi spindle - Turret Indexing mechanism, Bar feed mechanism.
UNIT III MACHINE TOOLS FOR NON-CIRCULAR COMPONENTS AND HOLE
MAKING.
9
Reciprocating machine tools: shaper, planer, slotter. (Construction details only).
Milling machines: Horizontal milling m/c and Vertical milling m/c: specifications, parts, milling cutters, work
holding devices, operations.
Hole making: Drilling, reaming, boring, tapping - sawing machine: hack saw, band saw, circular saw; broaching
machines: Push, pull, surface and continuous broaching machines– broach construction.
UNIT IV GEAR MANUFACTURING AND SURFACE FINISHING PROCESSES 9
Gear manufacturing processes: Extrusion, Stamping and Powder metallurgy. Gear machining: Forming,
Geargenerating process – Gear shaping, Gear hobbing.
Surface finishing- Abrasive processes: Types of grinding process – cylindrical grinding, surface grinding,
centre less grinding, –grinding wheel specifications and selection. Fine finishing processes – Honing, lapping,
super finishing, polishing and buffing, power brushing-Tumbling - - Metal spraying – Metallization.
UNIT V CNC MACHINE TOOLS AND PART PROGRAMMING 9
Numerical control (NC) machine tools.CNC: types, constructional details, special features – Design
51
considerations of CNC machines for improving machining accuracy – Structural members – Slide ways –
Linear bearings – Ball screws – Spindle drives and feed drives. Part programming fundamentals – Manual
programming – Computer aided part programming - APP: Post processors. APT programming – Motion
statements, additional APT statements.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Hajra Choudry, “Elements of Workshop Technology: Machine Tools (Volume - 2)”, Media Promoters.
2010.
2. HMT – “Production Technology”, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2001.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Rao, P.N. “Manufacturing Technology”, Metal Cutting and Machine Tools, 3rd edition Tata McGraw–
Hill, New Delhi, 2013.
2. P.C. Sharma, “A text book of Production Technology (Manufacturing Processes) 7th Edition”, S.
Chand and Company, 2008.
3. Shrawat N.S. and Narang J.S, ‘CNC Machines’, Dhanpat Rai & Co., 2002.
4. P.N.Rao, ‘CAD/CAM Principles and Applications’, TATA Mc Craw Hill, 3rd edition, 2007.
5. Milton C.Shaw, ‘Metal Cutting Principles’, Oxford University Press, Second Edition, 2005.
6. Rajput R.K, ‘A text book of Manufacturing Technology’, Lakshmi Publications, 2007.
7. Philip F.Ostwald and Jairo Munoz, ‘Manufacturing Processes and systems’, John Wiley and Sons, 9th
Edition, 2008.
8. Mikell P.Groover, ‘Fundamentals of Modern Manufacturing, Materials, Processes and Systems’, John
Wiley and Sons, 3rd
Edition, 2009.
9. Chapman. W. A. J and S.J. Martin, Workshop Technology, Part III, Viva Books Private Ltd., 1998.
10. Serope kalpakjian, Steven R Schmid, ‘Manufacturing Engineering and Technology’, Pearson
Education, 6th edition, 2015.
WEB REFERENCE:
http://www.nptel.ac.in/courses/112105126/
15ME451 : THERMAL ENGINEERING LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 4 2
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To give practical hands on exposure to students in the equipment involved in measuring Thermal
conductivity.
To have the knowledge in measuring Stefan Boltzmann constant and emissivity values.
To have exposure to parallel flow and counter flow heat exchangers.
To know about the measurement of heat transfer coefficient and temperature distribution in free and
forced convection.
To give practical hands on exposure to students in the specimen preparation, microscopic
examination and hardness testing of various metallographic specimens.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course students will
Be able to measure the values of Thermal conductivity, Emissivity and Stefan Boltzmann constant.
Have a good understanding about the working of parallel and counter flow heat exchangers.
Be able to measure the heat transfer coefficient and temperature distribution in forced and free
convection.
52
Obtain exposure to the specimen preparation, microscopic examination and hardness testing of
various metallographic specimens.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
I.C ENGINE LAB AND FUELS LAB 20
1. Valve Timing and Port Timing Diagrams.
2. Performance Test on 4-stroke Diesel Engine.
3. Heat Balance Test on 4-stroke Diesel Engine.
4. Morse Test on Multi cylinder Petrol Engine.
5. Retardation Test to find Frictional Power of a Diesel Engine.
6. Determination of Viscosity – Red Wood Viscometer.
7. Determination of Flash Point and Fire Point.
8. Emission test on Diesel Engine exhaust.
9. Determination of Calorific value of Fuels using Bomb calorimeter.
10. Performance test on Variable Compression Ratio Engine.
STEAM LAB 15
1. Study of Steam Generators and Turbines.
2. Performance and Energy Balance Test on a Steam Generator.
3. Performance and Energy Balance Test on Steam Turbine.
REFRIGERATION AND AIRCONDITIONING 10
1. Determination of COP of a refrigeration system.
2. Experiments on air-conditioning system.
3. Performance test on single/two stage reciprocating air compressor.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
LIST OF EQUIPMENTS
(For a batch of 30 students)
1. I.C Engine – 2 stroke and 4 stroke model 1 set.
2. Red Wood Viscometer 1 No.
3. Apparatus for Flash and Fire Point 1 No.
4. 4-stroke Diesel Engine with mechanical loading 1 No.
5. 4-stroke Diesel Engine with hydraulic loading 1 No.
6. 4-stroke Diesel Engine with electrical loading 1 No.
7. Multi-cylinder Petrol Engine 1 No.
8. Single cylinder Petrol Engine 1 No.
9. Data Acquisition system with any one of the
above engine 1 No.
10. Gas Analyser 1 No.
11. Steam Boiler with turbine setup 1 No.
12. Single/two stage reciprocating air compressor 1 No.
13. Refrigeration test rig 1 No.
14. Air-conditioning test rig 1 No.
15. Bomb Calorimeter 1 No.
16. Petrol Engine for Variable compression Ratio test 1 No.
15ME452 : MANUFACTURING TECHNOLOGY LABORATORY- II L T P C
0 0 4 2
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To give hands on exposure, to students in various metal cutting operations that are done using
conventional machine tools, such as shaper, planer, drilling machine, milling machine, grinding
53
machine, capstan and turret lathe.
To know how to measure engineering components. To gain knowledge in assembly of machined
components with different fits.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course
Students are capable of measuring shear angle in orthogonal machining, cutting force during turning
operation.
Students know how to make dovetail, internal keyway, and perform tapping, reaming, and gear
milling operations.
Students develop skill in surface grinding, and cylindrical grinding of components.
EXERCISES:
1. Studies on the components and working principle of special machines.
2. To make a cube from cylinder using shaper.
3. To make a dove tail or V-Block using shaper.
4. To make internal keyway using slotting/milling machine.
5. To make a cube from cylinder using planer.
6. To perform drilling, reaming and tapping operations. .
7. To make a spur gear using milling machine.
8. To make a keyway using end milling operation.
9. To do cylindrical grinding operation.
10. To make simple component that involves i facing, turning and eccentric turning operations using
lathe.
11. To make a bush using lathe.
12. To make a stud (multi start) using lathe.
13. To make a collar using capstan lathe.
14. To make a spur gear using gear hobbing machine.
15. Tool Wear Studies
16. Determination of shear angle during orthogonal cutting operations
17. Measurement of cutting forces during turning operation.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
LIST OF EQUIPMENTS : (For a batch of 30 students)
1. Centre lathe - 10 Nos.
2. Turret and Capstan lathe - 1 No.
3. Horizontal milling machine - 1 No.
4. Vertical milling machine - 1 No.
5. Surface grinding machine - 1 No.
6. Cylindrical grinding machine - 1 No.
7. Shaper - 2 Nos.
8. Slotter - 1 No.
9. Planer - 1 No.
10. Radial drilling machine - 1 No.
11. Tool dynamometer - 1 No.
12. Gear hobbing machine - 1 No
13. Tool makers microscope - 1 No.
54
15HS451 : PRESENTATION SKILLS LABORATORY
(COMMON TO IT / ECE / MECH / BIO-TECH)
L T P C
0 0 2 1
COURSE OBJECTIVES
To hone the students’ proficiency in speaking skills
To enhance their pronouncing skills
To help the students acquire presentation skills
To enable the students communicate effectively
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Students of Engineering and Technology will be able to
recognize phonemes
improve pronunciation
acquire all strategies of presentation skills
develop interpersonal skills
UNIT I PHONETIC PRACTICE 4
English phonemes: Vowels, Diphthongs, Consonants - Word Stress, phoneme recognizing practice
UNIT II LISTENING COMPREHENSION 3
Documentaries, Educational video clips, Oration of Great leaders, Radio & TV news, Listening to
conversations, Telephone etiquette, Reviewing news from Media.
UNIT III LANGUAGE FUNCTIONS 3
Giving reasons, talking about future plans, Comparing & Contrasting, Making suggestions
UNIT IV PRESENTATION STRATEGIES 5
Presentation Strategies Defining Purpose; Audience & Locale; Organizing Contents; Preparing Outline; Audio-
visual Aids; Nuances of Delivery; Body Language; Proximics; Setting Nuances of Voice Dynamics; Time-
Dimension.
UNIT V PRESENTATION AND APPRAISAL SESSIONS 10
Importance of Journal articles – elements of technical articles (abstract, introduction, methodology, results,
discussion, conclusion, appendices, Bibliography and references), Preparation of scholarly papers based on
the internet Resources, Oral Presentations & Reviews.
TOTAL: 30 Periods
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Mandel, Steve. Effective Presentation Skills. New Delhi: Viva Books Pvt. Ltd., 2004.
2. Gopalaswamy, Ramesh & Ramesh Mahadevan. ACE of Soft Skills. New Delhi: Pearson, 2010.
3. Gimson, AC. An Introduction to the Pronunciation of English. London: ELBS, 1989.
4. Oconnor, JD. Better English Pronunciation. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1967.
15ME501 : HEAT AND MASS TRANSFER L T P C
3 2 0 4
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
This course is intended to gather adequate knowledge of various modes of heat transfer that occurs
in any physical systems.
To identify the parameters that characterizes these problems and the methods to solve it in various
55
practical systems.
To analyze complex heat and mass transfer problems in any engineering systems.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course students will:
To perform the influence of conduction heat transfer and thermal analysis based on conduction in
various mechanical systems.
Demonstrate and have the ability to recognize the characteristics of convection heat transfer in
external and internal flow.
To analyze the effect of different boiling regimes and condensation and also through the proper use
of modeling can able to choose different heat exchangers for specific applications.
To perform the impact of radiation heat transfer in different systems that involves heat transfer.
Gather adequate knowledge regarding the various modes of mass transfer and its analogy with heat
transfer.
UNIT I CONDUCTION 14
Basic Concepts – Mechanism of Heat Transfer – Conduction, Convection and Radiation – Fourier Law of
Conduction - General Differential equation of Heat Conduction –– Cartesian and Cylindrical Coordinates
– One Dimensional Steady State Heat Conduction – Conduction through Plane Wall, Cylinders and
Spherical systems – Composite Systems – Conduction with Internal Heat Generation – Extended Surfaces –
Unsteady Heat Conduction – Lumped Analysis – Use of Heislers Chart.
UNIT II CONVECTION 13
Basic Concepts –Heat Transfer Coefficients – Boundary Layer Concept – Types of Convection – Forced
Convection – Dimensional Analysis – External Flow – Flow over Plates, Cylinders and Spheres – Internal
Flow – Laminar and Turbulent Flow – Combined Laminar and Turbulent flow over Bank of tubes – Free
Convection in Vertical Plate, Horizontal Plate, Inclined Plate, Cylinders and Spheres - Dimensional Analysis.
UNIT III PHASE CHANGE HEAT TRANSFER AND HEAT EXCHANGERS 12
Nusselts theory of condensation-pool boiling, flow boiling, correlations in boiling and condensation. Types of
Heat Exchangers – Heat Exchanger Analysis – LMTD Method and NTU - Effectiveness – Overall Heat
Transfer Coefficient – Fouling Factors.
UNIT IV RADIATION 11
Basic Concepts, Laws of Radiation – Stefan Boltzmann Law, Kirchhoff’s Law –Black Body Radiation –Grey
body radiation -Shape Factor Algebra – Electrical Analogy – Radiation Shields –Introduction to Gas Radiation,
Greenhouse effect, Solar Radiation (elementary treatment only).
UNIT V MASS TRANSFER 10
Basic Concepts – Diffusion Mass Transfer – Fick’s Law of Diffusion – Steady state Molecular Diffusion –
Convective Mass Transfer – Momentum, Heat and Mass Transfer Analogy – Convective Mass Transfer
Correlations.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Sachdeva R C, “Fundamentals of Engineering Heat and Mass Transfer” New Age International, 4th
Edition (Reprint Nov, 2014).
2. Incropera, Frank P.; DeWitt, David P.; Bergman, Theodore L; Lavine, Adrienne S., “Fundamentals of
Heat and Mass Transfer”, John Wiley and Sons, 2011.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Yadav R “Heat and Mass Transfer” Central Publishing House - Allahabad, 1992.
2. Ozisik M “Heat Transfer: A Basic Approach”,McGraw-Hill,1984.
3. Nag P.K, “Heat Transfer”, 3rd Edition Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2011.
56
4. Holman J.P “Heat Transfer” 10th Edition Tata McGraw-Hill, 2011.
5. Kothandaraman.C.P, “Fundamentals of Heat and Mass Transfer” 4th Edition New Age International,
New Delhi, (Reprint 2015).
6. Cengel, Y.A., Heat Transfer - A Practical Approach, 3rd Edition McGraw-Hill, 2002.
7. G.D.Rai, “Solar Energy utilization” Khanna Publishers, NewDelhi,2004
WEB REFERENCES:
NPTEL lecture videos
15ME502 : DYNAMICS OF MACHINERY L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To understand the method of static force analysis and dynamic force analysis of mechanisms.
To study the undesirable effects of unbalances in rotors and engines.
To understand the concept of vibratory systems and their analysis.
To understand the principles of governors and gyroscopes.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course the students will be able to:
Understand and conduct static and dynamic force analysis of Mechanisms.
Apply the concept of balancing and use it for reducing the unbalanced forces in rotating masses and
reciprocating engines under operating conditions exposure to IS standards.
Acquire knowledge on types of vibrations in different systems.
Apply different damping methods to minimize vibrations using IS standards.
Understand, apply and analyze the control mechanisms in Governors and Gyroscopes.
UNIT I FORCE ANALYSIS AND FLYWHEELS 9
Static force analysis of mechanisms – D’ Alemberts principle - Inertia force and Inertia torque – Dynamic force
analysis - Dynamic Analysis in Reciprocating Engines – Gas Forces - Equivalent masses - Bearing loads -
Crank shaft Torque – Engine shaking Forces - Turning moment diagrams - Flywheels of engines –
Fluctuation of speed – Maximum fluctuation of Energy – Flywheel in punching press (Elementary level).
UNIT II BALANCING 9
Static and dynamic balancing - Balancing of rotating masses - Balancing of Reciprocating masses -
Single cylinder Engine – Primary and secondary unbalanced forces - Partial Balancing of uncoupled two &
three cylinder locomotives- Balancing of Multi-cylinder Engines – In line engine - Firing order
UNIT III FREE VIBRATION 9
Basic features of vibratory systems - Basic elements and lumping of parameters - Degrees of freedom -
Single degree of freedom - Free vibration - Equations of motion - natural frequency - Types of Damping -
Damped free vibration - Damping Factor – Logarithmic Decrement– Whirling of shafts and critical speed -
Torsional systems; Natural frequency of two and three rotor systems.
UNIT IV FORCED VIBRATION 9
Response to periodic forcing - Harmonic Forcing – Forced vibration caused by unbalance - Support
motion – Force transmissibility and amplitude transmissibility - Vibration isolation.
UNIT V MECHANISMS FOR CONTROL 9
57
Governors - Types - Centrifugal governors - Gravity controlled (Porter & Proell) and spring controlled
centrifugal governors (Hartnell & Hartung) – Characteristics - Effect of friction - Controlling Force – Quality of
governors – effect of friction.
Gyroscopes - Gyroscopic couple - Gyroscopic stabilization - Gyroscopic effects in Automobiles and
ships - Gyroscopic effect on Aeroplanes, naval ship, stability of two wheeled and Four wheeled vehicles.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Ambekar A. G., "Mechanism and Machine Theory", Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2007.
2. Khurmi R.S & Gupta J.K, "Theory of Machines" S.Chand Publications, 2012.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Thomas Bevan, "Theory of Machines", CBS Publishers and Distributors, 3rd Edition, 2005.
2. Ghosh A. and Mallick A.K., "Theory of Mechanisms and Machines", East West Press, New Delhi, 3rd
Edition, 2006.
3. Shigley J.E. and Uicker J.J., "Theory of Machines and Mechanisms", McGraw-Hill, Inc., 3rd Edition,
2009.
4. Rao J.S. and Dukkipati R.V., "Mechanism and Machine Theory ", New Age International Publishers,
2006.
5. John Hannah and Stephens R.C., "Mechanics of Machines", Viva low-Priced Student Edition, 2006.
6. Sadhu Singh "Theory of Machines" Pearson Education, 3rd Edition, 2012.
STANDARDS:
1. IS 11717: 2000, Vocabulary on Vibration and Shock.
2. IS 13301: 1992, Guidelines for vibration isolation for machine foundations.
3. IS 10000: Part 7: 1980, Methods of tests for internal combustion engines: Part 7 Governing tests for
constant speed engines and selection of engines for use with electrical generators.
4. IS 13274: 1992, Mechanical vibration - Balancing – Vocabulary.
5. IS13277: 1992, Balancing machine - Description and evaluation.
15ME503 : DESIGN OF TRANSMISSION SYSTEMS L T P C
3 2 0 4
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To gain knowledge on the principles and procedure for the design of power Transmission
components.
To understand the standard procedure available for Design of Transmission sip terms.
To learn to use standard data and catalogues.
To learn to use catalogues and to design standard transmission systems.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course the students will be able:
To remember the standard procedure available for design of transmission sip terms.
To understand the principles and procedure for the design of power transmission components.
To learn to use standard data and catalogues.
An ability to analyze, design, and/or select a variety of machine components such as gears, gear
boxes, belt drives, cam, brakes and clutches.
To develop a working knowledge in the use of various standard procedures and catalog information
in the identification and selection of engineering materials.
58
UNIT I DESIGN OF FLEXIBLE ELEMENTS IN TRANSMISSION SYSTEMS 9
Selection of V belts and pulleys – selection of flat belts and pulleys – Selection of wire ropes and pulleys –
Selection of transmission chains and sprockets.
UNIT II SPUR AND HELICAL GEARS 9
Gear terminology - speed ratios and number of teeth-force analysis -Tooth stresses - dynamic effects – fatigue
strength - Factor of safety - Gear materials – Design of straight tooth spur & helical gears based on strength
and wear considerations – Pressure angle in the normal and transverse plane- Equivalent number of teeth-
forces for helical gears.-Crossed helical and Herringbone gear - Cross helical, Terminology-helix angles-
Design of the pair of cross helical gears.
UNIT III BEVEL AND WORM GEARS 9
Straight bevel gear: Tooth terminology, tooth forces and stresses, equivalent number of teeth. Design of pair
of straight bevel gears.
Worm Gear: Merits and demerits- terminology, materials-forces and stresses, efficiency, Design of the worm
gear pair-Heat generation in worm gear drive.
UNIT IV DESIGN OF GEAR BOXES 9
Design of multi - speed gearbox - Standard step ratio - Preparation of ray diagram and kinematic arrangement
- Design of Speed reducer box..
UNIT V DESIGN OF CAM, CLUTCHES AND BRAKES 9
Cam Design: Types-pressure angle and under cutting - base circle determination-forces and surface stresses.
Design of plate clutches – axial clutches-cone clutches-internal expanding rim clutches.
Design of Block, Band, internal and external shoe brakes.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Shigley J.E and Mischke C. R “Mechanical Engineering Design” (English) 9th Edition, Tata McGraw-
Hill, 2011.
2. Bhandari V.B, “Design of Machine Elements”, 3rd Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill Book Co, 2013.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Maitra G.M., Prasad L.V., “Hand book of Mechanical Design”, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2nd Edition,
2009.
2. Prabhu. T.J., “Design of Transmission Elements”, Mani Offset, Chennai, 2000.
3. Hamrock B.J., Jacobson B., Schmid S.R., “Fundamentals of Machine Elements”, 3rd Edition,
McGraw-Hill Book Co., 2006.
4. Sundararajamoorthy T.V, Shanmugam .N, "Machine Design", Anuradha Publications, Chennai, 2007.
5. Ugural A.C, "Mechanical Design: An Integrated Approach", McGraw-Hill, 2004.
6. PSG College of Technology, “Design Data”, Kalaikathir Achchagam, 2012.
STANDARDS:
1. IS 4460: Parts 1 to 3: 1995, Gears – Spur and Helical Gears – Calculation of Load Capacity.
2. IS 7443: 2002, Methods of Load Rating of Worm Gears.
3. IS 15151: 2002, Belt Drives – Pulleys and V-Ribbed belts for Industrial applications – PH, PJ, PK, Pl
and PM Profiles: Dimensions.
59
4. IS 2122: Part 1: 1973, Code of practice for selection, storage, installation and maintenance of belting
for power transmission: Part 1 Flat Belt Drives.
5. IS 2122: Part 2: 1991, Code of practice for selection, storage, installation and maintenance of belting
for power transmission: Part 2 V-Belt Drives.
15ME551 : HEAT TRANSFER AND METALLURGY LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 4 2
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To give hands on exposure to students to measure Thermal conductivity.
To have the knowledge in measuring Stefan Boltzmann constant and emissivity values.
To have exposure to parallel flow and counter flow heat exchangers.
To know about the measurement of heat transfer coefficient and temperature distribution in free and
forced convection.
To give practical exposure to students in the specimen preparation, microscopic examination and
hardness testing of various metallographic specimens.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course students will:
Be able to measure the values of Thermal conductivity, Emissivity and Stefan Boltzmann constant.
Have a good understanding about the working of parallel and counter flow heat exchangers.
Be able to measure the heat transfer coefficient and temperature distribution in forced and free
convection.
Obtain exposure to the specimen preparation, microscopic examination and hardness testing of
various metallographic specimens.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS 30
Thermal conductivity measurement by guarded plate method.
Thermal conductivity of pipe insulation using lagged pipe apparatus.
Natural convection heat transfer from a vertical cylinder.
Forced convection inside tube.
Heat transfer from pin-fin (natural & forced convection modes).
Determination of Stefan-Boltzmann constant.
Determination of emissivity of a grey surface.
Effectiveness of Parallel/counter flow heat exchanger.
LIST OF EQUIPMENTS
Guarded plate apparatus – 1 No.
Lagged pipe apparatus – 1 No.
Natural convection-vertical cylinder apparatus – 1 No.
Forced convection inside tube apparatus – 1 No.
Pin-fin apparatus – 1 No.
Stefan-Boltzmann apparatus – 1 No.
Emissivity measurement apparatus – 1 No.
Parallel/counter flow heat exchanger apparatus – 1 No.
METALLURGY 15
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
Specimen preparation for metallographic studies.
Microscopic examination of un-etched and etched FG, SG iron.
Microscopic examination of plain carbon steel in un-etched and etched state.
Microscopic examination of annealed, normalised, hardened steel.
60
Jomney end quench test.
Comparison of hardness by executing the heat treatment of
Annealed/ Normalised specimen.
Quenched specimen
Quenched and tempered specimen - with Unhardened specimen
LIST OF EQUIPMENTS
Metallurgical Microscope - 3 No’s
Muffle Furnace (900ºC) -1 No.
Jomney end quench apparatus -1 No.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
15ME552 : CAD AND CAM LABORATORY
L T P C
0 0 4 2
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To be able to understand and handle design problems in a systematic manner.
To gain practical experience in handling 2D drafting and 3D modeling software systems.
To be able to apply CAD in real life applications.
To understand the concepts G and M codes and manual part programming.
To expose students to modern control systems (Fanuc, Siemens etc.).
To know the application of various CNC machines.
To expose students to modern CNC application machines EDM, EDM wire cut and RapidPrototyping.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Have a fundamental knowledge of Computer Numerical Control machines.
Apply the concepts and commands of a computer-aided design system.
Able to combine the computer-aided design system with language acceptable to the numerical control
machines in designing, and producing usable parts.
Create accurate and precise geometry of complex engineering systems and use the geometric
models in different engineering applications.
Compare the different types of modeling techniques and explain the central role solid models play in
the successful completion of CAD/CAM-based product development.
Use and assess state-of-the-art CAD/CAM codes efficiently, effectively and intelligently in advanced
engineering applications.
Develop algorithms for 2D and 3D geometric modeling.
Use current state-of-the-art CAD/CAM technology in research.
Extend CAD/CAM technology for research and development purposes.
Explain the basic concepts of CNC programming and machining.
UNIT I 3D GEOMETRIC MODELING 20
Creation of 3D Models - Wire Frame, Surface, Solid modeling Techniques Using CAD Packages – CSG, B-
Rep Approaches in Solid Modeling - Feature Based Modeling Technique – Assembly – Detailing - Exposure to
Industrial Components – Application of GD&T.
UNIT II MANUAL CNC PART PROGRAMMING 12
Manual CNC Part Programming.
Manual CNC Part Programming Using Standard G and M Codes - Tool Path Simulation – Exposure to Various
Standard Control Systems- Machining simple components by Using CNC machines.
61
UNIT III COMPUTER AIDED PART PROGRAMMING 10
CL Data Generation by Using CAM Software– Post Process Generation for Different Control System –
Machining of Computer Generated Part Program by Using Machining Center and Turning Center.
UNIT IV COMPUTER AIDED METROLOGY 3
Measurement of geometric elements in Coordinate Measuring Machine – Vision Measuring Machine – non
contact measurement of geometrical features (Demonstration only).
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
HARDWARE
Computer Server
Computer nodes or systems (High end CPU with at least 1 GB main memory) networked to the
server
Laser Printer
Trainer CNC Lathe
Trainer CNC milling
SOFTWARE
CAD/CAM software (Pro-E or IDEAS or Unigraphics or CATIA or SOLIDWORKS)
CAM Software (CNC Programming and tool path simulation for FANUC /Sinumeric and Heiden
controller)
Licensed operating system
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Rogers DF & Adams J A, “Mathematical Elements for Computer Graphics”, McGraw-Hill, 1989.
2. Shah JJ &Mantyla M, “Parametric and feature-based CAD/CAM”, John Wiley & Sons, 1995.
3. Zeid I, “CAD/CAM Theory and Practice”, McGraw-Hill, 1991.
4. Hoschek J and Lasser D, “Fundamentals of Computer Aided Geometric Design”, A.K. Peters,
Wellesley, Massachusetts, 1993.
5. Lee K, “Principles of CAD/CAM/CAE”, Addison Wesley Longman, Reading Massachusettes, 1999.
15ME601 : FINITE ELEMENT ANALYSIS L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To provide in depth knowledge in approximate methods in Structural mechanics problems.
To offer understanding of One Dimensional Finite Element Analysis with various types of Elements.
To get exposed to plane problems in Engineering Analysis including Two Dimensional Finite Element
Analysis.
To design and analyse any Engineering Component using FEA.
Review Topics: Matrix algebra, Deformable bodies, Structural Mechanics
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course the students will be able to:
Understand the basic fundamental equations of elasticity and solving linear system of equation.
Make familiar of basic approximate methods in Structural applications.
Understand the basic principle of Finite Element Analysis in 1D structural and thermal application.
Solve structural and non-structural problem using 2D FEM.
Equip them to effectively employ finite element method in order to simulate and launch a new
engineering component to the market.
62
UNIT I ELASTICITY 12
Introduction - Stress at a point - Stress Tensor - Elementary view- differential equations of equilibrium; Strain -
Displacement relation; Stress-Strain relationship in Two dimension and Three dimension- Solving linear
system of equations by Gaussian elimination method.- Numerical integration - Gaussian quadrature.
UNIT II APPROXIMATE METHODS 12
Solution to complex engineering problems - Exact solution - Approximate Solution - mathematical modelling -
differential forms of beams - Strain energy - principle of minimum total potential energy - Rayleigh Ritz
method - general weighted residual statement - Weighted residual Techniques - Method of Collocation,
Subdomain method, Method of least square, Galerkin’s method, Method of Moments- Comparison of
approximate solutions with exact solution.
UNIT III ONE DIMENSIONAL FEA 12
Introduction to FEM - engineering applications of FEA - Governing equation of FEM - Finite element modelling
- Global Coordinates; Local Coordinates - nodal approximation - Element connectivity - shapes functions for
various elements - Stiffness matrices and load vectors - global stiffness matrix - Boundary conditions -
Computation of deflection, strains and stresses for axial (bar) element; tapered bar element; spring element;
plane truss (spar) element; beam element - Thermal stress problem - Higher order elements - quadratic
element (Shape function expressions only) - One dimension heat transfer analysis - Composite wall.
UNIT IV TWO DIMENSIONAL FEA 12
Introduction - Plane problems in elasticity - Plane Stress, Plane Strain and axi-symmetry - approximation of
geometry and field variable - natural coordinates and global coordinates - Constant Strain Triangular (CST)
element - Jacobian matrix - elasticity matrix - strain displacement matrix - element stiffness matrix - load
vectors - global stiffness matrix - Computation of deflection, strains and stresses for CST element subjected to
in plane load; surface traction - plane stress and plane strain problems - shape functions for CST - Thermal
stress problem in two dimension - Higher order elements - six-noded triangular element (Shape function
expressions only) - Two dimension heat transfer analysis - Axisymmetric formulation using triangular element -
Cylinder under internal pressure.
UNIT V ISOPARAMETRIC ELEMENT FORMULATION 12
Isoparametric formulation - Four node quadrilateral Element - Shape functions - Element stiffness matrix and
force vector - Eight node quadrilateral Element (Shape function expressions only).
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Chandrupatla T.R. and Belegundu A.D, “Introduction to Finite Elements in Engineering”, Pearson
Education, 4th Edition, 2012.
2. Raamachandran J, “Boundary and Finite Elements-Theory and problems”, Narosa Publishing House,
2000.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Rao S.S, “The Finite Element Method in Engineering”, Pergammon Press, 1999.
2. Bhavikatti S.S, “Finite Element Analysis”, New Age International Publishers, 2011.
3. Seshu P, “Textbook of Finite Element Analysis”, PHI Learning Private Limited, 2013.
4. Logan D.L, “A First course in the Finite Element Method”, Thomson Learning, 3rd Edition, 2002.
5. Robert D Cook, David S and Malkucs Michael E Plesha, “Concepts and Applications of Finite
Element Analysis”, Wiley, 4th Edition, 2003.
6. Reddy J.N, “An Introduction to Finite Element Method”, McGraw-Hill International Student Edition,
2005.
7. David V Hutton, “Fundamentals of Finite Element Analysis”, McGraw-Hill Int. Ed., 2004.
63
15ME602 : POWER PLANT TECHNOLOGY L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To understand the various components and operations of different types of power plants.
To study the applications of different types of power plants.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course
Various components and operations of different types of power plants will be understood.
The applications of different types of power plants will be studied
UNIT I STEAM BOILERS AND STEAM POWER CYCLES 9
Comparison and selection of sites- Fuels and combustion, High pressure and Super Critical Boilers – Fluidised
Bed Boilers –Overview of the Indian power sector – load curves for various applications.
Steam power cycles – Simple Rankine Cycle, Reheat and Regenerative, Binary vapour cycle.
UNIT II STEAM TURBINESAND POWER PLANT 11
Selection of steam turbine- Working of Impulse and Reaction steam turbines, compounding, velocity diagrams
for simple and multi-stage turbines, efficiencies.
Steam power plant: Layout - components - working of Steam power plants, Fuel Coal and ash handling,
Combustion Equipment for burning coal, Mechanical Stokers. Pulveriser, Electrostatic Precipitator, Draught-
Different Types - Surface condenser types, cooling Towers, Steam injectors.
UNIT III NUCLEAR AND HYDEL POWER PLANTS 9
Nuclear power plant- Layout - components: Nuclear Energy- Fission, Fusion, Chain Reaction, Types of
Reactors - Waste disposal and safety. Hydel Power plant – Layout: Essential elements- Micro hydel
developments- Pumped storage power plant.
UNIT IV DIESEL AND GAS TURBINE POWER PLANT 9
Diesel power plant: Layout – components- Types of diesel plants, Selection of Engine type, combustion in IC
engines, Cooling and Lubrication systems -applications and comparison.
Gas turbine power plant: Fuels- Gas turbine material – open and closed cycles- reheating – Regeneration and
intercooling - Brayton cycle.
UNIT V OTHER POWER PLANTS AND ECONOMICS OF POWER PLANTS 7
Solar central receiver system, Geo thermal- OTEC- Wind, Tidel, cogeneration plant, Cost of electric Energy-
Fixed and operating costs- Energy rates- Types of tariffs - Economics of load sharing.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
(Use of standard thermodynamic steam tables is permitted)
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Nag P. K, “Power Plant Engineering”, 3rd Edition, Tata McGraw- Hill, 2007.
2. Arora S.C and Domkundwar S, “A Course in Power Plant Engineering”, Dhanpat Rai, 2001.
3. Collier J.G., and Hewitt G.F, “Introduction to Nuclear power”, Hemisphere publishing, New York,
1987.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. K.K.Ramalingam, “Power Plant Engineering”, Scitech Publications, 2002.
2. G.R, Nagpal, “Power Plant Engineering”, Khanna Publishers, 1998.
3. G.D.Rai, “Introduction to Power Plant technology”, Khanna Publishers, 1995.
4. EI-Wakil M.M, “Power Plant Technology,” Tata McGraw-Hill 1984.
64
15ME603 : APPLIED HYDRAULICS AND PNEUMATICS L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To impart knowledge on
The Industrial Hydraulics and Pneumatics Course deals with fluid power, and describes the basic
principles and the importance of pressure, flow, speed, and efficiency rating factors.
Explaining the advantage of fluid power, it provides examples of applications.
Understand the relevant theory (units, flow, pressure, temperature, forces).
Understand the operation of hydraulics & pneumatics circuits and components typically used in
industry.Construct a range of functional hydraulic circuits.
Read hydraulics & pneumatics circuit drawings.
Understand how PLCs are interfaced and used to control pneumatic systems.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course students will be able to
Understand the main components of the hydraulic and pneumatic systems.
To design hydraulic and pneumatic circuits for industrial applications.
To provide essential underpinning knowledge of pneumatics principles and control techniques.
Understand how the PLCs are interfaced and used to control pneumatic systems.
To provide essential knowledge and skills for assembly of fluid power systems
UNIT I FLUID POWER SYSTEMS AND FUNDAMENTALS 9
Introduction to fluid power, Advantages of fluid power, Application of fluid power system. Types of fluid power
systems, Properties of hydraulic fluids – General types of fluids – Fluid power symbols. Basics of Hydraulics-
Applications of Pascal’s Law- Laminar and Turbulent flow – Reynolds’s number – Darcy’s equation – Losses
in pipe, valves and fittings
UNIT II HYDRAULIC COMPONENT & SYSTEM 9
Sources of Hydraulic Power: Pumping theory – Pump classification – Gear pump, Vane Pump, piston pump,
construction and working of pumps – pump performance – Variable displacement pumps. Fluid Power
Actuators: Linear hydraulic actuators – Types of hydraulic cylinders – Single acting, Double acting special
cylinders like tandem, Rod less, Telescopic, Cushioning mechanism, Construction of double acting cylinder,
Rotary actuators – Fluid motors, Gear, Vane and Piston motors.
UNIT III DESIGN OF HYDRAULIC CIRCUITS 9
Construction of Control Components : Directional control valve – 3/2 way valve – 4/2 way valve – Shuttle valve
– check valve – pressure control valve – pressure reducing valve, sequence valve, Flow control valve – Fixed
and adjustable, electrical control solenoid valves, Relays, ladder diagram. Accumulators and Intensifiers:
Types of accumulators – Accumulators circuits, sizing of accumulators, intensifier – Applications of Intensifier
– Intensifier circuit.
UNIT IV PNEUMATIC SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS 9
Pneumatic Components: Properties of air – Compressors – Filter, Regulator, and Lubricator Unit – Air control
valves, Quick exhaust valves, and pneumatic actuators. Fluid Power Circuit Design, Speed control circuits,
synchronizing circuit, Pneumo hydraulic circuit, Sequential circuit design for simple applications using cascade
method.
UNIT V DESIGN OF PNEUMATIC CIRCUITS 9
65
Servo systems – Hydro Mechanical servo systems, Electro hydraulic servo systems and proportional valves.
Fluidics – Introduction to fluidic devices, simple circuits, Introduction to Electro Hydraulic Pneumatic logic
circuits, ladder diagrams, PLC applications in fluid power control. Fluid power circuits; failure and
troubleshooting.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Anthony Esposito, “Fluid Power with Applications”, Pearson Education 2015.
2. Srinivasan.R, “Hydraulic and Pneumatic controls”, Vijay Nicole, 2016.
3. Majumdar S.R., “Oil Hydraulics Systems- Principles and Maintenance”, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2012
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Shanmugasundaram.K, “Hydraulic and Pneumatic controls”, Chand & Co, 2013.
2. Majumdar S.R., “Pneumatic systems – Principles and maintenance”, Tata McGraw Hill, 1995.
3. Anthony Lal, “Oil hydraulics in the service of industry”, Allied publishers, 1982.
4. Harry L. Stevart D.B, “Practical guide to fluid power”, Taraoeala sons and Port Ltd.Broadey, 1976.
5. Michael J, Prinches and Ashby J. G, “Power Hydraulics”, Prentice Hall, 1989.
6. Dudelyt, A. Pease and John T. Pippenger, “Basic Fluid Power”, Prentice Hall, 1987
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://www.nptel.iitm.ac.in/courses.php
2. http://www.ebookbrowsee.net/np/nptel-lecture-notes
15ME651 : MECHATRONICS AND DYNAMICS LABORATORY
L T P C
0 0 4 2
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
Analyze, design, and build analog circuits using switches, op- amps, diodes, transistors, and relays.
Analyze and build digital circuits.
Explain the basic components of a microcontroller and develop code for programming of microcontrollers.
Explain the different interfacing techniques of PC and microcontrollers such as A/D, D/A, Parallel and Serial.
Explain the concept of time and timers, and implement timers in different computing platforms.
Develop state transition diagrams for control of physical systems.
Explain the principle of operation and interface of different sensors.
To understand how certain measuring devices are used for dynamic testing.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Able to design a pneumatic system/hydraulic system for any innovative ideas.
Selection and use of the sensors and actuators in process monitoring systems.
Design a Simulation circuit for hydraulic and Pneumatic system without prototyping.
Make an interface program for mechanical systems.
Setup a speed control devices for various drive systems.
The various concepts of dynamics will be learnt by the students.
UNIT I PNEUMATIC TRAINER KITS 9
66
Design of circuits with logic sequence using Basic & Electro pneumatic trainer kits.
UNIT II HYDRAULIC TRAINER KITS 9
Design of circuits with logic sequence using Basic & Electro pneumatic trainer kits.
Design and testing of fluid power circuits to control.
(i) Velocity (ii) direction and (iii) force of single and double acting actuators.
UNIT III SIMULATIONS 9
Simulation of basic Hydraulic, Pneumatic and Electric circuits using software.
UNIT IV MICROPROCESSOR & PLC 9
1. Circuits with multiple cylinder sequences in Electro pneumatic using PLC.
2. Stepper motor interfacing with 8051 Micro controller.
3. Full step resolution (ii) half step resolution.
4. Computerized data logging system with control for process variables like pressure flow and temperature.
5. Servo controller interfacing for open loop and closed loop system.
UNIT V DYNAMICS 9
1. Determination of Mass moment of inertia of Fly wheel and Axle system.
2. Determination of Mass Moment of Inertia using bifilar suspension and compound pendulum.
3. Motorized gyroscope – Study of gyroscopic effect and couple.
4. Governor - Determination of range sensitivity, effort etc., for Watts, Porter, Proell and Hartnell Governors.
5. Cams – Cam profile drawing, Motion curves and study of jump phenomenon.
6. Balancing of rotating masses.
7. Balancing of reciprocating masses.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
HARDWARE
Basic Pneumatic Trainer Kit
Basic Pneumatic Trainer Kit (Electrical) VMT-04
Basic Pneumatic Trainer Kit (PLC) VMT-05
Advanced Hydraulic Trainer Kit
8051 Micro Controller Training Kit
Stepper Motor Interface (VBMB – 013A)
Computerized Data Logging System (VMPA – 062)
Design & testing of Fluid control circuit VPAT-12L
Speed control of AC Servo Motor (VPAT-22)
Digital PID Controller (VDPID – 01)
Temperature control Module
DC Motor Speed Control Module (VPAT – 02)
SOFTWARE
Hydraulic Simulation Software Hydrosim 3.64
Hydraulic Simulation Software Hydrosim 3.64
DYNAMICS LABORATORY EQUIPMENTS:
Stroboscope
Vibrometer
J,K,T Thermocouples
67
Gas Thermometer
Radiation pyrometer
Load Cell
LVDT
Brake Dynamometer
Cam analyzer
Motorised gyroscope
Governor apparatus - Watt, Porter, Proell and Hartnell governors
Whirling of shaft apparatus
Static and dynamic balancing machine
15HS651 : PROFESSIONAL COMMUNICATION SKILLS LABORATORY
(COMMON TO ECE / MECH / IT / BIO-TECH)
L T P C
0 0 4 2
COURSE OBJECTIVES
To enable the students of engineering and technology attain effective professional communication
skills
To train the aspirants to get through interviews successfully
To make them successful corporates
To upgrade the language proficiency level of engineering students
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Students of Engineering and technology will be able to
attain effective communication skills
enhance business communication
acquire language proficiency
face interviews
UNIT I VOCABULARY BUILDING 9
Synonyms & antonyms, grammar: error spotting exercise, listening exercise, reading comprehension
exercises, sequencing the jumbled sentences, cloze test
UNIT II BUSINESS CORRESPONDENCE 9
Report Writing: types of Reports- Project report – report format, Preparation of a report based on the
newspaper article. Writing memos, notice, agenda and circular.
UNIT III GROUP DISCUSSION 9
Group Discussion-an introduction, Sample videos on GD and appraisal, Participation in Group Discussion-
Persuasive skills, Negotiating ability, team skills and leadership Quality.
UNIT IV INTERVIEW SKILLS AND SOFT SKILLS 9
Resume designing, Online Resume, Successful interview skills, mock interviews, and Motivation – self-image –
goal setting – managing changes – corporate etiquette, body language, and power dressing- time management
– stress management, Career and life planning.
UNIT V THEATRE ART AND AN INTRODUCTION TO INTERNATIONAL
EXAMINATIONS
9
Master of Ceremony, Welcome Address, Role play activities, dramatics, An Introduction to International
English Language Testing System (IELTS) – Test of English as a Foreign Language (TOEFL), Cambridge
Advanced English(CAE)– Graduate Record Examination (GRE) – Civil Service (Language related)
68
TOTAL: 45 Periods
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Berry, Thomas Elliott. Most Common Mistakes in English Usage. New Delhi: TMH Publication
Company Limited, 2012.
2. Thorpe,E and Heaton,S. Objective English. Ed: Pearson Education, 2nd Edition,
New Delhi: 2007.
3. Bhatnagar, R.P. English for Competitive Examination. 3rd Edition. Macmillan, New Delhi: 2012.
4. Bhatnagar, R.P., NITINBhatnagar and Mamta. Communicative English for Engineers & Professionals.
Noida: Pearson Education, 2010.
5. Rizvi, Asharaf M. Effective Technical Communication. New Delhi: Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing
Company Limited, 2007.
15ME652 : DESIGN AND FABRICATION PROJECT L T P C
0 0 8 4
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To provide opportunity for the students to implement their skills acquired in the previous semesters to
practical problems.
To inculcate the habit of working in teams.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
The students will be able
To design, fabricate and demonstrate working of a machine element.
The students in convenient groups of not more than 3 members have to take one small item for design and
fabrication. Every project work shall have a guide who is the member of the faculty of the institution and if
possible with an industry guide also.
The item chosen may be small machine elements (Example-screw jack, coupling, machine vice, cam and
follower, governor etc.), attachment to machine tools, tooling (jigs, fixtures etc.), small gear box, automotive
appliances, agricultural implements, simple heat exchangers, small pumps, hydraulic /pneumatic devices etc.
to benefit the society.
The students are required to design and fabricate the chosen item in the college and demonstrate its working
apart from submitting the project report. The report should contain assembly drawing, parts drawings, process
charts relating to fabrication.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
15ME701 : INSTRUMENTATION AND METROLOGY L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To impart knowledge on basic principles of instrumentation and metrology.
To study the working principle of metrological instruments.
To become an expert in the field of measurements.
To inculcate the knowledge of various types of measuring instruments and its applications.
To create the knowledge on cutting edge technology followed in the field of instrumentation and
69
metrology.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Basic knowledge on instrumentation and metrology.
Able to analyze the basic principles and classification of metrological instruments.
Proficient in the field of measurements.
Hands on theoretical experience in handling measuring instruments for an industrial exposure.
Designing the measuring system for various applications.
UNIT I BASICS OF INSTRUMENTATION 9
General concept - application of measurement - instrumentation- monitoring of process and operations -
control of process and operations – configurations - functional elements of the instruments - definitions and
terminology of calibration – accuracy – precision – sensitivity – threshold – resolution – hysteresis - dead
space – range – span - errors of measurements –strain gauge-ultrasonic detectors, machine vision.
UNIT II MEASURING INSTRUMENTS 9
Study of strain measuring instrument - measurement of force - torque temperature and pressure - vibration
measuring instruments - seismic instruments - sensors in automation.
UNIT III COMPARATORS AND INTERFEROMETER 9
Definition of metrology - economics of measurement - measurement as a comparative process - dimensional
properties - terminology and accuracy of measurement - measuring errors.
Abbe’s principle - principle of interferometry - flatness testing - optical interferometer - laser interferometer -
holography and speckle metrology. Linear measurements: Material length standards – line and end
measurement – calibration of end bars - datum and reference surfaces - surface plates - gauges – feeler
gauges – micrometres - dial test indicator - slip gauges - care of gauge blocks. Comparators: Mechanical –
electrical - optical and pneumatic - optical projector.
UNIT IV GEOMETRICAL MEASUREMENT 9
Angular measurement – plain vernier and optical protractors - sine bar - optical instruments – flatness -
parallelism and roundness measurement - need for limit gauge - design of plug gauge – Taylor’s principle -
types of limit gauges - surface texture - controlling surface texture - parameters used - specification of surface
texture - drawing and symbols - Tomlinson surface meter - CMM.
UNIT V THREADS, GEARS MEASUREMENT AND MACHINE VISION 9
Types of screw threads – terminology - proportions of ISO metric thread - measurement of major - minor and
effective diameters - Gear terminology and standard proportions - spur gear measurement - checking of
composite errors - base pitch measurement - clean room environment - machine vision - image processing
and analysis - cone sight - grey scaling.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Jain R.K., “Engineering Metrology”, Khanna Publishers, 2009.
2. Gupta S.C, “Engineering Metrology”, Dhanpatrai Publications, 2005.
3. Nakra B.C., Chaudhry K K, “Instrumentation, Measurement and Analysis, Tata Mc. Graw Hill, 3rd
Edition, 2009.
4. D. V. S. Murty, “Transducers & Instrumentation”, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd, 8th Edition 2008.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Beckwith T. G and Buck N. L, “Mechanical Measurements”, Addition Wesley Publishing, 2009.
2. Dominique Placko, “Fundamentals of Instrumentation and Measurement”, Wiley- ISTE, 2007.
3. Narayana K, “Engineering Metrology”, Scitech Publication(India) Pvt Ltd, 2006.
4. Donald P. Eckman, "Industrial Instrumentation", Wiley Eastern Limited, 2004.
5. Ernest O. Doebelin, “Measurements systems, Applications and Design”, McGraw Hill, 5th Edition,
70
2004.
6. Thomas G.Beckwith,Roy D.Marangoni& John H.Lienhard V, “Mechanical Measurements” Pearson
Prentice Hall, 2007.
7. Harrison H.L. and Bollinger J.G., “Automatic Controls”, International Text Book Co., 2001.
15ME702 : INDUSTRIAL ECONOMICS, PSYCHOLOGY AND
MANAGEMENT
L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To introduce the concepts of economics as applied to Industry.
To provide the details about demand analysis and forecasting, National Income and Measurement.
To study the Principles and Functions of Management and organization theory.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
After studying this course students will be able to:
Understand the scope of economics and demand analysis.
Gain the knowledge about demand forecasting related to market conditions.
Understand the Concept of National Income and Measurement.
Become familiar with Principles and Functions of Management and organization theory.
Become familiar with Profit Volume Analysis.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION OF INDUSTRIAL ECONOMICS 9
Industrial Economics: Definition and scope in engineering perspective. Demand Analysis: Law of Demand,
Determinants of Demand, Demand forecast, Elasticity of Demand - Supply, Law of supply, and Determinants
of supply, Elasticity of supply, indifference Map - Price, Income and cross Elasticity.
UNIT II PROFIT VOLUME ANALYSIS 9
Effect of changes in volume, selling price, fixed cost and variable cost. Cost volume profit relationship –
relevant costs in decision making – profit management analysis – break even analysis – margin of safety –
angle of incidence and multi product break even analysis.
Tools for project planning, work break down structure, responsibility matrix, events and milestones, GERT
Network, Gantt charts, PERT/CPM.
UNIT III ELEMENTS OF INDUSTRIAL PSYCHOLOGY 7
Freudian Theory, Industrial Psychology : Definitions & Scope, Personality, self-esteem, socialisation –
environmental contexts influencing behaviour – role of information technology and globalization, Major
influences : Enthusiasm, motivation, boredom, fatigue, accidents, safety measures, Selection and recruitment
Job analysis, Performance evaluation, Job satisfaction, Stress management, Attitude
UNIT IV ORGANISATIONAL BEHAVIOUR 12
Organisational Behaviour : Definition, nature and scope, individual in workplace, commitment and job
enrichment, organizational culture, Factors influencing Job satisfaction, work environment, social relationship
to increase productivity, withdrawal behaviour, training and development.
Group: Definition, types, effective communication, Team work: Process, barriers, determinants of group
cohesiveness, morale, professional behaviour,
Ethics in workplace: Formulation of ethical codes, code of discipline, encouraging and managing ethical
behaviour, ethical, dilemma, decision making. Values: Meaning, Gandhian thoughts, social responsibility.
71
UNIT V MANAGEMENT PROCESS AND PRINCIPLES 8
Principles, Process and Functions of Management – Evolution of Management Thought - contribution of F.W.
Taylor, Henri Fayol, Elton Ma’o– Nature of planning, decision making process, management by objectives.
Organization Theory and Process – Leadership – Motivation – Communication – Conflict Management in
Organization.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Rajan Mishra,“Industrial Economics and Management Principles”, Laxmi Publications (P) Ltd, New
Delhi, 2008.
2. Aamodt M.G,“Industrial Organizational Psychology: An Applied Approach”, Wadsworth/Thompson:
Belmont, C.A, 5th Edition, 2007.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. V.L.Mote, Samuel Paul and G.S.Gupta, “Managerial Economics – concepts and cases”,TMH, 2009.
2. A.Ramachandra Aryasri and V.V.Ramana Murthy, “Engineering Economics and Financial
Accounting”, TMH, New Delhi, 2004.
3. Yogesh Maheshwari, “Managerial Economics”, second edition, PHI 2012.
4. T.R.Banga and S.C.Sharma, “Mechanical Estimating and Costing”, Khanna Publishers, 16th Edition
2011.
5. Herald Koontz and Heinz Weihrich, “Essentials of Management”, Tata McGraw Hill Education Private
Limited, 9th Edition,2012.
6. Aswathappa K., “Organisational Behaviour”, 8th Edition, Himalaya Publishing House, 2010.
7. Miner J.B,“Industrial/Organizational Psychology”, McGraw Hill NY, 1992.
8. Schneider Engnov, “Industrial Sociology” 2nd Edition, McGraw Hill Publishing Co., New Delhi, 1979.
9. Mamoria C.B. and Mamoria S., “Dynamics of Industrial Relations in India”, Himalaya Publishing
House, 2010.
10. Maheshwari.K.L, Varshney.R.L “Managerial Economics”Sultan Chand & Sons, 2003.
11. Luthans, Fred, “Organizational Behaviour”, McGraw Hill, 12th Edition, 2013.
12. John M Nicholas, “Project Management for Business and Technology”, Prentice Hall India Pvt Ltd.,
New Delhi, 2002.
15ME751 : INSTRUMENTATION AND METROLOGYLABORATORY L T P C
0 0 4 2
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To supplement the principles learnt in Kinematics and Dynamics of Machinery.
To get exposure on various industrial sensors used to measure the assorted process parameters.
To reinforce the students with an adequate work experience in the measurement.
To train the students in the measurement of displacement, force and torque etc.,
To expertise in handling the instruments involved.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Able to perform accurate measurements for any engineering system.
Able to identify basic metrology experiments.
Understand relative precision of measurement and source of measurement errors.
The students will equip with the knowledge on various instruments used for measurement.
Develop and reinforce measurements skills for project implementation.
INSTRUMENTATION 15
1. Measurement of speed using Stroboscope.
2. Temperature measurement using J, K, T Thermocouples and gas Thermometer.
72
3. Temperature measurement using radiation pyrometer.
4. Load Cell.
5. LVDT.
6. Torque measurements using Brake Dynamometer.
METROLOGY 15
1. Calibration of Vernier / Micrometer / Dial Gauge.
2. Checking Dimensions of part using slip gauges.
3. Measurements of Gear Tooth Dimensions.
4. Measurement of Taper Angle using sine bar / tool makers microscope.
5. Measurement of straightness and flatness.
6. Measurement of thread parameters.
7. Checking the limits of dimensional tolerances using comparators (Mechanical / Pneumatic /
Electrical).
8. Coordinate Measuring Machine.
TOTAL: 30 PERIODS
LIST OFEQUIPMENTS
Micrometer - 5
Vernier Caliper - 5
Vernier Height Gauge - 2
Vernier Depth Gauge - 2
Slip Gauge Set - 1
Gear Tooth Vernier -1
Sine Bar - 2
Bevel Protractor - 1
Floating Carriage Micrometer - 1
Profile Projector - 1
Mechanical / Electrical / Pneumatic Comparator - 1
Temperature Measuring Setup - 1
Displacement Measuring Setup -1
Force Measuring Setup - 1
Torque Measuring Setup - 1
Vibration / Shock Measuring Setup - 1
Autocollimator - 1
Tool Makers Microscope - 1
Dial Gauge Calibration
15ME752 : COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS
LABORATORY
L T P C
0 0 4 2
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To provide in depth knowledge in finite element simulations using commercially available softwares
like ANSYS®, SOLIDWORKS
®.
To offer understanding of one dimensional bar, beam, truss analysis; two Dimensional plate problems
including plane stress, plane strain and axi-symmetry with various types of elements using FEA
software.
To get exposed to 3D analysis, heat transfer analysis and modal analysis using FEA softwares.
To apply MATLAB®/SIMULINK for the model and simulation of simple mechanical problems like
beam, hydraulics, Cam/follower.
To design and analyse any Engineering Component using FEA softwares.
Review Topics: Deformable bodies, Finite Element Method (FEM), Exact Solution, and Approximate Solution.
73
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course the students will be able to:
Understand the basic pre-processor, solver and post-processor capabilities of FEA softwares like
ANSYS®, SOLIDWORKS
®.
Understand the basic principle of Finite Element Simulations in 1D structural and heat transfer
application.
Solve structural and non-structural problem using ANSYS® FEA software.
Model and simulate structural problems using MATLAB® /SIMULINK.
Equip them to effectively employ finite element Simulations using softwares in order to simulate and
launch a new engineering component to the market.
A ANALYSIS (Simple Treatment only. FEA solution has to be correlated
with analytical solutions.) 37
Stress Analysis of Plane Truss.
Stress Analysis of Spatial Truss.
Stress Analysis of beams (Cantilever, Simply supported, fixed ends) subjected to point loads,
UDL, UVL.
Stress Analysis of Pipes.
Stress analysis of a plate with a circular hole.
Stress analysis of rectangular L bracket.
Stress analysis of an axi-symmetric component.
Stress analysis of a 3D structure.
Modal analysis of beams.
Thermal stress analysis of a bar.
One Dimension Heat Transfer analysis.
Conductive Heat Transfer analysis of a 2D furnace.
B SIMULATION 8
Mathematical modelling of Beams using MATLAB®/SIMULINK/Mathcad.
Simulation of Hydraulic / Pneumatic cylinder using MATLAB® /SIMULINK/ Mathcad.
Modelling and Simulation of free vibration using MATLAB®/SIMULINK/ Mathcad.
Simulation of cam and follower mechanism using MATLAB®/SIMULINK/ Mathcad.
ANSYS Term Paper
Browse the extensive MIT, IIT, NPTEL Open Courseware’s, ANSYS Newsletters, FEA Case Studies,
Technical Journals etc., to read the FE Modeling & Simulation results produced by the leading organization for
solving real scientific problems. In addition, access the application notes written by the scientists/authors and
learn new methods in the field of FE Modeling &Simulation and prepare a Power Point Presentation. Your
term paper should emphasize on
Analysis Objectives
Analysis Assumptions
FEModel
FEAnalysis Results
Outcome of the FEAnalysis
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Paleti Srinivas, Krishna Chaitanya Saambana and Rajesh Kumar Datti, “Finite Element Analysis
using ANSYS®11.0”, PHI, 2nd Edition, 2012.
2. Shailendra Jain, “Modelling and Simulation Using MATLAB Simulink”, Wiley, 2011.
HELPFUL REFERENCES:
1. ANSYS Verification Manual.
74
2. Alberta University ANSYS Tutorial.
3. Cornell University ANSYS Tutorial.
4. Carnegie Mellon University ANSYS Tutorial.
5. Matlab Help Desk.
6. Tutorials by Ohio Computer Aided Engineering.
7. University of South Alabama – Tutorial.
8. University of Minnesota ANSYS Tutorials.
9. University of Texas Arlington – Examples.
10.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://www.ansys.com.
2. http://www.mathworks.com.
15ME753 : COMPREHENSIVE SKILL DEVELOPMENT** L T P C
0 0 2 1
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
The objective of comprehension is to provide opportunity for the student to apply the knowledge
acquired during the earlier semesters to real life problems which he / she may have to face in future
as an engineer.
While learning as how to solve the real life problems, student will receive guidance from the faculty
and also review various courses learnt earlier.
Further this comprehension is to achieve an understanding of the fundamentals of contemporary
manufacturing systems including materials, manufacturing process, product and process control,
computer integrated manufacture and quality.
The students work in groups and solve a variety of problems given to them.
The problems given to the students should be of real like industrial problems selected by a group of
faculty members of the concerned department.
A minimum of three small problems have to be solved by each group of students.
The evaluation is based on continuous assessment by a group of Faculty Members constituted by the
professor in-charge of the course.
There will be three aptitude tests covering syllabus, general aptitude with GATE standard questions.
** Internal Assessment only
15ME851 : PROJECT WORK L T P C
0 0 12 6
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
The objective of the project work is to enable the students in convenient groups of not more than 4
members on a project involving theoretical and experimental studies related to the branch of study.
The aim of the project work is to deepen comprehension of principles by applying them to a new
problem which may be the design and manufacture of a device, a research investigation, a computer or
management project or a design problem.
EVALUATION METHODOLOGY:
Every project work shall have a guide who is the member of the faculty of the institution.
Six periods per week shall be allotted in the time table and this time shall be utilized by the students to
receive the directions from the guide, on library reading, laboratory work, computer analysis or field work
as assigned by the guide and also to present in periodical seminars on the progress made in the project.
The progress of the project is evaluated based on a minimum of three reviews.
The review committee may be constituted by the Head of the Department.
75
Each student shall finally produce a comprehensive report covering background information, literature
survey, problem statement, project work details and conclusion.
This final report shall be typewritten form as specified in the guidelines.
The continuous assessment shall be made as per MEPCO R2015.
CORE ELECTIVES
15MEC01 : ADVANCES IN I.C. ENGINES
L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To provide an advanced level of understanding of Spark Ignition, Compression Ignition Engines and
alternate fuels.
To update the knowledge in engine exhaust emission formation and control.
To enable the students to understand the recent developments in IC Engines.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course the students will
Be able to understand the concepts of Spark Ignition, Compression Ignition Engines and alternate
fuels in an advanced level.
Be able to update their knowledge in engine exhaust emission control.
Be able to understand the recent developments in IC Engines.
COURSE PREREQUISITE:
Injection systems, Basics of Automobile Engineering, Otto cycle, Diesel cycle, Carburettor.
Basics of Thermal Engineering related to I.C. Engines.
UNIT I SPARK IGNITION ENGINES 9
Air-fuel ratio requirements, Design of carburettor –fuel jet size and venture size, Stages of combustion-normal
and abnormal combustion, Flame velocity, Factors affecting knock, Combustion chambers, Introduction to
thermodynamic analysis of SI Engine combustion process, Lean burn combustion. Heat release correlations.
UNIT II COMPRESSION IGNITION ENGINES 9
Stages of combustion-normal and abnormal combustion – Factors affecting knock, Direct and Indirect
injection systems, air motion, swirl measurement. Combustion chambers, Turbo charging, Introduction
to Thermodynamic Analysis of CI Engine Combustion process, heat release correlations.
UNIT III ENGINE EXHAUST EMISSION CONTROL 9
Formation of NOX , HC/CO mechanism , Smoke and Particulate emissions, Green House Effect ,
Methods of controlling emissions , Three way catalytic converter and Particulate Trap, Emission (HC,CO, NO
and NOX) measuring equipment, Smoke and Particulate measurement, Indian Driving Cycles and emission
norms. Effect of emissions on Environment and human beings, Noise measurement and control. National and
International emission standards.
UNIT IV ALTERNATE FUELS 9
Alcohols , Vegetable oils and bio-diesel, DEE, DME, Bio-gas, Natural Gas , Liquefied Petroleum
Gas,Hydrogen , Manufacturing, Storage and Safety Properties , Suitability, Dual fuelling , Engine
Modifications, Performance , Combustion and Emission Characteristics of SI and CI Engines using these
76
alternate fuels.
UNIT V RECENT TRENDS 9
Homogeneous Charge Compression Ignition Engine, Lean Burn Engine, Stratified Charge Engine,
Surface Ignition Engine, Four Valve and Overhead cam Engines, Multi-valving, Tuned manifolding, camless
valve gearing, variable valve timing Electronic Engine Management, Common Rail Direct Injection Diesel
Engine, Gasoline Direct Injection Engine, Data Acquisition System –pressure pick up, charge amplifier PC for
Combustion and Heat release analysis in Engines.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Heinz Heisler, “Advanced Engine Technology”, SAE International Publications, USA, 1998.
2. Ganesan V, “Internal Combustion Engines”, Tata McGraw-Hill, 4th Edition, 2012.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. John B Heywood, “Internal Combustion Engine Fundamentals”, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2011.
2. Patterson D.J. and Henein N.A, “Emissions from combustion engines and their control,” Ann Arbor
Science publishers Inc, USA, 1978.
3. Gupta H.N, “Fundamentals of Internal Combustion Engines”, Prentice Hall of India, 2ndEdition, 2013.
4. Ultrich Adler, “Automotive Electric / Electronic Systems”, Published by Robert Bosh GmbH, 1995.
5. Richard Stone, “Introduction to Internal Combustion Engines”, Palgrave Macmillan Limited, 2012.
15MEC02 : ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE AND ROBOTICS L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To impart knowledge on
To provide extensive knowledge in artificial intelligence and its applications in various fields.
To give understanding of Neural Networks and Fuzzy systems.
To give exposure to robotic programming techniques.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course students will be able to
This course would make familiar of the basic concepts in Artificial Intelligence, its development and
applications.
Course would be helpful to understand the basic principle behind Neural Networks and Fuzzy
systems.
Students would be trained to find solutions for translational and rotational transformations of a robot.
Course would equip the students to effectively employ robotic programming skills for diverse
applications.
COURSE PREREQUISITE:
Applied Hydraulics and Pneumatics.
Mechatronics.
Operations Research and Optimization Techniques.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE 9
Representation in AI, Properties of internal representation- Predicate calculus- Predicates & arguments-
77
Connectives, variables & quantification- Inference Indexing- Pointers & alternative notations- The Isa
Hierarchy- Slot-assertion notation- Frame notation.
UNIT II NEURAL NETWORKS AND FUZZY SYSTEMS 9
Neural and fuzzy machine Intelligence- Fuzziness as multi - valence- Dynamical Systems approach to
machine intelligence- The brain as a dynamical system- Neural and fuzzy systems as function estimators-
Neural networks as trainable dynamical system.
UNIT III BASICS & COMPONENTS OF ROBOT 9
Major components of a Robot – Basic Links & joints –Control of actuators in Robots – Robot control
architecture – closed Loop control –effect of friction and gravity – Frequency domain – Robot Joint Control –
Adaptive control stepper Motors – Brushless DC motors – Direct drive actuators, Hydraulic and pneumatic &
actuators – Servo systems.
UNIT IV TRANSFORMATIONS AND KINEMATICS 9
Translational and rotational transformations – Co-ordinate reference framer –Homogeneous transformations –
Forward solution – Inverse solution.
UNIT V ROBOT PROGRAMMING & ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE 9
Robot programming languages – characteristics of languages – Position specification–Motion specification.
Robot program synthesis– Programming solution using VAL Robot programming Language, Artificial
Intelligence – search strategies, Heuristic search, Rule based problem solving, Knowledge representation.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Klafter R.D., Chemieleskio, T.A. & Negin, M., “Robotics Engineering an Integrated Approach”,
Prentice Hall, 2013.
2. Eugene C., Drew M.D., “Introduction to Artificial Intelligence”, Addison-Wesley, 1985.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Fu K.S., Gonzalez R.C. and Lee C.S.G., “Robotics Control, Sensing, Vision and Intelligence”,
Prentice Hall, 2004.
2. Bekey G., Autonomous Robots, MIT Press, 2005.
3. Craig, J.J., “Introduction to Robotics” Addison Wesley Publishers, 2005.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://www.nptel.iitm.ac.in/courses.php
2. http://www.ebookbrowsee.net/np/nptel-lecture-notes
15MEC03 : AUTOMOBILE ENGINEERING L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To understand the various components of automobile and their working principles.
To have the practice for assembling and dismantling of engine parts and transmission system.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
After studying this course students will be able to:
78
Identify and distinguish different systems and components in an automobile, repair, troubleshoot and
maintain an automobile.
Recognize the role of forces, pressure and friction in vehicles, and their operations.
Understand the engine auxiliary systems such as fuel injection system, electrical system and ignition
system.
Explain the working principles of different types of transmission system and suspension systems.
Design and make an automotive device that addresses technological issues such as Hybrid, electric
and alternative fuels.
COURSE PREREQUISITE:
Basics of I.C. Engines
Design of Machine Elements.
Strength of Materials.
UNIT I VEHICLE STRUCTURE AND ENGINES 9
Types of Automobiles - Vehicle Construction – Chassis – Frame and Body –aerodynamics. Classification,
types and components of Engine –their forms, functions and materials - cooling and lubrication systems –
Emission Norms/Standards in India, Euro norms, Engine emission Control by 3–Way Catalytic Converter.
UNIT II ENGINE AUXILIARY SYSTEMS 9
Working principle of Carburettor and diesel pump– Types – Electronic fuel injection system for petrol and
diesel engines – supercharging and turbo charging – Ignition system – Firing order, Battery, Magneto coil and
Electronic type – Ignition timing- Electronic Engine Management System.
UNIT III TRANSMISSION SYSTEMS 9
Clutch: Need – Dry and wet type – Single plate clutch – Diaphragm clutch –Fluid coupling.
Gearbox: Need, constant mesh, and synchromesh gearbox - Torque converters, gear selector & shifting
mechanisms.
Power Transmission: Propeller shaft – Universal joint - Slip joint – Types of drives – Hotchkiss drive – Torque
tube drive – Differential mechanism – Front and rear axle types –Four wheel drive.
UNIT IV STEERING, BRAKES AND SUSPENSION SYSTEMS 11
Wheels and Tyres – Wheel Alignment Parameters - Steering Geometry and Types of steering gear box–
Power Steering – Types of Front Axle – Suspension systems – Braking Systems – Forces onvehicles, tyre
grip, load transfer, braking distribution between axles, stopping distance, Types of Brakes – Diagonal Braking
System – Antilock Braking System.
UNIT V ALTERNATE FUELS AND ANCILLARY SYSTEMS 7
Use of Natural Gas, LPG, Biodiesel, Gasohol and Hydrogen in Automobiles - Electric and Hybrid Vehicles,
Fuel Cells.Head lamp – reflectors – Gauges – fuel, temperature & oil, wipers, Automobile air conditioning,
Safety – Commercial vehicles and race bikes and cars.
Note: Practical Training in dismantling and assembling of Engine parts and Transmission
Systems should be given to the students.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Kirpal Singh, “Automobile EngineeringVol 1 & 2”, Standard Publishers, 13th Edition, 2011, New
Delhi.
2. Jain,K.K., and Asthana.R.B, “Automobile Engineering” Tata McGraw Hill Publishers, New Delhi,
79
2006.
3. Rajput.R.K, “A Textbook of Automobile Engineering”, Lakshmi Publishers, 2nd Edition, 2014.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Newton, Steeds and Garet, “The Motor Vehicle”, Society of Automotive Engineers,13thRev. Edition,
2001.
2. Joseph Heitner, “Automotive Mechanics”, East-West Press, 2ndEdition, 2004.
3. Martin W. Stockel and Martin T Stockel, “Auto Fundamentals”, Goodheart-Willcox Co;
11thEdition,2014.
4. Heinz Heisler, “Advanced Engine Technology”, SAE International Publications USA, 2003.
5. Ganesan V. “Internal Combustion Engines”, Tata Mcgraw-Hill,4thEdition, 2012.
6. V.A.W. Hillier , “Hillier's Fundamentals of Motor Vehicle Technology”, Nelson Thornes ,
6thEdition,2012
7. Srinivasan, S., “Automotive Mechanics”, Tata-McGraw Hill Publishers, 2nd Edition, Fourth reprint,
2006.
15MEC04 : COMPOSITE MATERIALS
L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To understand the fundamentals, types and applications of composite materials and its mechanical
behavior.
To develop the knowledge in nano composites and its processing techniques.
To study composite mechanics and have the knowledge in analysis of composite materials using
FEM and optimization techniques.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Students who successfully complete the course will demonstrate the following outcomes
An ability to identify the properties of various matrix composites.
Manufacturing techniques for various composites.
Basic understanding of composite mechanics for laminates.
An exposure to recent developments in nano composites, including metal polymer and ceramic
matrix composites.
An ability to use the ideas developed in the design and analysis of composites using FEM and
optimisation techniques.
COURSE PREREQUISITE:
Basics of Isotropic, orthotropic natures of materials.
Natural fibers, Synthetic fibers.
Polymers, ceramics.
Optimization, FEM.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Definition – Types - Need – General characteristics - Applications. Fibers – Glass - Carbon. Matrices – Metal,
ceramics, polymer, Graphite – reinforcements - Short fiber composites - Industrial applications.
UNIT II MANUFACTURING OF COMPOSITES 9
80
Metal Matrix Composites (MMC), Ceramic Matrix Composites (CMC), Polymer Matrix Composites (PMC),
hybrid composites - sandwich composites - characterisation, advantages, applications - manufacturing
processes for metal, ceramic and polymer matrix composites - Manufacturing defects & inspection - traditional
and novel approaches.
UNIT III MECHANICS OF COMPOSITES 9
Basic concepts, stiffness, strength, thermal and moisture expansion - Laminate theory – macro mechanical
behavior of a ply, out-of-plane effects - Generalized Hooke’s Law - Reduction to Homogeneous Orthotropic
Lamina – Isotropic limit case, Orthotropic Stiffness matrix (Qij), Commercial material properties - Rule of
Mixtures - Orthotropic Lamina – Transformation Matrix - Transformed Stiffness.
UNIT IV NANO COMPOSITES 9
Introduction - types - properties - preparation techniques and their new electrical and magnetic properties -
nanopolymers – super hard materials - Fractal based glass-metal - core-shell structure - di block copolymer
based nanocomposites – polymer-CNT based composites.
UNIT V RECENT APPLICATIONS 9
Advanced composites - applications in aircraft, defence, heavy machineries; Carbon, CNT, graphene based
applications – other nano tube application. Optimization of composites - Application of FEM for design and
analysis of composites.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Mallick, P.K. and Newman, S., “Composite Materials Technology: Processes and Properties”,
HanserVerlag Publisher, 1990.
2. Koch C, “Nanostructured materials: Processing, properties and applications’, William Andrew
Publication, 2008.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. John C. Halpin “Primer on composite materials analysis”, Techomic Publishing Co., 1992.
2. Brent Strong. A “Fundamentals of Composites manufacturing: materials, methods, and applications”,
Society of Manufacturing Engineers, 2007.
3. Jack R. Vinson and R. L. Sierakowski, “The Behavior of Structures composed of composite
materials”, Kluwer, 2008.
EXTENSIVE READING
1. http://www.eng.buffalo.edu/Courses/mae482
2. http://www.aem.umn.edu/courses/aem4511/
15MEC05 : COMPUTATIONAL FLUID DYNAMICS L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To introduce Governing Equations of viscous fluid flows.
To introduce numerical modeling and its role in the field of fluid flow and heat transfer.
To enable the students to understand numerical modeling and its role in the field of fluid flow and
heat transfer.
81
To create confidence to solve complex problems in the field of fluid flow and heat transfer by using
high speed computers.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course students will:
Have a fundamental understanding of Governing Equations of viscous fluid flows.
Be able to understand the finite difference method.
Familiarize the concepts of finite volume method for diffusion.
Recognize the significance of finite volume method for convection diffusion.
Acquire knowledge about the concepts of calculation flow field by finite volume method.
COURSE PREREQUISITE:
Thermodynamics.
Fluid Mechanics.
Heat Transfer.
Linear Algebra, Numerical methods and Partial Differential Equations.
Programming in C Language.
UNIT I GOVERNING EQUATIONS AND BOUNDARY CONDITIONS 8
Basics of computational fluid dynamics – Governing equations of fluid dynamics – Continuity, Momentum
and Energy equations – Chemical species transport – Physical boundary conditions – Time-averaged
equations for Turbulent Flow – Turbulent–Kinetic Energy Equations – Mathematical behaviour of PDEs on
CFD - Elliptic, Parabolic and Hyperbolic equations. Numerical Errors, Grid Independence Test. Application to
simple control volumes.
UNIT II FINITE DIFFERENCE METHOD 9
Derivation of finite difference equations – Simple Methods – General Methods for first and second order
accuracy – solution methods for finite difference equations – Elliptic equations – Iterative solution Methods –
Parabolic equations – Explicit and Implicit schemes – Example problems on elliptic and parabolic equations.
UNIT III FINITE VOLUME METHOD FOR DIFFUSION 9
Finite volume formulation for steady state One, Two and Three -dimensional diffusion problems. One
dimensional unsteady heat conduction through Explicit, Crank – Nicolson and fully implicit schemes. Two-
dimensional Transient Problems, difference between the FDM and FVM methods.
UNIT IV FINITE VOLUME METHOD FOR CONVECTION DIFFUSION 10
Steady one-dimensional convection and diffusion – Central, upwind differencing schemes-properties of
discretization schemes – Conservativeness, Boundedness, Transportiveness, Hybrid, Power-law, QUICK
Schemes.
UNIT V CALCULATION FLOW FIELD BY FINITE VOLUME METHOD 9
Representation of the pressure gradient term and continuity equation – Staggered grid – Momentum equations
– Pressure and Velocity corrections – Pressure Correction equation, SIMPLE algorithm and its variants.
Turbulence models, mixing length model, Two equation (k-Є) models – High and low Reynolds number
models Prediction of fluid flow and heat transfer using standard codes.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. T.J. Chung, “Computational Fluid Dynamics”, Cambridge University, Press, 2002.
82
2. John D. Anderson, “Computational Fluid Dynamics”, Tata-McGraw Hill Publisher, 2012.
3. Versteeg, H.K., and Malalasekera, W., “An Introduction to Computational Fluid Dynamics: The finite
volume Method”, Pearson education, New Delhi, 2008.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Patankar, S.V., “Numerical Heat Transfer and Fluid Flow”, Hemisphere Publishing Corporation, 2004.
2. Muralidhar, K., and Sundararajan, T., “Computational Fluid Flow and Heat Transfer”, Narosa
Publishing House, NewDelhi, 2nd Edition, 2011.
3. Ghoshdastidar P.S., “Heat Transfer”, Oxford Unversity Press, 2ndRev.Edition, 2012.
4. Prodip Niyogi, Chakrabarty .S.K., Laha .M.K., “Introduction to Computational Fluid Dynamics”,
Pearson Education, 2005.
5. Anil W. Date, “Introduction to Computational Fluid Dynamics”, Cambridge University Press, 2005.
6. Ghoshdastidar, P.S., “Computer Simulation of flow and heat transfer”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing
Company Ltd., 2003.
15MEC06 : COMPUTER INTEGRATEDMANUFACTURING L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To develop an understanding about the role of computer in manufacturing.
To provide an in-depth understanding of shop floor control and virtual organization and control of
manufacturing processes.
To introduce group technology and concurrent engineering and develop skill in the developing
automated process plans using variant and generative approaches.
Improve communications through documentation and to create a database for manufacturing.
To take up case studies on FMS and CIM systems.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
To introduce a computer aided inspection and manufacturing systems.
To apply the principles of operation of automated shop floor control and manufacturing process.
To reduce manual processing and linking computers to all the manufacturing machines.
To analyze, design, and build manufacturing and automation systems.
Implement group technology concepts in production to facilitate cellular and flexible manufacturing.
While implementing these designs, students will continually hone their interpersonal skills, creative
abilities and understanding of the design process.
Develop automated process plans using variant and generative approaches.
Take appropriate strategy to gradually migrate from conventional manufacturing to FMS and CIM.
COURSE PREREQUISITE:
Traditional Manufacturing Techniques.
Production Planning and Control.
Computer Networking and Communication Techniques.
Geometric Modeling, Optimization Techniques.
UNIT I COMPONENTS OF CIM 9
CIM Concept - Product design - planning, production, and materials control - Geometric Modeling - 2D, 3D
modeling - Computer Networking in Shop Floor Control - LAN, WAN - Computer Communication protocol –
83
OSI Model.
UNIT II GEOMETRIC MODELING AND DESIGN OPTIMIZATION 9
Geometric modeling - 2D Modeling - Entities - line, circle, ellipse, parabola, cubic spline, Bezier and B-spline -
3D Modelling - wireframe, surface, solid modeling - Solid Modeling Techniques - CSG, B-rep - Operations -
boolean, extrude, sweep, revolve - Engineering Analysis - General principles of optimization and concurrent
engineering.
UNIT III GROUP TECHNOLOGY 9
Group Technology - Role of Group Technology in CAD/CAM Integration - Part families - Methods of
developing part families - Classification and coding - Production Flow Analysis - Machine cell design -
Clustering methods - benefits of GT - Applications of G.T.
UNIT IV COMPUTER AIDED PLANNING AND CONTROL SOFTWARE 9
Production Planning and Control - Cost planning and control - Inventory management - Material requirements
planning (MRP) - Lean Manufacturing - Agile manufacturing - logical design of a process planning -
Implementation considerations - Types of software - Trends - Use of simulation software.
UNIT V SHOP FLOOR CONTROL 9
Shop Floor Control System - introduction, functions, order release, order scheduling, order progress -
Operation scheduling - Factory data collection system - Automated data collection system - Computer Process
Monitoring - Paperless factory.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Mikell. P. Groover “Automation, Production Systems, and Computer-Integrated Manufacturing”, 4th
Edition, Prentice-hall of India,2014.
2. Ibrahim Zeid, “CAD/CAM- Theory and practice”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2012.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Mikell. P. Groover and Emory Zimmers Jr., “CAD/CAM”, prentice hall of India Pvt. Ltd., 2003.
2. James A. Regh and Henry W. Kreabber, “Computer Integrated Manufacturing”, 3rd Edition, Pearson
Education, 2004.
3. Radhakrishnan.P,”CAD/CAM/CIM”, - New age international, 2009.
4. Chris McMahon and Jimmie Browne, “CAD CAM Principles, Practice and Manufacturing
Management”, Pearson Education 2nd Edition, 1999.
5. Ranky, Paul G., “Computer Integrated Manufacturing”, prentice hall of India Pvt. Ltd., 2005.
6. Yorem Koren, “Computer Integrated Manufacturing”, McGraw Hill, 2005.
7. Rao P N, “CAD/CAM Principles and Applications”, 3rd Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2012.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://www.nptel.iitm.ac.in/courses.php.
2. http://www.ebookbrowsee.net/np/nptel-lecture-notes.
84
15MEC07 : CRYOGENICS L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To provide an advanced level of understanding of the processes of producing ultra-low temperatures
suitable for liquefaction of gases.
To understand the design and development of systems and components which produce, maintain
and utilize low temperature well below -150°C.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
After studying this course students will be able to
Have an advanced level of understanding of the processes of producing ultra-low temperatures
suitable for liquefaction of gases.
Understand the working principles of Cryogenic refrigeration system.
Design and develop the systems and components which produce, maintain and utilize low
temperature well below -150°C.
Learn the applications of cryogenics.
COURSE PREREQUISITE:
Basics of Semiconductors, Superconductivity, Liquid properties and Safety.
Thermodynamic Laws and Heat Transfer techniques.
Engineering materials and properties.
Energy storage and Thermal insulation.
UNIT I GAS-LIQUEFACTION SYSTEMS 9
System performance parameters – Ideal system, liquefaction systems – simple Linde Hampson, Claude
systems – Systems for Neon, Hydrogen and Helium.
UNIT II CRYOGENIC REFRIGERATION SYSTEM 9
Claude refrigerator – Philips refrigerator, Solvay, Gifford – MC Mahon refrigerators – magnetic cooling –
magnetic refrigerator systems.
UNIT III SEPERATION AND PURIFICATION SYSTEMS 9
Theoretical plate calculations of Air columns – air separation systems – Linde double column systems –
Argon, Neon, Hydrogen and Helium separation systems – Gas purification methods.
UNIT IV MEASUREMENT SYSTEMS 9
Temperature, pressure, flow rate, fluid quality, liquid level measurement systems.
UNIT V STORAGE AND APPLICATIONS 9
Cryogenic fluid storage systems – vacuum technology – applications of cryogenics.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Randall F. Barron. “Cryogenic Systems”, Oxford University Press, 1985.
2. Klaus D. Timmerhaus and Thomas M. Flynn., ‘Cryogenic Process Engineering’, Plenum Press, New
York, 1989.
85
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Peter Kittel. “Advances in Cryogenic Engineering”, Plenum Press, 1998.
2. Guy K White. “Experimental Techniques in Low Temperature Physics”, Clarendon Press, Oxford,
1987.
15MEC08 : DESIGN OF THERMAL SYSTEMS L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To build up necessary background for the design of various types of thermal systems.
To learn the sizing of heat exchangers, thermal and mechanical stress analysis for various heat
exchange applications.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course students will
Have a fundamental understanding of engineering design.
Be able to get the necessary background for the modeling of thermal systems.
Understand the design of shell and tube type heat exchangers.
Familiarize thermal and mechanical stress analysis for various heat exchange applications.
Recognize the significance of safety measures in equipment design.
Acquire knowledge about the principles of condensers and cooling towers.
COURSE PREREQUISITE:
Basic knowledge in Engineering Design.
Thermal Engineering.
Heat and Mass Transfer.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Engineering design, design as part of engineering undertaking; Basic considerations in design: formulation of
the design problem, conceptual design, steps in the design process, computer aided design, Economic
analysis
UNIT II MODELING OF THERMAL SYSTEMS 9
Types of models, mathematical modeling, curve fitting, linear algebraic systems, numerical model for a
system, system simulation, methods for numerical simulation. Acceptable design of thermal systems Initial
design, design strategies, design of systems from different application areas, additional considerations for
large practical systems.
UNIT III MECHANICAL DESIGN OF SHELL AND TUBE TYPE HEAT
EXCHANGERS
9
Thickness calculations, Tube sheet design using TEMA formula, Concept of equivalent plate for carrying out
perforated analysis, General design of evaporator and condenser, flow induced vibration risks including
acoustic issue and remedies, tube to tube sheet joint design, buckling of tubes, thermal stresses.
UNIT IV COMPACT AND PLATE HEAT EXCHANGERS 9
Types - Merits and Demerits – Design of Compact heat exchangers, plate heat exchangers, Radiative
heat exchangers, performance influencing parameters, limitations. Performance enhancement of heat
exchanger.
UNIT V CONDENSORS AND COOLING TOWERS 9
Design of surface and evaporative condensers – cooling tower – performance characteristics, process
hazards, Safety measures in equipment design.
86
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. T.Taborek, G.F.Hewitt and N.Afgan, “Heat Exchangers, Theory and practice”, McGraw-Hill Book Co,
1983.
2. Walkers, “Industrial Heat Exchangers – A Basic Guide”, Mc Graw Hill Book Co, 1982.
3. W. F. Stoecker, design of thermal systems, McGraw-Hill Education, 2011.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Nicholas Cheremistoff, “Cooling Tower”, Ann Arbor Science Pub, 1981.
2. Arthur, P. Frass, “Heat Exchanger Design”, John Wiley and Sons 2nd Edition, 1989.
3. J.P.Gupta, “Fundamentals of Heat exchanger and pressure vessels technology”, Hemisphere
publishing corporation, springer –Verlag (outside NA), 1986.
4. Donald Q. Kern and Alban D. Karus, “Extended surface heat transfer”, Mc Graw Hill Book Co, 1972.
5. E.A.D.Sanders, “Heat Exchangers, Selection Design and Construction”, Layman Scientific and
Technical co Published with John Wiley & Sons, 1988.
15MEC09 : DESIGN OF JIGS, FIXTURES AND PRESS TOOLS
L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To understand the functions and design principles of Jigs, fixtures and press tools.
To design jig or fixture for any component in manufacturing applications.
To gain proficiency in the development of different types of cutting and forming dies.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
This course will help to know the need for jigs, fixtures and press tools and their requirement in mass
production.
To understand the design principles of jigs, fixtures and press tools.
To find innovate solutions for designing of cutting dies and to learn to use standard practices and
standard data from design hand books.
To be able to design bending and forming dies for different components.
To keep abreast with the recent development in tool engineering.
COURSE PREREQUISITE:
Manufacturing Technology I & Manufacturing Technology Laboratory–I
Manufacturing Technology II & Manufacturing Technology Laboratory–II
UNIT I LOCATING AND CLAMPING PRINCIPLES 7
Tool design objectives - Advantages of Jigs and fixtures - Important Considerations while designing Jigs and
Fixtures-Materials used in Jigs and fixtures
Principles of location – Locating methods and devices – Redundant Location –Principles of clamping –
Clamping elements with mechanical, pneumatic and hydraulic actuation.
UNIT II JIGS 8
Drill bushings – Materials for bushings-types of bushing-Renewable, Slip, Threaded, plate bushings
Types of Jigs – post, turnover, channel, latch, box, pot, angular post jigs – Indexing jigs-Linear indexing, Rotary
indexing devices. Design and development of Jigs for given components.
87
UNIT III FIXTURES 8
Milling Fixtures-types-special vice jaws, facing, slotting fixtures, Turning Fixtures-chucks, collets, mandrels,
Boring, broaching and grinding fixtures – Assembly, Inspection and Welding fixtures – Modular fixtures- Quick
change fixtures. Design and development of fixtures for given component.
UNIT IV PRESS WORKING TERMINOLOGIES AND ELEMENTS OF CUTTING
DIES
10
Press Working Terminologies - operations – Types of presses – press accessories –Computation of press
capacity – Strip layout – Material Utilization – Shearing action –Clearances – Press Work Materials – Centre of
pressure.
Functions of various elements of dies – Die Block – Punch holder, Die set, guide plates – Stops – Strippers –
Pilots – Selection of Standard parts – Design and development of blanking, piercing, compound and
progressive dies.
UNIT V BENDING FORMING AND DRAWING DIES 12
Difference between bending, forming and drawing – Blank development for the above operations – Types of
bending dies – Press capacity – spring back – knockouts – pressure pads – ejectors – variables affecting metal
flow in drawing operations – draw die inserts –ironing – Design and development of bending, forming, drawing
and combination dies- single and double action dies.
Bulging, Swaging, Embossing, coining, curling, hole flanging, shaving and sizing, assembly, fine Blanking dies
– recent trends in tool design- computer assisted metal forming- tooling for numerically controlled machines–
Single minute exchange of dies – Poka Yoke.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Joshi, P.H. “Jigs and Fixtures”, Second Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2013.
2. Donaldson, Lecain and Goold. “Tool Design”, Tata McGraw Hill, third edition, 2000.
3. Hoffman. “Jigs and Fixture Design”, Thomson Delmar Learning, Singapore, 2004.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. K. Venkataraman, “Design of Jigs Fixtures & Press Tools”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2005.
2. Kempster, “Jigs and Fixture Design”, Hoddes and Stoughton, Third Edition 1974.
3. Joshi, P.H. “Press Tools – Design and Construction”, Wheels publishing, 1996.
4. ASTME Fundamentals of Tool Design, Prentice Hall of India.
5. Design Data Hand Book, PSG College of Technology, Coimbatore.
EXTENSIVE READING:
1. Albert Atkins Dowd & Frank W. Curtis. “Tool Engineering: Jigs and Fixtures,” McGraw-Hill, 2007.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://www.nptel.iitk.ac.in/courses/Webcourse-contents/.../pdf/LM-33.pdf
2. http://www.learningace.com/.../lecture-33-jigs-and-fixtures-for-machine-shops
88
15MEC10 : ENTERPRISE RESOURCE PLANNING L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To enable the students to build up an integrated real-time view of core business processes.
To understand the status of business commitments.
To develop business management software - usually a suite of integrated applications.
To create an integrated software system to manage the business and automate back office functions.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
To gain knowledge on integrated business system.
To understand the modules of integrated software system.
To develop and create a system towards Information era.
COURSE PREREQUISITE:
Basics of Business Processes, Business Functions.
Software fundamentals -Database Management System.
Product Development, Production Planning and Control, Operations Management.
UNIT I CONCEPTS OF ERP 9
Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP); Definition of ERP – History of ERP – Material Requirement Planning
(MRP) – Manufacturing Resource Planning (MRP II) – Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP I and ERP II) –
Overview of ERP – Evolution of ERP.
UNIT II BUSINESS SYSTEM AND ERP 9
Evolution of Business system – Objectives of ERP system - Structure of ERP system – Functions of ERP
system – Integrated ERP solutions – ERP sub systems – Key Modules and operations - Advantages of ERP
packages.
UNIT III MODULES OF ERP 9
Modules of ERP – Accounting and Finance, Sales and Distribution, Production & Materials Management –
Human Resource management – Plant and Maintenance, Quality Management.
UNIT IV IMPLEMENTATION OF ERP 9
Implementation of ERP – Phases, Strategies and Approaches – Implementation Methodologies – Role of
vendors, consultants and user in ERP implementation – Critical Success factor – Return on investment.
UNIT V ERP TECHNOLOGY 9
Technologies related to ERP – Management information system (MIS), Decision Support System (DSS) –
Executive Information System (EIS) – Business Process Reengineering (BPR) – Supply Chain Management
(SCM) – Customer Relationship Management (CRM) – E – commerce.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Dimpi Srivastava, Aarti Batra,“ERP systems”, I.K. International Publishing House, New Delhi, 2010.
2. Alexis Leon, “Enterprise Resource Planning”, Tata McGraw Hill, Publishing Company Limited, New
Delhi,2nd Edition, 2008.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
89
1. Daniel E. O’Leary, “Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) Systems”, Cambridge University Press,
2000.
2. Mary Summer, “Enterprise Resource Planning”,Pearson Education, 2005.
3. Sadagopan. S “ERP – A managerial Perspective”, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Limited,
New Delhi, 1999.
4. Rahul V. Altekar, “Enterprise Resource Planning, Theory and Practice:”, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd, 2004.
5. Vinoth Kumar Garg and Venkitakrishnan, “Enterprise Resource Planning, Concepts and Practice”, PHI
Learning Pvt. Ltd, 2003.
6. Vinoth Kumar Garg and Bharat Vakhana, “Enterprise Resource Planning, Strategy”, Jaisco Publishing
House, 1999.
7. Vinoth Kumar Garg and Venkitakrishnan, “ERPWARE, ERP Implementation Framework”, PHI
Learning Pvt. Ltd, 1999.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://www.inc.com/encyclopedia/enterprise-resource-planning-erp.html
2. http://www.openerp.com/
3. http://www.fcsiba.wikispaces.com/file/view/ERP Course Outline.pptx
4. http://www.me.iitb.ac.in/ subash/erp.pdf
5. http://eprints.mdx.ac.uk/6458/1/JOTIENO-THESIS.pdf
6. http://www.campus.murraystate.edu/academic/.../Introduction%20to%20ERP.ppt
15MEC11 : ENTREPRENEURSHIP DEVELOPMENT L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To enable the students to realize the scope of an entrepreneur.
To enable the students to learn about various financial assistance rendered by the institutions.
To enable students to compare different forms of ownership structures.
To have knowledge about method of taxation and tax benefits.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course the students will be able
To understand the profile of the entrepreneur.
To assess themselves for the possibility of becoming successful entrepreneur.
To identify suitable business opportunities for their enterprise based on their capacity to invest in and
manage a business venture.
To prepare a project report for obtaining financial aid for their venture.
To identify various long term and short term sources of finance and support institutions for their
proposed company.
To carryout project activity planning and network analysis for their project.
COURSE PREREQUISITE:
Principles of Management
Financial Management
UNIT I ENTREPRENEURSHIP 9
Entrepreneur – types of entrepreneurs – difference between entrepreneur and Intrapreneur – entrepreneurship
in economic growth, factors affecting entrepreneurial growth.
90
UNIT II MOTIVATION 9
Majormotivesinfluencing an entrepreneur – achievement motivation training, Self rating, Ring toss
game,Tower building exercise, Boat building exercise- Thematic apperception test – stress management,
Entrepreneurship development programs – need, objectives- National and State level Institutes offering
Entrepreneurship development programs.
UNIT III BUSINESS 9
Small enterprises – definition, classification – characteristics, ownership structures –project formulation –
steps involved in setting up a business – identifying, selecting a good business opportunity, market survey and
research, techno economic feasibility assessment – preparation of preliminary project reports – project
appraisal – sources of information – classification of needs and agencies.
UNIT IV FINANCING AND ACCOUNTING 9
Need – sources of finance, term loans, capital structure, financial institution, management of working capital,
costing, break even analysis, network analysis techniques of PERT/CPM – taxation – income tax, excise duty
– sales tax.
UNIT V SUPPORT TO ENTREPRENEURS 9
Sickness in small business – concept, magnitude, causes and consequences, Corrective measures –
government policy for small scale enterprises – growth Strategies in small industry – expansion,
diversification, joint venture, merger and sub-contracting.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOK:
1. S.S.Khanka “Entrepreneurial Development”, S.Chand & Company. Ltd. Ram Nagar New Delhi,
4thedition, 2012.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Hisrich.R.D, Peters M P and Dean A.Shepherd, “Entrepreneurship”, 8th Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill,
2009.
2. C.B.Gupta &N.P.Srinivasan, “Entrepreneurial Development”, Sultan Chand & Sons New Delhi,
Revised edition, 2010.
3. Mathew J Manimala,“Entrepreneurship Theory at the Crossroads: Paradigms and Praxis”, Dreamtech
Press, 2nd edition, 2006.
4. Rabindra N. Kanungo, “Entrepreneurship and innovation”, Sage Publications, New Delhi, 1998.
5. P.C Jain,EDII, “Hand Book for New Entrepreneurs”, Oxford University Press, 2012.
6. Kuratko & Hodgetts, “Entrepreneurship – Theory, Process and Practice”, Cengage Learning,8th
edition, 2008.
15MEC12 : FRACTURE MECHANICS L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
The student will learn to:
Define the near field equations to determine the stress-strain and load-displacement fields around a
crack tip for linear elastic cases.
Identify and formulate the stress intensity factor (k) for typical crack configurations.
Identify and formulate the strain energy release rate (G).
91
Identify and formulate J-integral and the stress and strain fields around a crack tip for non-linear and
elasto plastic materials.
Predict the fatigue life of structures using fracture mechanics approaches.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Acquire fundamental understanding of the fracture of solid materials.
Develop detailed understanding of fracture mechanics, creep and fatigue.
Acquire basic understanding of the techniques used to perform failure analysis.
Learn about large variety of fracture mechanisms and fracture modes associated with failure.
Become intimately familiar with macro fractographic and micro fractographic analysis of failures.
Apply understanding to relevant case studies.
COURSE PREREQUISITE:
Basics of Ductile Material, Brittle Material.
Rigid body Mechanics, Deformable body Mechanics.
Elasticity, Dynamics, Failure theory.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Ductile fracture - brittle fracture – cleavage – fractography - ductile-brittle transition - fracture mechanics
approach to design - energy criterion - stress intensity approach - time dependent crack growth and damage.
UNIT II LINEAR ELASTIC FRACTURE MECHANICS 9
Griffith theory - elastic stress field around a crack tip - modes of fracture - stress intensity factor - method of
complex potential for plane elasticity - airy stress function - energy release rate - instability and R-curve -
stress analysis of cracks - stress intensity factor - K-threshold - crack growth instability analysis - crack tip
stress analysis.
UNIT III ELASTIC PLASTIC FRACTURE MECHANICS 9
Irwin’s adjusted stress intensity factor approach - K resistance curve approach - crack tip opening
displacement criterion - crack tip opening angle criterion - K resistance curve approach - J integral -
relationship between J and CTOD.
UNIT IV DYNAMIC AND TIME-DEPENDENT FRACTURE 9
Dynamic fracture - energy concept - crack tip energy flux integral - steady crack growth - path independent
integral - elastic crack growth at constant speed - rapid loading of a stationary crack - rapid crack propagation
- dynamic contour integral - creep crack growth- C Integral - visco elastic fracture mechanics - viscoelastic J
integral.
UNIT V FAILURE ANALYSIS TOOLS 9
Reliability concept and hazard function - life prediction - life extension - application of Poisson - exponential
and Weibull distribution for reliability - bath tub curve - parallel and series system – MTBF – MTTR - FMEA
definition - Design FMEA - Process FMEA - failure cause analysis - modes - ranks of failure modes - fault
tree analysis - industrial case studies/projects on FMEA.
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. C.T.Sun, Z.H.Jin, “Fracture Mechanics”, Elsevier India Pvt.ltd, 2012.
2. Michael F Ashby, “Material Selection in Mechanical Design”, Butterworth – Heinemann, 3rd Edition,
2005.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Bahram Farahmand, “Fracture Mechanics of Metals, Composites, Welds, and Bolted Joints:
Application of LEFM, EPFM, AND FMDM Theory”, Springer, 2000.
2. T.L. Anderson, “Fracture Mechanics – Fundamentals and Applications”, 3rd Edition, CRC Press LLC,
92
2005.
3. Tribikram Kundu, “Fundamentals of Fracture Mechanics”, CRC Press, Boca Raton, 2008.
4. Shigley and Mische, “Mechanical Engineering Design”, McGraw Hill Inc, New York, 9th Edition, 2010.
5. Dietmar Gross and Thomas Seelig, “Fracture Mechanics with an Introduction to Micromechanics”,
Springer - Netherlands, 2006.
15MEC13 : GAS DYNAMICS AND JET PROPULSION L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To understand the basic difference between incompressible and compressible flow.
To understand the phenomenon of shock waves and its effect on flow.
To gain some basic knowledge about jet propulsion and Rocket Propulsion.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course students will:
Understand the principles of compressible and isentropic flow..
Understand the principle of flow through ducts.
Apply the principles of normal and oblique shocks.
Understand and analyze the phenomenon of jet propulsion.
Understand and analyze the phenomenon of Rocket Propulsion.
COURSE PREREQUISITE
Physics.
Mathematics.
Fluid Mechanics.
Thermodynamics.
UNIT I BASIC CONCEPTS AND ISENTROPIC FLOWS 6
Energy and momentum equations of compressible fluid flows – Stagnation states, Mach waves and Mach
cone – Effect of Mach number on compressibility – Isentropic flow through variable ducts – Nozzles and
Diffusers – Use of Gas tables.
UNIT II FLOW THROUGH DUCTS 9
Flows through constant area ducts with heat transfer (Rayleigh flow) and Friction (Fanno flow) – variation of
flow properties – Use of tables and charts – Generalised gas dynamics.
UNIT III NORMAL AND OBLIQUE SHOCKS 10
Governing equations – Variation of flow parameters across the normal and oblique shocks – Prandtl – Meyer
relations – Use of table and charts – Applications.
UNIT IV JET PROPULSION 10
Theory of jet propulsion – Thrust equation – Thrust power and propulsive efficiency – Operation, principle,
cycle analysis and use of stagnation state- performance of ram jet, turbojet, turbofan and turbo prop engines.
UNIT V SPACE PROPULSION 10
Types of rocket engines – Propellants-feeding systems – Ignition and combustion – Theory of rocket
propulsion – effective jet velocity, specific impulse- Performance study – Flow through rocket nozzles – mass
ratio and propellant mass fraction- Staging – Terminal and characteristic velocity – Vertical flight of a rocket:
powered flight and coasting flight – Rocket applications.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
93
1. Anderson, J.D., “Modern Compressible flow”, McGraw Hill, 3rd Edition 2003
2. Yahya S.M. “Fundamentals of Compressible Flow”, New Age International (P) Limited New Delhi, 4th
Edition 2012.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Hill P. and Peterson C., “Mechanics and Thermodynamics of Propulsion”, Addison – Wesley
Publishing company, 2nd edition 2011.
2. Zucrow N.J., “Aircraft and Missile Propulsion”, vol.1 & II, John Wiley, 1975.
3. Zucrow N.J., “Principles of Jet Propulsion and Gas Turbines”, John Wiley, New York, 1970.
4. Sutton G.P., “Rocket Propulsion Elements”, John, wiley, 7th edition, 2010 New York.
5. Shapiro A.H., “Dynamics and Thermodynamics of Compressible fluid Flow”, John wiley, 1953, New
York.
6. Ganesan V., Gas Turbines, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co., New Delhi, 3rd Edition 2010.
7. Somasundaram PR.S.L, “Gas Dynamics and Jet Propulsions”, New Age International Publishers,
1996.
8. Babu V., “Fundamentals of Gas Dynamics”, ANE Books India, 2008.
WEB REFERENCES:
NPTEL Video lectures
15MEC14 : INDUSTRIAL TRIBOLOGY L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To understand the various modes of wear: adhesive, delamination, fretting, abrasive, erosive,
corrosive, oxidational (mild and severe), melt, and the wear-mechanism maps.
To study about surface topography, physico-chemical aspects of solid surfaces, and surface
interactions.
To analyze the mechanics of solid elastic and elastoplastic contacts.
To recognize the laws of friction, mechanisms of friction, friction sp-ace, stick slip, and surface
temperature.
To identify types of lubrication: boundary, solid-film, hydrodynamic, and hydrostatic lubrication.
To explore the design of tribological surfaces and how to troubleshoot tribology problems.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course the students will be able to:
Describe surface topography, physico-chemical aspects of solid surfaces, and surface interactions.
Analyse the mechanics of solid elastic and elastoplastic contacts.
Recognize the laws of friction, mechanisms of friction, friction space, stick slip, and surface
temperature.
Identify types of lubrication: boundary, solid-film, hydrodynamic, and hydrostatic lubrication.
Examine applications/case studies: sliding contacts, rolling contacts, bearing design, coating
selection, and lubrication.
Explore the design of tribological surfaces and how to troubleshoot tribology problems.
Survey tribological testing devices and testing design.
COURSE PREREQUISITE:
Surface roughness and its measurement.
Viscous flow.
Corrosion and its prevention.
Low friction materials.
94
UNIT I SURFACES AND FRICTION 9
Topography of engineering surfaces- Contact between surfaces - Sources of sliding friction – Adhesion-
Ploughing- Energy dissipation mechanisms friction characteristics of metals - Friction of non-metals. Friction of
lamellar solids - friction of Ceramic materials and polymers - Rolling friction - Source of rolling friction – Stick
slip motion - Sources of measurement of friction.
UNIT II WEAR 9
Types of wear - Simple theory of Sliding Wear Mechanism of sliding wear of metals - Abrasive wear –
Materials for Adhesive and Abrasive wear situations - Corrosive wear - Surface Fatigue wear situations -
Brittle Fracture - wear - Wear of Ceramics and Polymers - Wear Measurements.
UNIT III LUBRICANTS AND LUBRICATION TYPES 9
Types and properties of Lubricants - Testing methods - Hydrodynamic Lubrication – Elasto-hydrodynamic
lubrication- Boundary Lubrication - Solid Lubrication- Hydrostatic Lubrication.
UNIT IV FILM LUBRICATION THEORY 9
Fluid film in simple shear - Viscous flow between very close parallel plates - Shear stress variation - Reynolds
equation for film Lubrication - High speed unloaded journal bearings - Loaded journal bearings – Reaction
torque on the bearings - Virtual Co-efficient of friction - The Sommerfield diagram.
UNIT V SURFACE ENGINEERING AND MATERIALS FOR BEARINGS 9
Surface modifications - Transformation Hardening, surface fusion - Thermo chemical processes – Surface
coatings - Plating and anodizing - Fusion Processes – Vapour Phase processes - Materials for rolling Element
bearings - Materials for fluid film bearings - Materials for marginally lubricated and dry bearings.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Hutchings M., “Tribology Friction and wear of Engineering Materials”, Edward Arnold, London, 1992.
2. Williams.J.A, “Engineering Tribology”, Cambridge University Press, 2010.
3. A.Harnoy, “Bearing Design in Machinery”, Marcel Dekker Inc., New York, 2003.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Majumdar, “Introduction of Tribology and bearings”, A.H. Wheeler Co, 2010.
2. Ncalc, Newncs, “Tribology Hand Book”, Butterworths, 1975.
3. Dudley D. Fuller, “Theory and practice of Lubrication for Engineers”, John Wiley and Sons, 1984.
4. Cameron A., “Basic Lubrication Theory”, Wiley Eastern Ltd, 1987.
5. Bharath Bhushan & Gupta B.K., “Hand book of Tribology”, Mc Graw Hill Inc., 1997.
6. E.P.Bowden and Tabor.D. “Friction and Lubrication ", Heinemann Educational Books Ltd., 1974.
7. M.M.Khonsari & E.R.Booser, “Applied Tribology”, John Willey & Sons, New York, 2001.
15MEC15 : MAINTENANCE ENGINEERING L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To enable the student to understand the principles, functions and practices adopted in industry for the
successful management of maintenance activities.
To explain the different maintenance categories like Preventive maintenance, condition monitoring
and repair of machine elements.
To illustrate some of the simple instruments used for condition monitoring in industry.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
The students will be able to understand the maintenance activities in industry and can build
95
successful management for maintenance activities.
The students can explain the maintenance strategies and the process of achieving them in various
industry sectors.
The students understand and apply the principles of temperature analysis for machinery condition
monitoring for predictive maintenance.
COURSE PREREQUISITE:
Total Quality Management.
Basic knowledge on functioning of various machineries.
UNIT I PRINCIPLES AND PRACTICES OF MAINTENANCE PLANNING 9
Basic Principles of maintenance planning – Objectives and principles of planned maintenance activity –
Importance and benefits of sound Maintenance systems – Reliability and machine availability – MTBF, MTTR
and MWT – Factors of availability – Maintenance organization – Maintenance economics.
UNIT II MAINTENANCE POLICIES – PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE 9
Maintenance categories – Comparative merits of each category – Preventive maintenance, maintenance
schedules, repair cycle - Principles and methods of lubrication – TPM.
UNIT III CONDITION MONITORING 9
Condition Monitoring – Cost comparison with and without Condition Monitoring – On-load testing and off- load
testing – Methods and instruments for Condition Monitoring – Temperature sensitive tapes – Pistol
thermometers – wear-debris analysis
UNIT IV REPAIR METHODS FOR BASIC MACHINE ELEMENTS 10
Repair methods for beds, slideways, spindles, gears, lead screws and bearings – Failure analysis – Failures
and their development – Logical fault location methods – Sequential fault location.
UNIT V REPAIR METHODS FOR MATERIAL HANDLING EQUIPMENT 8
Repair methods for Material handling equipment - Equipment records –Job order systems -Use of computers
in maintenance.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Sushil Kumar Srivastava, " Maintenance Engineering Principles, Practices & Management”, S.Chand
and Co Ltd., 1st Edition (reprint), 2012.
2. Bhattacharya S.N., "Installation, Servicing and Maintenance", S. Chand and Co., 2nd Edition, 2001.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Garg H.P., "Industrial Maintenance", S. Chand & Co., 1st Edition, 2010.
2. Higgins L.R., "Maintenance Engineering Hand book", McGraw Hill, 8th Edition, 2014.
3. Davies, "Handbook of Condition Monitoring – techniques and Methodology", 1st Edition, Springer
Science & Business Media, 1st Edition, 2012.
4. "Advances in Plant Engineering and Management", Seminar Proceedings - IIPE, 1996.
15MEC16 : MARKETING MANAGEMENT L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To acquire knowledge on
96
Customer needs and market a product successfully and profitably.
Customer behaviour based on geographic and psychological behaviour.
Product Pricing and marketing planning and strategy.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course the students are able to
Have a thorough knowledge about the marketing process.
Understand the needs of the customer.
Have a deep understanding about Product Pricing, Marketing planning and Research.
Understand the need for advertising and a good supply chain.
COURSE PREREQUISITE:
Basic knowledge on Production process and Process activities.
Cost analysis and Cost control.
UNIT I MARKETING PROCESS 9
Definition, Marketing process, dynamics, needs, wants and demands, marketing concepts, environment, mix,
types. Philosophies, selling versus marketing, organizations, industrial versus consumer marketing, consumer
goods, industrial goods, product hierarchy.
UNIT II BUYING BEHAVIOUR AND MARKET SEGMENTATION 9
Cultural, demographic factors, motives, types, buying decisions, segmentation factors - demographic -Psycho
graphic and geographic segmentation, process, patterns.
UNIT III PRODUCT PRICING AND MARKETING RESEARCH 9
Objectives, pricing, decisions and pricing methods, pricing management. Introduction, uses, process of
marketing research.
UNIT IV MARKETING PLANNING AND STRATEGY FORMULATION 9
Components of marketing plan-strategy formulations and the marketing process, implementations, portfolio
analysis, BCG, GEC grids.
UNIT V ADVERTISING, SALES PROMOTION AND DISTRIBUTION 9
Characteristics, impact, goals, types, and sales promotions- point of purchase- unique selling proposition.
Characteristics, wholesaling, retailing, channel design, logistics, and modern trends in retailing.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Govindarajan M. “Marketing management – concepts, cases, challenges and trends”, Prentice hall of
India, 2nd Edition 2007.
2. Philip Kolter, Koshy Jha. “Marketing Management”, Pearson Education, Indian adapted Edition, 2007.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Ramasamy and Nama kumari. “Marketing Environment: Planning, implementation and control the
Indian context”, McMillan, 2012.
2. Czinkota & Kotabe. “Marketing management”, Thomson learning, Indian Edition, 2007.
3. Adrain palmer. “Introduction to marketing theory and practice”, Oxford university press, Indian
Edition, 2004.
4. Donald S. Tull and Hawkins. “Marketing Research”, Prentice Hall of India, 2011.
97
5. Philip Kotler and Gary Armstrong. “Principles of Marketing” Prentice Hall of India, 2000.
6. Steven J.Skinner, “Marketing”, All India Publishers and Distributers Limited, 2007.
7. Graeme Drummond and John Ensor. “Introduction to marketing concepts”, Elsevier, Indian Reprint,
2007.
15MEC17 : MICRO ELECTRO MECHANICAL SYSTEM L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To integrate the knowledge of semiconductors and solid mechanics to fabricate MEMS devices.
To understand the rudiments of Microfabrication techniques.
To Identify and understand the various sensors and actuators.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course the students are able to
Apply MEMS to disciplines beyond Mechanical &Electrical engineering.
Describe the physical, chemical, biological, and engineering principles involved in the design and
operation of current and future micro devices.
Critically analyse the microsystems technology for technical feasibility as well as practicality.
Describe the limitations and current challenges in microsystems engineering.
COURSE PREREQUISITE:
Semiconductor Physics.
Mechanics of materials.
Micromachining.
Acoustics and Transducers.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 09
MEMS and microsystems – miniaturization - typical products - micro sensors - micro actuation - MEMS with
micro actuators – micro accelerometers and micro fluids - MEMS materials - micro fabrication.
UNIT II MECHANICS FOR MEMS DESIGN 09
Elasticity – stress - strain and material properties - bending of thin plates - spring configurations - torsional
deflection - mechanical vibration – resonance – thermos mechanics – actuators - force and response time -
fracture and thin film mechanics.
UNIT III ELECTRO STATIC DESIGN 09
Basic theory - electro static instability - surface tension - gap and finger pull up - electro static actuators - comb
generators - gap closers - rotary motors - inch worms – electro-magnetic actuators - bistable actuators.
UNIT IV CIRCUIT AND SYSTEM ISSUES 09
Electronic interfaces – feed-back systems – noise - circuit and system issues - case studies – capacitive
accelerometer - Piezo electric pressure sensor - thermal sensor - radiation sensors - mechanical sensors -
bio-chemical sensors - modeling of MEMS systems - CAD for MEMS.
UNIT V OPTICAL AND RF MEMS 09
Optical MEMS, system design basics – Gaussian optics - matrix operations - resolution, case studies - MEMS
scanners and retinal scanning – display - digital micro mirror devices - RF MEMS- design basics - case study-
capacitive RF MEMS switch - performance issues.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Tai- Ran Hsu, “MEMS and Microsytems Design and Manufacture”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2002.
98
2. Vijay Vardan, “MEMS”, Wiley Publication, 2002.
3. Nitaigour Mahalik, “MEMS”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2007.
4. Rai Chaoudhary, “MEMS and MOEMS Technology and Applications”, PHI Learning, 2000.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Stephen D. Senturia, “Microsystem Design”, Kluwer Academic Publishers, 2005.
2. Marc Madou, “Fundamentals of Microfabrication”, CRC Press, 2011.
3. Chang Liu, “Foundations of MEMS”, Pearson Education Inc, 2006.
15MEC18 : NON DESTRUCTIVE TESTING L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To impart knowledge on
To study and understand the various Non-Destructive Testing methods for the detection of
manufacturing defects.
To study the various mechanisms involved in NDT techniques.
To know the industrial applications of NDT and recent trends in NDT.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course students will be able to
Remember the principles of various NDT techniques.
Understandthe equipment required for the NDT.
Analyze the mechanism involved in there NDT techniques.
Apply the recent trends in NDT.
COURSE PREREQUISITE:
Basics of Metallurgy.
Physical properties and characteristics of materials.
Joining process during fabrication.
Types of defects and Discontinuities.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 7
NDT Versus Mechanical testing, Overview of the Non Destructive Testing Methods for the detection of
manufacturing defects as well as material characterisation. Relative merits and limitations, Various physical
characteristics of materials and their applications in NDT. Visual inspection – Unaided and aided.
UNIT II LIQUID PENETRANT AND MAGNETIC PARTICLE TESTS 8
Liquid Penetrant Testing - Principles, types and properties of liquid penetrants, developers, advantages and
limitations of various methods, Testing Procedure, Interpretation of results. Leak testing standards, types and
industrial applications.
Magnetic Particle Testing- Theory of magnetism, inspection materials Magnetisation methods, Interpretation
and evaluation of test indications, Principles and methods of demagnetization, Residual magnetism.
UNIT III THERMOGRAPHY AND EDDY CURRENT TESTING (ET) 10
Thermography- Principles, Contact and non - contact inspection methods, Techniques for applying liquid
crystals, Advantages and limitation - infrared radiation and infrared detectors, Instrumentations and methods,
applications.
Eddy Current Testing-Generation of eddy currents, Properties of eddy currents, Eddy current sensing
elements, Probes, Instrumentation, Types of arrangement, Applications, advantages, Limitations,
Interpretation/Evaluation.
UNIT IV ULTRASONIC TESTING (UT) AND ACOUSTIC EMISSION (AE) 10
Ultrasonic Testing-Principle, Transducers, transmission and pulse-echo method, straight beam and angle
99
beam, instrumentation, data representation, A/Scan, B-scan, C-scan. Phased Array Ultrasound, Time of Flight
Diffraction.
Acoustic Emission Technique –Principle, AE parameters, Applications.
UNIT V RADIOGRAPHY (RT) 10
Principle, interaction of X-Ray with matter, imaging, film and film less techniques, types and use of filters and
screens, geometric factors, Inverse square, law, characteristics of films - graininess, density, speed, contrast,
characteristic curves, Penetrameters, Exposure charts, Radiographic equivalence. Fluoroscopy- Xerox-
Radiography, Computed Radiography, Computed Tomography.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Jayamangal Prasad, C. G. Krishnadas Nair, Non-Destructive Test and Evaluation of Materials”, Tata
McGraw-Hill Education, 2011.
2. Ravi Prakash, “Non-Destructive Testing Techniques”, New Age International Publishers, 1st revised
Edition, 2010.
3. Barry Hull and Vernon John, “Non Destructive Testing”, MacMillan, 1988.
4. Baldev Raj, T.Jayakumar, M.Thavasimuthu, “Practical Non-Destructive Testing”, Narosa Publishing
House, 2009.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. ASM Metals Handbook, “Non-Destructive Evaluation and Quality Control”, American Society of
Metals, Metals Park, Ohio, USA, 200, Volume-17.
2. Paul E Mix, “Introduction to Non-destructive testing: a training guide”, Wiley, 2nd edition New Jersey,
2005.
3. Charles, J. Hellier, “Handbook of Nondestructive evaluation”, McGraw Hill, New York 2001.
4. ASNT, American Society for Non Destructive Testing, Columbus, Ohio, NDT Handbook, Vol. 1, Leak
Testing, Vol. 2, Liquid Penetrant Testing, Vol. 3, Infrared and Thermal Testing Vol. 4, Radiographic
Testing, Vol. 5, Electromagnetic Testing, Vol. 6, Acoustic Emission Testing, Vol. 7, Ultrasonic
Testing.
5. Progress in Acoustic Emission, “Proceedings of 10th International Acoustic Emission Symposium",
Japanese Society for NDI, 1990.
6. American Society of Metals, Metals Hand Book, 9th Edition, Volume 11 (1980).
7. Birchan, D, “Non Destructive Testing”, Oxford University Press, 1977.
8. Holler, P, “New Procedures in Non-Destructive Testing” Springer Verlag, 1983.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://www.metrologytooling.com
2. http://www.sisndt.com
3. http://www.iuk'tu-harburg.de
15MEC19 : NUCLEAR ENGINEERING L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To gain knowledge about nuclear physics and nuclear fuels.
To understand the need for nuclear fuel reprocessing and methods for reprocessing.
To gain knowledge about various types of nuclear reactors and safe disposal of nuclear wastes.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Students will be able to understand about nuclear physics, nuclear fuels and their importance.
Appreciate nuclear fuel reprocessing and methods for nuclear fuel reprocessing.
Gain an understanding about nuclear reactors and safe disposal of nuclear wastes.
100
COURSE PREREQUISITE:
Basics of Atom models.
Radiation techniques, Nuclear reactions and Nuclear waste.
Explosive and Non-explosive solid materials.
Heat Transfer techniques.
UNIT I NUCLEAR PHYSICS AND INTRODUCTION 9
Nuclear model of an atom-Equivalence of mass and energy-binding- radio activity-half life-neutron
interactions-cross sections. Introduction – World Energy Sources, Indian Power Scenario, Nuclear Power
Scenario in the World, Nuclear Power Scenario in India.
UNIT II NUCLEAR REACTIONS AND REACTION MATERIALS 9
Mechanism of nuclear fission and fusion- radio activity- chain reactions-critical mass and composition-nuclear
fuel cycles and its characteristics-uranium production and purification-Zirconium, thorium, beryllium.
Moderator, Coolant & Control materials, their material properties and irradiation effects.
UNIT III REPROCESSING 9
Reprocessing: nuclear fuel cycles-spent fuel characteristics-role of solvent extraction in reprocessing-solvent
extraction equipment.
UNIT IV NUCLEAR REACTOR 9
Nuclear reactors: types of fast breeding reactors-design and construction of fast breeding reactors-heat
transfer techniques in nuclear reactors- reactor shielding. Fusion reactors. .Heat transfer techniques in nuclear
reactors. Nuclear Reactor Thermal-Hydraulics.
UNIT V SAFETY AND DISPOSAL 9
Safety and disposal: Nuclear plant safety-safety systems-changes and consequences of accident-criteria for
safety-nuclear waste-types of waste and its disposal-radiation hazards and their prevention-weapons
proliferation. International convention on safety aspects.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Thomas J.Connoly, “Fundamentals of nuclear Engineering”, John Wiley, 1978.
2. Duderstadt, J.J. and L.J. Hamilton, “Nuclear Reactor Analysis”, John Wiley, 1976.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Collier J.G., and Hewitt G.F, “Introduction to Nuclear power”, Hemisphere publishing, New York.
2000.
2. M.M.Ei.Wakil, ‘Nuclear power Engineering’, McGraw hill book Company,New York, 1987.
3. Wakil M.M.El., “Power Plant Technology”, McGraw-Hill International, 1988.
15MEC20 : PLANT LAYOUT AND MATERIAL HANDLING L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
101
To impart with the knowledge to create a plant layout at different locations and working conditions.
To expose the students about the work conditions such as ventilation, comfort, lighting and its effect
in diverse industrial situations.
To give a good exposure to manual material handling and lifting techniques.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
The students will be able to identify equipment requirements for a specific process at different
locations and diverse working conditions.
The students will be able to understand the significance of an effective material handling system.
The students will be able to recognize the effect of process layout on the material handling system.
COURSE PREREQUISITE:
Basic knowledge about various Industries.
Safety Aspects.
Ergonomics.
Material handling systems.
UNIT I PLANT LOCATION 9
Selection of plant locations, territorial parameters, considerations of land, water, electricity, location for waste
treatment and disposal, Safe location of chemical storages, explosives and propellants.
UNIT II PLANT LAYOUT 9
General layout, equipment layout, safety system, fire hydrant locations, fire service rooms, facilities for safe
effluent disposal and treatment tanks, site considerations, approach roads, plant railway lines, security towers.
Layout for process industries, engineering industry, construction sites, pharmaceuticals, pesticides, fertilizers,
refineries, food processing, nuclear power stations, thermal power stations, metal powders manufacturing,
fireworks and match works.
UNIT III WORKING CONDITIONS 9
Principles of good ventilation, purpose, physiological and comfort level types, local and exhaust ventilation,
hood and duct design, air conditioning, ventilation standards, application.
Purpose of lighting, types, advantages of good illumination, glare and its effect, lighting requirements for
various work, standards- Housekeeping, principles of 5S.
UNIT IV MANUAL MATERIAL HANDLING AND LIFTING TACKLES 8
Preventing common injuries, lifting by hand, team lifting and carrying, handling specific shape machines and
other heavy objects – accessories for manual handling, hand tools, jacks, hand trucks, dollies and wheel
barrows – storage of specific materials - problems with hazardous materials, liquids, solids – storage and
handling of cryogenic liquids - shipping and receiving, stock picking, dock boards, machine and tools, steel
strapping and sacking, glass and nails, pitch and glue, boxes and cartons and car loading – personal
protection – ergonomic considerations.
Fiber rope, types, strength and working load inspection, rope in use, rope in storage - wire rope, construction,
design factors, deterioration causes, sheaves and drums, lubrication, overloading, rope fitting, inspection and
replacement – slings, types, method of attachment, rated capacities, alloy chain slings, hooks and attachment,
inspection.
UNIT V MECHANICAL MATERIAL HANDLING 10
Hoisting apparatus, types - cranes, types, design and construction, guards and limit devices, signals, operating
102
rules, maintenance safety rules, inspection and inspection checklist – conveyors, precautions, types,
applications.
Powered industrial trucks, requirements, operating principles, operators selection and training and
performance test, inspection and maintenance, electric trucks, gasoline operated trucks, LPG trucks – power
elevators, types of drives, hoist way and machine room emergency procedure, requirements for the
handicapped, types- Escalator, safety devices and brakes, moving walks – man lifts, construction, brakes,
inspection.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Alexandrov. M.P. “Material Handling Equipment” Mir Publishers, Moscow, 1981.
2. Apple M. James “Plant Layout and Material Handling”, 3rd Edition, John Wiley & Sons, 1977.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Spivakosky, “Conveyors and Related Equipment”, Vol.I & II Peace Publishers. Moscow, 1982.
2. Rudenko, N., “Material Handling Equipments”, Mir Publishers, 1981.
3. Reymond, A.Kulwice, “Material Handling Hand Book - II”, John Wiley and Sons, New York, 1985.
15MEC21 : PRESSURE VESSELS AND PIPING DESIGN L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To know the various components involved in Pressure vessels and piping.
To understand the different types of stresses and their effects in pressure vessel.
To understand the piping layout and the stresses acting on it.
To evaluate the geometry and dimensions of pressure vessels and piping design.
To identify and correct the design errors and create the safe working environment.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course students will be able to
Understand the specifications of different pressure vessel and apply appropriately according to the
standards.
Analyze columns and pressure vessels under various loadings.
Apply thin-walled pressure vessel formulas to determine transverse and longitudinal membrane
stresses in vessels of various configurations.
Develop an understanding of analytic methods used in connection with the structural design of
columns, long mechanical members under compression and pressure vessels.
Design of piping for various conditions of fluid flow and transmission.
COURSE PREREQUISITE:
Design of Machine Elements.
Theories of Failure.
Strength of Materials.
UNIT I DESIGN OF PRESSURE VESSELS 9
Introduction - classification of pressure vessel - design considerations - material selection - factors influencing
of design of vessel - fabrication aspects - inspection-fault and failures in pressure vessel -Design of tall
cylindrical self - supporting process columns – supports for short vertical vessels – stress concentration at a
variable thickness transition section in a cylindrical vessel - about a circular hole, elliptical openings - theory of
reinforcement – ASME Standard.
103
UNIT II CYLINDRICAL SHELL AND VARIOUS CLOSURES 9
Membrane theory for thin shells - stresses in cylindrical, spherical and conical shells - dilation of above shells -
general theory of membrane stresses in vessel under internal pressure and its application to ellipsoidal and
torispherical end closures - bending of circular plates - determination of stresses in simply supported and
clamped circular plate - Introduction to ASME code and formulae.
UNIT III JUNCTION STRESSES, OPENING AND REINFORCEMENTS 9
Stresses in pressure vessels - discontinuity stresses – thermal stresses - methods for determining stresses -
stress concentration in plate having circular hole due to bi-axial loading - Theory of reinforced opening and
reinforcement limits
UNIT IV BUCKLING IN VESSELS 9
Buckling of vessels under external pressure - elastic buckling of long cylinders - buckling modes - collapse
under external pressure - design for stiffening rings - buckling under combined external pressure and axial
loading.
UNIT V PIPING STRESS ANALYSIS 9
Flow diagram - piping layout and piping stress analysis - Flexibility factor and stress intensification factor -
Design of piping system as per B31.1 piping code - Piping components – bends, tees, bellows and valves -
Types of piping supports and their behavior – Piping codes.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Harvey, John F. “Theory and Design of Pressure Vessels” CBS Publishers & Distributors, Daryaganj,
New Delhi (India), 2001.
2. Brownell. L. E & Young. E. H, “Process equipment design”, Wiley Eastern Ltd., India, 1983.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. ASME Pressure Vessel and Boiler code, Section VIII Div 1 & 2, 2003 American standard code for
pressure piping, B 31.1.
2. Henry H Bednar, “Pressure vessel Design Hand book”, CBS publishers and distributors, 1991.
3. Stanley M Wales, “Chemical Process equipment, selection and design, Butterworth’s, series in
Chemical Engineering”,1990.
EXTENSIVE READING
1. William.J, Bees,"Approximate methods in the Design and Analysis of pressure vessels and piping",
ASME Pressure vessels and piping conference, Orlando, Florida, 1997.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://www.onesmartclick.com/engineering/pressurevessel-design.html
2. http://www.learningace.com
15MEC22 : PRINCIPLES OF FLIGHT L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To introduce the concepts of flying, International standard atmosphere, structural aspects of
airplanes.
Brief description of systems, instruments and power plants used in airplanes.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
The student will understand and get knowledge of the history of aviation.
The student will able to apply concepts from mathematics and physics to aviation scenarios.
Students will understand the progression of materials development and changes in structural designs
104
as they apply to aerospace vehicles.
Students will identify variation in physical, mechanical, and chemical properties of materials and how
these properties affect their use and application.
COURSE PREREQUISITE:
Mechanical behaviour of Solids and Structures.
Engineering Materials and properties.
Composite Materials.
Compressibility effects and viscous effects.
UNIT I HISTORY OF FLIGHT 8
Balloon flight – Ornithopters - Early airplanes by Wright Brothers, biplanes and monoplanes, Developments in
aerodynamics, materials, structures and propulsion over the years.
UNIT II BASIC OF FLIGHT MECHANICS 9
Physical properties and structure of the atmosphere, Temperature, pressure and altitude relationships,
Newton’s Law of Motions applied to Aeronautics - Evolution of lift, drag and moment. Aerofoils, Mach number,
Manoeuvres.
UNIT III AIRCRAFT CONFIGURATION 10
Different types of flight vehicles, classifications. Components of an airplane and their functions. Conventional
control, Powered control, Basic instruments for flying - Typical systems for control actuation.
UNIT IV AIRPLANE STRUCTURES AND MATERIALS 9
General types of construction, Monocoque, semi-monocoque and geodesic constructions, Typical wing and
fuselage structure. Metallic and non-metallic materials, Use of aluminium alloy, titanium, stainless steel and
composite materials - Stresses and strains – Hooke’s law – Stress - strain diagrams - elastic constants.
UNIT V POWER PLANTS 9
Basic ideas about piston, turboprop, and turbojet engines - Use of propeller and jets for thrust production -
Comparative merits - Principles of operation of rocket - types and applications- Exploration into space.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Anderson, J.D., “Introduction to Flight”, McGraw-Hill, 7th Edition, 2011.
2. Stephen. A. Brandt, Introduction to Aeronautics: A design perspective, 2nd Edition, AIAA Education
Series, 2012.
REFERENCE BOOK:
1. Kermode, A.C., “Mechanics of Flight”, Himalayan Book, 1997.
15MEC23 : PROCESS PLANNING AND COST ESTIMATION L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To introduce the process planning concepts.
To provide the details of ergonomics in workplace as well as equipment and plant design.
To make cost estimation for various products after process planning.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course students will be able
To learn about work study as to improve the productivity of any plant.
To understand the importance of ergonomics in workplace as well as equipment and plant design.
To design the plant layout to increase the productivity.
105
To apply motion economy principles to improve productivity.
To plan and schedule various plant operations.
To estimate the project cost and take make or buy decision.
COURSE PREREQUISITE:
Basics of various process.
Computer Integrated Manufacturing.
Manufacturing Technology.
UNIT I WORK STUDY AND ERGONOMICS 9
Method study – Definition – Objectives – Motion economy - Principles – Tools and techniques – Applications –
Work measurements – Purpose – Use – Procedure – Tools and techniques – Standard time – Ergonomics –
Principles – Applications.
UNIT II PROCESS PLANNING 9
Definition – Objective – Scope – Approaches to process planning – Process planning activities – Finished part
requirements – Operating sequences – Machine selection – Material selection parameters – Set of documents
for process planning – Developing manufacturing logic and knowledge – Production time calculation –
Selection of cost optimal processes.
UNIT III INTRODUCTION TO COST ESTIMATION 9
Objective of cost estimation – Costing – Cost accounting – Classification of cost – Elements of cost. Types of
estimates – Methods of estimates – Data requirements and sources – Collection of cost – Allowances in
estimation.
UNIT IV ESTIMATION OF COSTS IN DIFFERENT SHOP 9
Estimation in foundry shop – Pattern cost - Casting cost - Illustrative examples. Estimation in forging shop –
Losses in forging – Forging cost – Illustrative examples. Estimation in welding shop – Gas cutting – Electric
welding - Illustrative examples. Estimation in sheet metal shop – Shearing and forming - Illustrative examples.
UNIT V ESTIMATION OF MACHINING TIMES AND COSTS 9
Estimation of machining time for lathe operations - Estimation of machining time for drilling, boring, shaping,
planning, milling and grinding operations - Illustrative examples.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Sinha B. P., "Mechanical Estimating and Costing", Tata McGraw-Hill, Publishing Co, 1995.
2. Technical Teachers Training Institute, Madras, “Mechanical Estimating and Costing", Tata McGraw -
Hill, Publishing Co, 1stEdition, 2002.
3. Adithan M. S, Pabla, “Production Engineering Estimating and Costing”, Konark Publishers Pvt., Ltd,
1990.
4. Chitale A. K, Gupta R. C., “Product Design and Manufacturing“, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 6th
Edition, 2013.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Phillip F Ostwalal, Jairo Munez, "Manufacturing Processes and Systems", John Wiley, 9thEdition,
2008.
2. Russell R. S, Tailor B.W., "Operations Management", Prentice Hall of India, 7th Edition, 2010.
3. Chitale A. V, Gupta R. C., "Product Design and Manufacturing", Prentice Hall of India, 2nd Edition,
2002.
4. Nanua Singh, “System Approach to Computer Integrated Design and Manufacturing’, John Wiley &
Sons, New York, 2011.
106
5. Joseph G. Monks, “Theory and Problems of Operations Management”, McGraw Hill Book Company,
New Delhi, 2nd Edition 2004.
6. Narang G. B. S, Kumar V., “Production and Planning”, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 1995.
7. Banga T. R, Sharma S. C., “Estimating and Costing“, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 16th Edition
2011.
8. CharyS. N., “Theory and Problems in Production and Operations Management“, Tata McGraw - Hill
Education,1st Edition, 1995.
9. CharyS. N., “Production and Operations Management”, Tata McGraw - Hill Education, 5th Edition.
15MEC24 : PRODUCTION PLANNING AND CONTROL
L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To understand the various components and functions of production planning and control such as
work study, product planning, process planning, production scheduling, inventory control.
To know the recent trends like manufacturing requirement planning (MRP II) and enterprise resource
planning (ERP).
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course the students will be able to:
Understand the concepts of production planning and control, product analysis and production
systems.
Become familiar with work study methods.
Understand the principles ofproduct planning, process planning, production scheduling, Inventory
Control.
Solve the problems related to inventory, BEP, Machine capacity.
Know the recent trends like manufacturing requirement Planning (MRP II) and Enterprise Resource
Planning (ERP).
COURSE PREREQUISITE:
Process Planning and Cost Estimation.
Computer Integrated Manufacturing.
Basics of Sequencing and Scheduling.
Basics of Work study.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO PPC 9
Objectives and benefits of planning and control-Functions of production control - Types of production – job-
batch and continuous-Product development and design-Marketing aspect - Functional aspects-Operational
aspect-Durability and dependability aspect- Aesthetic aspect. Profit consideration-Standardization,
Simplification & Specialization-Break even analysis-Economics of a new design.
UNIT II WORK STUDY 9
Method study, Basic procedure – Selection-Recording of process - Critical analysis, Development -
Implementation - Micro motion and memo motion study - Work measurement - Techniques of work
measurement - Time study – Performance rating – Activity sampling - Production study - Work sampling -
Synthesis from standard data - Predetermined motion time standards.
UNIT III PRODUCT PLANNING AND PROCESSPLANNING 9
Product planning - Extending the original product information - Value analysis - Problems in lack of product
planning - Process planning and routing-Pre requisite information needed for process planning - Steps in
process planning - Quantity determination in batch production - Machine capacity, Line balancing-Analysis of
process capabilities in a multi-product system.
UNIT IV PRODUCTION SCHEDULING 9
Production Control Systems - Loading and scheduling - Master scheduling - Scheduling rules - Gantt charts -
107
Perpetual loading - Basic scheduling problems - Line of balance - Flow production scheduling - Batch
production scheduling - Product sequencing - Production control systems - Periodic batch control - Material
requirement planning – Dispatching - Progress reporting and expediting -Manufacturing lead time - Master
production schedule along with lead time and MRP - Techniques for aligning completion times and due dates.
UNIT V INVENTORY CONTROL AND RECENT TRENDS IN PPC 9
Inventory control - Purpose of holding stock - Effect of demand on inventories - Ordering procedures. Two bin
system - Periodic review system – Fixed order quantity system - Ordering cycle system - Determination of
economic order quantity and economic lot size - ABC analysis - Recorder procedure - Elements of JIT -
Fundamentals of MRP II and ERP.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Martand Telsang, “Industrial Engineering and Production Management”, S. Chand, 2nd Edition, 2006.
2. James B Dilworth, “Operations Management: Design, Planning and Control for Manufacturing and
Services”, McGraw Hill, 1992.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Samuel Eilon, “Elements of Production Planning and Control”, Macmillan, 3rd Reprint Edition, 2007.
2. Elwood S. Buffa and Rakesh K. Sarin, “Modern Production / Operations Management”, John Wiley
and Sons, 8th Edition, 2011.
3. Jain K. C, Aggarwal L. N., “Production Planning Control and Industrial Management”, 6thEdition,
Khanna Publishers, 2004.
4. Nair N. G., “Production and Operations Management”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2004.
5. Chary S. N., “Theory and Problems in Production & Operations Management”, Tata McGraw Hill,
1995.
6. Hajra Choudhury S. K, Nirjhar Roy, Hajra Choudhury A. K., “Production Management”, Media
Promoters and Publishers Pvt. Ltd, 1998.
15MEC25 : PROJECT MANAGEMENT L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To learn the basic concepts of project management and cost estimation functions.
To enable the students to effectively plan and complete a project.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
After studying this course students will be able to:
Remember the basics of project management.
Plan and schedule a project.
Estimate the cost of a project.
Understand the Project Management and Information System.
Construct the audit report and evaluate the project.
COURSE PREREQUISITE:
Operations Research.
Process Planning and Cost Estimation.
Production Planning and Control.
Engineering Economics.
UNIT I PROJECT MANAGEMENT 9
Need – goals – evolution – different forms – project management in manufacturing, service and government
108
sectors; systems development cycle – project life cycle – conception phase : proposal, contracting – definition
phase – execution phase: production/build, implementation - operation phase – case study; Tools for project
planning – work break down structure, responsibility matrix, events and milestones, Gantt charts.
UNIT II PROJECT SCHEDULING 9
Network diagram – critical path – late times – slack – float - calendar scheduling; Time estimates – probability
of finishing by target completion date – meeting the target – simulating PERT network – criticisms of PERT;
CPM – time-cost relationship – reducing project duration – shortest duration – total project cost – scheduling
with resource constraints – resource loading and levelling – constrained resources; Introduction to GERT
Network, Case studies in PERT/CPM.
UNIT III PROJECT COST ESTIMATION 9
Process – classification – expert opinion, analogy, parametric estimate; cost engineering – example;
contingency amount ; elements of budgets and estimates – direct labour, direct non-labour, overhead, general
and administrative expenses, profit and total billing; project cost accounting and management information
systems – cost summaries,cost schedules and forecasts - case study.
UNIT IV PROJECT CONTROL AND PMIS 9
Cost accounting systems – project control process,project control emphasis – scope, change control, quality
control, schedule control, time buffers; performance analysis – cost, schedule , work package analysis,
performance indices, updating time estimates, technical performance measurement; performance index
monitoring – variance limits, controlling changes, contract administration, control problems, case study;
Functions – computer based PMI systems – web-based project management.
UNIT V PROJECT EVALUATION 9
Construction and use of audit report, Project audit life cycle, Essentials of audit and evaluation, Varieties of
project termination, the termination process, project extensions, The Final Report – A project history, Case
Studies.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. John M Nicholas, “Project Management for Business and Technology”, Prentice Hall of India Pvt Ltd.,
New Delhi, 2nd Edition, 2003.
2. Parameshwar P Iyer, “Engineering Project Management- with Case Studies”, Wheeler Publishing,
2004.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Anastasia Pagnoni, “Project Engineering – Computer Oriented Planning and Operational Decision
Making”, Springer Verlag, 2012.
2. Dennis Lock, “The Essentials of Project Management”, Gower Publishing Ltd., 3rd Edition, 2007.
3. Vasant Desai, “Project Management”, Himalaya Publishing House, 2001.
4. Joseph Phillips, “IT Project Management:On Track from Start to Finish”, Tata McGraw Hill, 3rd
Edition, 2010.
15MEC26 : REFRIGERATION AND AIR CONDITIONING L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To understand the principles of operation in different Refrigeration & Air conditioning systems and its
components.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
109
After studying this course, students will be able to understand
The thermal comfort conditions with respect to temperature, humidity, human clothing & activities and
its impact on human comfort, productivity, and health.
The psychrometry and its application in HVAC engineering & design and will practice or observe
psychrometric measurements.
The engineering and operation of vapor compression, heat-driven refrigeration systems and
evaporative cooling systems.
The contemporary issues of ozone depletion and global warming potential with respect torefrigeration
systems.
COURSE PREREQUISITE:
Thermodynamics.
Fluid Mechanics.
Thermal Engineering.
UNIT I REFRIGERATION CYCLE 7
Review of thermodynamic principles of refrigeration. Carnot refrigeration cycle – Vapour compression
refrigeration cycle – use of P.H. charts – multistage and multiple evaporator systems – cascade system – COP
comparison. Air Refrigeration cycles.
UNIT II REFRIGERANTS AND SYSTEM COMPONENTS 10
Compressors – reciprocating and rotary (elementary treatment), Types of condensers, evaporators, cooling
towers – Functional aspects. Refrigerants – properties – selection of refrigerants, Alternate Refrigerants,
Cycling controls.
UNIT III PSYCHROMETRY 10
Psychrometric processes use of psychrometric charts – Grand and Room Sensible Heat Factors – bypass
factor – air washers, requirements of comfort air conditioning, summer and Winter Air conditioning.
UNIT IV AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMS 9
Cooling load calculation, working principles of – Centralized Air conditioning systems, Split, Ductable split,
Packaged Air conditioning, VAV & VRV Systems. Duct Design by equal friction method, Indoor Air quality
concepts.
UNIT V UNCONVENTIONAL REFRIGERATION CYCLES 9
Vapor Absorption system – Ejector jet, Steam jet refrigeration, thermo electric refrigeration. APPLICATIONS –
ice plant – food storage plants – milk – chilling plants.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Manohar Prasad, “Refrigeration and Air Conditioning”, New Age International Publishers, 3rd Edition.
2. Arora C.P, “Refrigeration and Air Conditioning”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 3rd Edition, 2008.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Roy. J. Dossat, “Principles of Refrigeration”, Pearson Education 1997.
2. Jordon and Priester, “Refrigeration and Air Conditioning”, Prentice Hall of India Pvt.Ltd., New Delhi,
1985.
3. Stoecker N.F. and Jones, “Refrigeration and Air Conditioning”, TMH, New Delhi, 1981.
15MEC27 : RENEWABLE ENERGY SYSTEMS L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To instruct the importance of renewable energy and its utilization for the thermal and electrical energy
110
needs and also the environmental aspects of these resources.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student is expected to
Understand and analyze the pattern of renewable energy resources.
Suggest the methodologies / technologies for its utilization.
Economics of the utilization and environmental merits.
COURSE PREREQUISITE:
Basics of Solar radiation.
Photovoltaic conversion.
Principles of Turbines.
Fundamental of Fuel cells.
UNIT I SOLAR ENERGY 9
Solar Radiation – Measurements of solar Radiation and sunshine – Solar Thermal Collectors – Flat Plate and
Concentrating Collectors – Solar Applications – fundamentals of photo Voltaic Conversion – solar Cells – PV
Systems – PV Applications.
UNIT II WIND ENERGY 9
Wind Data and Energy Estimation – wind Energy Conversion Systems – Wind Energy generators and its
performance – Wind Energy Storage – Applications – Hybrid systems.
UNIT III BIO - ENERGY 9
Biomass, Biogas, Source, Composition, Technology for utilization – Biomass direct combustion – Biomass
gasifier – Biogas plant – Digesters – Ethanol production – Bio diesel production and economics.
UNIT IV OTEC, TIDAL, GEOTHERMAL AND HYDEL ENERGY 9
Tidal energy – Wave energy – Data, Technology options – Open and closed OTEC Cycles – Small hydro,
turbines – Geothermal energy sources, power plant and environmental issues.
UNIT V NEW ENERGY SOURCES 9
Hydrogen, generation, storage, transport and utilization, Applications: power generation, transport – Fuel cells
– technologies, types – economics and the power generation.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. G.D. Rai, “Non-Conventional Energy Sources”, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 2011.
2. S.P. Sukhatme, “Solar Energy”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Ltd., New Delhi, 3rd Edition,
2009.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Godfrey Boyle, “Renewable Energy, Power for a Sustainable Future”, Oxford University Press, U.K.,
3rd Edition, 2012.
2. Twidell, J.W. & Weir, A., “Renewable Energy Sources”, EFN Spon Ltd., UK, 2015.
3. G.N. Tiwari, “Solar Energy – Fundamentals Design, Modelling and applications”, Narosa Publishing
House, New Delhi, 2012.
4. L.L. Freris, “Wind Energy Conversion systems”, Prentice Hall, UK, 1990.
111
15MEC28 : RESOURCE MANAGEMENT TECHNIQUES L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To understand optimization of LPP using simplex and other methods to be applied in the Industrial
situations.
To understand network analysis of a Project Management and find shortest path of a Project.
To understand different types of Inventory Management and apply it to appropriate environments.
To understand individual and group replacement policy of an existing machines.
To understand queue discipline in different situations and solving it optimally.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course the students will be able to:
Able to analyze and apply optimization techniques and solve Industrial Problems.
Able to find shortest path of a Project to complete it in a shortest time.
Understand and analyze different types of optimum Inventory levels for the practical problems.
Conduct replacement analysis and replace the existing machine in the appropriate time optimally.
Able to understand various queue disciplines and apply it according to respective environments.
COURSE PREREQUISITE:
Engineering Mathematics.
Strong skills in Operations analysis.
Reasoning skills and critical thinking.
Deductive problem solving abilities.
UNIT I LINEAR MODEL 12
The phases of OR study – Formation of an L.P Model- Graphical solution – Simplex algorithm – Artificial
variables technique.
UNIT II SPECIAL LINEAR MODELS &NETWORKS 12
Transportation problems- Assignment problems – Project network- CPM and PERT network- Critical path
Method.
UNIT III INVENTORY MODEL 12
Types of Inventory- EOQ – Deterministic inventory problems – Price breaks - Stochastic inventory problems-
selective inventory control techniques.
UNIT IV REPLACEMENT MODELS 12
Replacement of items that deteriorate with time – value of money changing with time – not changing with time
– optimum replacement policy – individual and group replacement. Sequencing problem: models with n jobs
with 2 machines – problem with n jobs with m machines.
UNIT V QUEUING THEORY 12
Queuing models – queuing systems and structures – notation –parameter – single server and multi-server
models – Poisson input – exponential service – constant rate service – infinite population.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Hira and Gupta, “Problems in Operations Research”, S.Chand and Co, 3rd Edition, 2010.
2. Taha H.A, “Operation Research”, Pearson Education, 9th Edition, 2010.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Frederick S.Hiller and GeraldJ.Lieberman, “Introduction to Operations Research”, TMH (SIE) 8th
Edition, 2005.
2. J.K.Sharma, “Operations Research Theory and Applications”, Macmillan India, 3rd Edition, 2009.
3. Wayne L.Winston, “Operations Research Applications and Algorithms”, Thomson learning, 4th
112
Edition, 2007.
4. Panneerselvam, R. “Operations Research” Prentice Hall of India, 2006.
5. Wagner, H. M. “Principles of Operation Research with Applications to Managerial Decisions”,
Prentice Hall of India, 2nd Edition, 2010.
15MEC29 : THERMAL TURBOMACHINES L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To instruct the importance of the principles of various turbo machines.
To understand the principles, operations and applications of different types of turbo machinery
components.
To design the components of various system in turbomachines.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course students will
Have a fundamental understanding of basic concepts and operating principles of turbo machines.
Be able to understand the design procedure of centrifugal fans and blowers.
Recognize the importance of various turbo machineries such as compressors and turbines.
Acquire knowledge about principles, operations and applications of different types of turbo machinery
components.
COURSE PREREQUISITE:
Fluid Mechanics and Machinery.
Basics of compressors, fan and Turbine.
Principle and operation of Gas turbine.
UNIT I PRINCIPLES 9
Introduction to turbo machines, Energy transfer between fluid and rotor-classification of fluid machinery-
dimensionless parameters-specific speed-applications-stage velocity triangles-work and efficiency.
UNIT II CENTRIFUGAL FANS AND BLOWERS 9
Types- stage and design parameters-flow analysis in impeller blades-design procedure of centrifugal
fans and blowers- volute and diffusers, losses, characteristic curves and selection, fan drives and fan noise,
fan testing, blower regulations, throttling control.
UNIT III CENTRIFUGAL COMPRESSOR 9
Construction details, design procedure of centrifugal compressor, impeller flow losses, slip factor, diffuser
analysis, losses and performance curves.
UNIT IV AXIAL FLOW COMPRESSOR 9
Stage velocity diagrams, enthalpy-entropy diagrams, design procedure of axial flow compressor, stage losses
and efficiency, work done simple stage design problems and performance characteristics.
UNIT V AXIAL AND RADIAL FLOW TURBINES 9
Stage velocity diagrams, reaction stages, design procedure of axial and radial flow turbines, losses and
coefficients, blade design principles, testing and performance characteristics.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOK:
1. Yahya, S.M., “Turbines, Compressors and Fans”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company, 4th
edition, 2010.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Bruneck, “Fans”, Pergamom Press, 1973.
2. Earl Logan, Jr., “Handbook of Turbomachinery”, Marcel Dekker Inc., 2003.
3. Dixon, S.I., “Fluid Mechanics and Thermodynamics of Turbomachinery”, Pergamon Press, 2014.
113
4. Shepherd, D.G., “Principles of Turbomachinery”, Macmillan, 1969.
5. Stepanpff, A.J., “Blowers and Pumps”, John Wiley and Sons Inc. 2015.
6. Ganesan, V., “Gas Turbines”, Tata McGraw Hill Pub. Co., 3rd edition, 2010.
7. Gopalakrishnan .G and Prithvi Raj .D, “A Treatise on Turbo machines”, Scitech Publications
(India) Pvt. Ltd., 2008.
15MEC30 : TOTAL QUALITY MANAGEMENT AND RELIABILITY
ENGINEERING
L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To introduce the concept of Statistical Quality Control.
To understand about Total Quality Management.
To learn the concept of reliability.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course students will
Understand the importance of quality and the means to control it using SQC.
Be able to manage quality products in manufacturing sector.
Able to find out the reliability of a system and the ways of improving it.
COURSE PREREQUISITE:
Probability and Statistics.
Usage of various charts and tables.
Basics of Failure analysis.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION AND PROCESS CONTROL FOR VARIABLES 9
Introduction, definition of quality, basic concept of quality, definition of SQC, benefits and limitation of SQC,
Quality assurance, Quality control, Quality cost-Variation in process causes of variation –Theory of control
chart- uses of control chart – Control chart for variables – X chart, R chart - process capability –simple
problems. Six sigma concepts.
UNIT II PROCESS CONTROL FOR ATTRIBUTES 9
Control chart for attributes –control chart for non-conforming– p chart and np chart – control chart for
nonconformities– C and U charts, State of control and process out of control identification in charts, pattern
study.
UNIT III PRINCIPLES OF TOTAL QUALITY MANAGEMENT 9
Basic concepts of TQM - Definition of TQM – TQM; Framework - Contributions of Deming, Juran and Crosby;
Leadership – Strategic quality planning, Quality statements - Customer focus – Customer orientation,
Customer satisfaction, Customer complaints, Customer retention - Employee involvement – Motivation,
Empowerment, Team and Teamwork, Recognition and Reward, Performance appraisal - Continuous process
improvement – PDSA cycle, 5s, Kaizen - Supplier partnership – Partnering, Supplier selection, Supplier
Rating.
UNIT IV LIFE TESTING - RELIABILITY 9
Life testing – Objective – failure data analysis, Mean failure rate, mean time to failure, mean time between
failure, hazard rate – Weibull model, system reliability, series, parallel and mixed configuration – Maintainability
114
and availability – simple problems. Acceptance sampling based on reliability test – O.C Curves.
UNIT V DESIGN FOR RELIABLITY 9
Reliability: improvements – techniques- use of Pareto analysis – design– redundancy unit and standby
redundancy – Optimization in reliability – Product design – Product analysis – Product development – Product
life cycles.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Douglas.C.Montgomery. “Statistical Quality Control: A Modern Introduction”, John Wiley, 7thEdition,
2013.
2. Dale H. Besterfield, Carol Besterfield-Michna, Glen H. Besterfield, Mary Besterfield-Sacre, Hermant
Urdhwareshe, Rashmi Urdhwareshe, “Total Quality Management”, Pearson Education Asia, Revised
3rdEdition, Indian Reprint, 2012.
3. L.S.Srinath, “Reliability Engineering”, East west press, 4thEdition, 2005.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. John.S. Oakland. “Statistical process control”, A Butterworth-Heinemann Title, 6thEdition, 2007.
2. Connor P.D.T.O. “Practical Reliability Engineering”, John Wiley, 5th Edition, 2012.
3. Eugene L. Grant, Richard S. Leavenworth “Statistical Quality Control”, McGraw-Hill, 7thEdition 2008
4. Monohar Mahajan. “Statistical Quality Control”, Dhanpat Rai & Sons, 3rdEdition, 2012.
5. Gupta. R.C.. “Statistical Quality control”, Khanna Publishers, 8th Edition, 2008.
6. Besterfield D.H. “Quality Improvement”, Prentice Hall, 9thEdition, 2013.
7. Sharma S.C. “Inspection Quality Control and Reliability”, Khanna Publishers, 1998.
15MEC31 : UNCONVENTIONAL MACHINING PROCESSES
L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To learn about the fundamental principles of unconventional machining processes.
To impart knowledge about the effect of various process parameters and their influence on
performance characteristics.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
This course would make familiar of basic concepts in unconventional machining processes, their
development and applications.
Course would be helpful to understand the working principle behind different types of unconventional
machining processes.
Students would be trained to find innovative solutions for manufacturing complex profiles of difficult-
to-machine materials.
One would be able to make use of a suitable modern manufacturing technique for a component after
analyzing its design requirements and manufacturing attributes.
COURSE PREREQUISITE:
Manufacturing Technology - I & Manufacturing Technology Laboratory–I
Manufacturing Technology - II & Manufacturing Technology Laboratory–II
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 7
Drawbacks of Conventional Machining Processes- Need for Unconventional machining processes–
115
Characteristics of Non-conventional machining-Classification – Brief overview of all the Processes-
Comparative Analysis of Unconventional machining processes-physical parameters, shape capabilities,
process capability and process economy-Limitations.
UNIT II MECHANICAL ENERGY BASED PROCESSES 10
Abrasive Jet Machining – Water Jet Machining – Abrasive Water Jet Machining - Ultrasonic Machining.
Working Principles – Equipment used – Modelling of material removal-Process parameters – Material Removal
Rate - Variation in techniques used – Applications.
UNIT III ELECTRICAL ENERGY BASED PROCESSES 8
Electric Discharge Machining (EDM) - working principle- equipment description-Process parameters-Surface
finish and Material Removal Rate – Types of Electrodes- Metallic, Non-metallic, Combined electrodes – Power
and control circuits-Tool wear – Dielectric – Flushing Techniques- Pressure Flushing-Vacuum Flushing-Side
Flushing– Wire cut EDM – Applications.
UNIT IV CHEMICAL AND ELECTRO-CHEMICAL ENERGY BASED PROCESSES 10
Chemical Machining and Electro-Chemical Machining (CHM and ECM)-Etchants- Maskants - Techniques of
applying maskants-Process parameters – Surface finish and MRR-Applications. Principles of ECM-
Equipments-Surface roughness and MRR- Electrical circuit-Process Parameters- Electro-Chemical Grinding
and Electro-Chemical Honing- Applications.
UNIT V THERMAL ENERGY BASED PROCESSES 10
Laser Beam Machining and drilling (LBM)-Lasing Materials- Equipment-Process parameters-Applications,
Plasma Arc Machining (PAM)-Plasma torch-Transferred Arc mode- Non-transferred arc mode-Applications.
Electron Beam Machining (EBM)- Principles – Equipment –Types - Beam control techniques – Applications.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOK:
1. Jain, Vijay.K. “Advanced Machining Processes” Allied Publishers Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2010.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Benedict G.F. “Nontraditional Manufacturing Processes” Marcel Dekker Inc., New York, 1987.
2. Pandey P.C. & Shan H.S. “Modern Machining Processes” Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2013.
3. Mc Geough, “Advanced Methods of Machining” Chapman and Hall, London, 1998.
4. Paul De Garmo, J.T.Black & Ronald A Kohser. “Material and Processes in Manufacturing” Prentice
Hall of India, New Delhi (11th Edition), 2011.
5. Mishra P.K. “Non-Conventional Machining”, The Institution of Engineers (India), Text Book Series,
Narosa Book Distributors Pvt. Ltd., 2006.
EXTENSIVE READING:
1. Mikell P. Groover. “Fundamentals of Modern Manufacturing: Materials, Processes, and Systems”
John Wiley & Sons, 2010.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. www.nptel.iitm.ac.in/courses/Webcourse-contents/.../pdf/LM-35.pdf
2. www.iitg.ac.in/spal/ME412M_NTM.ppt
15MEC32 : VIBRATION AND NOISE CONTROL L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To understand the sources of vibration and noise in automobiles.
To Design modifications to reduce the vibration and noise and improve the life of the Components.
Analysing natural frequencies analysis, transmission noise, aerodynamic noise etc.
116
Different application of engine noise and energy absorption.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course the students will be able to:
Derive the equations and could solve various problems of vibration dynamics of mechanical systems.
Understand about the basis of vibration and noise and its measurement.
Understand, explain and apply the mechanism behind the automotive noise sources and its analysis.
Control the vibration and analysing the shock absorber mechanism.
Control the sources of noise and analysing the same in enclosure and transmission through barriers.
COURSE PREREQUISITE:
Theory of Machines.
Basic knowledge of Automobiles, especially engine and combustions.
UNIT I BASICS OF VIBRATION 9
Introduction- classification of vibration: free and forced vibration - undamped and damped vibration - linear
and non-linear vibration - response of damped and undamped systems under harmonic force - analysis of
single degree and two degree of freedom systems – torsional Vibration - determination of natural frequencies.
UNIT II BASICS OF NOISE 9
Introduction – amplitude – frequency - wavelength and sound pressure level - addition – subtraction and
averaging decibel levels - noise dose level – legislation - measurement and analysis of noise - measurement
environment – equipment - frequency analysis - tracking analysis - sound quality analysis.
UNIT III AUTOMOTIVE NOISE SOURCES 9
Noise Characteristics of engines - engine overall noise levels - assessment of combustion noise - assessment
of mechanical noise - engine radiated noise - intake and exhaust noise – engine necessary contributed noise -
transmission noise - aerodynamic noise - tire noise - brake noise.
UNIT IV SOURCES OF VIBRATION AND CONTROL 9
Vibration isolation - tuned absorbers - un-tuned viscous dampers - damping treatments - application of
dynamic forces generated by IC engines - engine isolation - crank shaft damping - modal analysis of the mass
elastic model shock absorbers.
UNIT V SOURCE OF NOISE AND CONTROL 9
Methods for control of engine noise - combustion noise - mechanical noise - predictive analysis - palliative
treatments and enclosures - automotive noise control principles - sound in enclosures - sound energy
absorption - sound transmission through barriers.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOK:
1. Singiresu S.Rao., “Mechanical Vibrations”, Pearson Education, 5thEdition, 2010.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Benson H. Tongue., “Principles of Vibrations”, Oxford University, 2nd Edition, 2007.
2. David Bies and Colin Hansen, “Engineering Noise Control – Theory and Practice”, E and FN Spon,
Taylore& Francise e-Library, 4thEdition, 2009.
3. William T. Thomson, Marie Dillon Dahleh, Chandramouli Padmanabhan, “Theory of Vibration with
Application”, Pearson Education, 5th Edition, 2011.
117
4. Bernard Challen and Rodica Baranescu., “Diesel Engine Reference Book”, SAE International, 2nd
Edition, 1999.
5. Julian Happian-Smith., “An Introduction to Modern Vehicle Design”- Butterworth Heinemann, 2004.
6. Rao J.S and Gupta K., “Introductory course on Theory and Practice of Mechanical Vibration”, New
Age International Publications, 2nd Edition, 2010.
7. A.A. Shabana., “Theory of vibrations – An introduction”, Springer, 2nd Edition, 2010.
15MEC33 : WASTE MANAGEMENT AND ENERGY RECOVERY L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To provide in depth knowledge in Principles of industrial waste management.
To achieve an understanding of characterization of waste.
To expose the students to various processing technologies of hazardous waste.
To provide wide exposure to the students about various waste disposal methods.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course students will be able
To list out the sources of industrial waste.
To understand the various properties of industrial waste and its characterization.
To understand the need for segregation of waste at source.
To evaluate the different waste processing technologies.
To list out various types of waste disposal methods.
COURSE PREREQUISITE:
Basic knowledge on Conventional and Non-conventional energy methods.
Environmental Engineering.
UNIT I SOURCES, CLASSIFICATION AND REGULATORY FRAMEWORK 9
Types and Sources of solid and hazardous wastes - need for solid and hazardous waste management –
elements of integrated waste management and roles of stakeholders - Salient features of Indian legislations on
management and handling of municipal solid wastes, hazardous wastes, biomedical wastes, lead acid
batteries, electronic wastes , plastics and fly ash –financing waste management
UNIT II WASTE CHARACTERIZATION AND SOURCE REDUCTION 9
Waste generation rates and variation – composition- physical, chemical and biological properties of solid
waste- moisture content chemical composition-heat value Bulk and material density-Mechanical properties -
biodegradability– hazardous characteristics – TCLP tests – waste sampling and characterization plan - source
reduction of wastes –waste exchange – extended producer responsibility - Recycling and reuse.
UNIT III STORAGE, COLLECTION AND TRANSPORT OF WASTES 9
Handling and segregation of wastes at source – storage and collection of municipal solid wastes – Analysis of
Collection systems - need for transfer and transport – Transfer stations Optimizing waste allocation–
compatibility, storage, labelling and handling of hazardous wastes – hazardous waste manifests and transport.
UNIT IV WASTE PROCESSING TECHNOLOGIES 9
Objectives of waste processing – material separation and processing technologies-Conveying –shredding –
pulping -crushing –Binary separators-trommel screens-Reciprocating and disc screens-Float / sink separators-
air classifiers-magnet and electromechanical separators -biological and chemical conversion technologies –
methods and controls of composting- thermal conversion technologies and energy recovery – incineration –
solidification and stabilization of hazardous wastes - treatment of biomedical wastes.
UNIT V WASTE DISPOSAL 9
Waste disposal options – Disposal in landfills - Landfill Classification, types and methods – site selection -
design and operation of sanitary landfills, secure landfills and landfill bioreactors – leachate and landfill gas
118
management – landfill closure and environmental monitoring – Rehabilitation of open dumps – landfill
remediation-Integrated waste management.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOK:
1. William A.Worrell W, P.Aarne Vesilind and Christian Ludwig”, Solid waste Engineering”, CL
Engineering, 3rd Edition, 2016.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. George Tchobanoglous, Hilary Theisen and Samuel A, Vigil, “Integrated Solid Waste Management”,
1993.
2. Michael D. LaGrega, Philip L Buckingham, and Jeffrey C. Evans “Hazardous waste
Management”,Waveland press, 2nd edition, Reissued, 2010.
3. CPHEEO, “Manual on Municipal Solid waste management, Central Public Health and Environmental
Engineering Organisation, Government of India, New Delhi,2000.
4. George Tchobanoglous and Frank Kreith,”Handbook of solid waste management” Mc-Graw Hill,
2ndEdition, 2002.
119
ALLIED ELECTIVES – SYLLABUS
Offered by Civil Department
15CEA01 INDUSTRIAL POLLUTION PREVENTION AND CONTROL L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To understand the concept of sustainability.
To know environmental regulations.
To realize the environmental pollution
To understand the air pollution control methods
To know the principles of water treatment
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the students will be able to
Identify the importance of sustainability and its indicators, strategies and barriers.
Implement the environmental regulations, policies and Regulations for clean environment
Familiarize the pollution and its regulating standards
Apply the different air pollution control methods gases and particulates
Apply the principles of water treatment and recovery methods.
COURSE PREREQUISITE:
Knowledge on Environmental Science
UNIT I SUSTAINABILITY 9
Industrial activity and environment - Industrialization and sustainable development - Indicators of sustainability-
Sustainability strategies - Barriers to sustainability - Pollution prevention in achieving sustainability
UNIT II ENVIRONMENTAL REGULATIONS 9
Prevention vs. control of industrial pollution - Environment policies and Regulations to encourage pollution
prevention - Environment friendly chemical processes - Regulations for clean environment and implications for
industries
UNIT III POLLUTION 9
Definition of pollutant - Types of pollution - Air - Water - Land - Noise - Adverse effects of pollutants eco system
and human health - Need for effluent treatment and toxicity control - Standards for portable water - Agricultural
and left-off streams- Air standards for cities - Industrial areas and Resorts.
UNIT IV AIR POLLUTION CONTROL METHODS 9
Particulate Emission Control- Gravitational Settling Chambers- Cyclone separators - Fabric filters - Electrostatic
Precipitators - Wet scrubbers - Absorbers - Control of sulphur di oxide - Oxides of nitrogen - Carbon monoxide
and hydrocarbons - Noise pollution measurements and its control.
UNIT V PRINCIPLES OF WATER TREATMENT 9
Primary, secondary and tertiary treatments - Advanced waste water treatments - Recovery of metals from
process effluents
120
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Bishop.P, "Pollution Prevention: Fundamentals and Practice", McGraw Hill International, McGraw Hill Book
Co., Singapore, 2010
2. Freeman.H.M, "Industrial Pollution Prevention Hand Book", McGraw Hill, 1995
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Rose.G.R.D, “Air pollution and Industry”, Van No strand Reinhold Co., New York 1972
2. Pandey.G.N and Carney.G.C, “Environmental Engineering”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi,1989
3. James. G. Mann and Liu.Y.A, "Industrial Water Reuse and Waste WaterMinimization", McGraw Hill, 1999
EXTENSIVE READING:
1. Kapoor.B.S, “Environmental Engineering”, 5th Edition, Khanna publishers,2012
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://www.tutorialspoint.com/
15CEA02 INTRODUCTION TO ENGINEERING SEISMOLOGY L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To impart the basic knowledge about the Engineering Seismology
To create the awareness about the earthquake recording instruments and seismic records
To instruct the knowledge about the earthquake hazards and seismic hazard assessment
To understand the various seismic hazard analysis
To introduce the different types of risk and vulnerability assessment
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the students will be able to
Categorize the various components of engineering seismology
Identify the different types of seismic recording instruments
Classify the various earthquake hazards and seismic hazard assessment
Do the various seismic hazard analysis
Analyze the types of risk and vulnerability
COURSE PREREQUISITE:
Knowledge on basics on earthquake
UNIT I ENGINEERING SEISMOLOGY 9
Introduction to engineering seismology - Terminologies and definitions - Earthquake types - Overview of plate
tectonics - Earthquake source mechanisms - Source models - Types of faults - Activity and fault studies -
Concepts of seismic magnitudes and intensity -Earthquake size, different magnitude scales and relations, Theory
of wave propagation - Seismic waves, body and surface waves.
121
UNIT II EARTHQUAKE RECORDING INSTRUMENTS 9
Earthquake recording instrumentations - Concept of seismograph - Seismic station - Sensors and data loggers -
Mechanical and digital sensors - Interpretation of Seismic Records -Acceleration, Velocity and Displacement -
Frequency and Time Domain parameters - Response Spectra and Spectral parameters - Epicentre and
magnitude determination.
UNIT III EARTHQUAKE HAZARDS AND SEISMIC HAZARD ASSESSMENT 9
Introduction to earthquake hazards -Strong ground motions and site effects - World great Earthquakes - Large
and Damaging Earthquakes of India - Instruction to seismic zones and codes - Global and National seismic
hazard assessment mapping programs - Safety of individual site - Concept of seismic micro zonation - Need for
Micro zonation - Types and Scale – Methodology.
UNIT IV SEISMIC HAZARD ANALYSIS 9
Introduction to Seismic Hazard Analysis- Methods - Deterministic and Probabilistic - Attenuation models and
Simulation of Strong Ground Motion - Introduction to Site characterization - Different methods and experiments -
Geotechnical properties - Site classification and worldwide code recommendation.
UNIT V RISK CLASSIFICATIONS AND MAPPING 9
Concept of site response - Local site effects and evaluation methods - Ground motion amplifications and
estimation - Development of response /design spectrum - Introduction to liquefaction - Mechanism and factors
causing liquefaction - estimation methods and procedures- Mapping - Earthquake induced landslide - Landslide
hazard mapping - Tsunami hazard and Consideration for Tsunami hazard mapping.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Stein, S., and M. Wysession, “An Introduction to Seismology, Earthquakes, and Earth Structure”, 1st edition,
Malden, MA: Blackwell, September 2003.
2. Steven L Kramer, “Geotechnical Earthquake Engineering”, Pearson Education, 2003
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Bozorgnia, Y. and Bertero, V.V., “Earthquake Engineering - From Engineering Seismology to Performance -
Based Engineering” CRC Press, Washington, 2004.
2. Leon Reiter, “Earthquake hazard Analysis - Issues and Insights”, Columbia University Press, New York,
1990.
3. Havskov, J. and Alguacil, G.,“Instrumentation in Earthquake Seismology”,Springer,Netherlands, 2004.
EXTENSIVE READING:
1. Judith Petts, “Handbook of Environmental Impact Assessment Vol. I & II”, Blackwell Science, 1999
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://nisee.berkeley.edu/
2. http://www.ethiopians.com/earthquake_engineering_resources.htm
122
15CEA03 SOLAR ENERGY UTILIZATION L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To enable the students to acquire knowledge of solar radiation data and its measurement.
To explain the concept of various forms of solar thermal systems.
To create basic knowledge on direct steam generation systems.
To learn the maintenance and implementation of solar photovoltaic.
To recognize the latest heat energy storages in buildings.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course the students will be able to,
Recognize the concepts of solar radiation data and its measurement.
Understand the working process of various solar thermal systems.
Appreciate the principles of solar parabolic concentrators and direct steam generation systems.
Know the importance of solar photovoltaic maintenance and their implementation.
Identify the orientation and design of buildings by using latest heat energy storages.
COURSE PREREQUISITE:
Knowledge on energy conservation
UNIT I SOLAR RADIATION 9
Sun and earth geometry- Solar radiation- Beam and diffuse radiations- Measurement of solar radiation –
Pyranometer-Pyrheliometer- Sunshine recorder-Solar collectors and applications.
UNIT II SOLAR THERMAL SYSTEMS 9
Flat plate and evacuated tube collectors- Domestic hot water and process heat systems- Solar cooker- Solar
dryer-Solar desalination and solar pond.
UNIT III SOLAR POWER PLANT 9
Principles of solar parabolic concentrators- Trough and dish types- Compound parabolic concentrators- Fresnel
lens collectors- Central receiver plant- Direct steam generation systems-Solar furnaces.
UNIT IV SOLAR PHOTOVOLTAICS 9
Solar photovoltaic theory- Mono and polycrystalline silicon technologies- PV modules and integrated systems-
implementation and maintenance.
UNIT V SOLAR-CONSCIOUS BUILDINGS 9
Orientation and design of buildings- Passive solar heat- Thermal capacity -Insulation- Solar cooling-refrigeration
and air-conditioning- Space heating- Sensible and latest heat energy storages in buildings.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
123
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Sukhatme.K, Suhas P. Sukhatme, “Solar energy: Principles of thermal collection and storage”, Tata McGraw
Hill publishing Co. Ltd, 8th edition, 2008.
2. Soteris A. Kalogiru, “Solar Energy Engineering: Processes and systems”, First edition, Academic press,
2009.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Duffie.J.A, &Beckman.W.A, “Solar Engineering of Thermal Processes”, 3rd
edition, John Wiley & Sons, Inc.,
2006.
2. Martin A. Green, “Third generation Photovoltaics: Advanced energy conversion”, 1st edition, 2005.
3. Garg.H.P, Prakash.J, “Solar energy fundamentals and applications”, Tata McGraw Hill publishing Co. Ltd,
2006.
4. Yogi Goswami.D, Frank Kreith, Jan F.Kreider, “Principle of solar engineering”, 2nd edition, Taylor and
Francis, 2nd edition, 2000.
5. Tiwari.G.N, “Solar energy: Fundamentals, Design, Modeling and Applications”, CRC Press Inc., 2002.
15CEA04 ENVIRONMENTAL GEOTECHNOLOGY L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To understand the physics and chemistry of soil
To know inorganic and organic geochemistry.
To realize contaminant fate and transport in soil
To understand the soil remediation technologies
To find the principles behind site selection and methods of disposal
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the students will be able to
Classify theIndex properties, classification and exchange capacity.
Analyse the inorganic and organic geochemistry and Distribution of metals in soils
Identify the contaminant fate and transport in soil
Apply the soil remediation technologies available in the affected soil
Procure idea in site selection and disposal methods
COURSE PREREQUISITE:
Knowledge on basic soil mechanics
UNIT I PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY OF SOIL 9
Soil formation - Composition - soil fabric - Mass volume relationship - Index properties and soil classification -
Hydraulic and consolidation characteristics - Chemical properties - Soil pH - Surface charge and point of zero
charge - Anion and Cation exchange capacity of clays - Specific surface area - Bonding in clays - Soil pollution -
Factors governing soil - Pollutant interaction.
124
UNIT II INORGANIC AND ORGANIC GEOCHEMISTRY 9
Inorganic Chemistry - Metal contamination - Distribution of metals in soils - Geochemical processes controlling
the distribution of the metals in soils - Chemical analysis of metal in soil - Organic geochemistry - Organic
contamination - Distribution of NAPLs in soils - Process controlling the distribution of NAPLs in soil - Chemical
analysis of NAPLs in soils.
UNIT III CONTAMINANT FATE AND TRANSPORT IN SOIL 9
Transport processes - Advection - Diffusion - Dispersion - Chemical mass transfer processes - Sorption and
desorption - Precipitation and dissolution - Oxidation and reduction - Acid base reaction - Complexation - Ion
exchange - Volatilization - Hydrolysis - Biological process - Microbial transformation of heavy metals.
UNIT IV SOIL REMEDIATION TECHNOLOGIES 9
Contaminated site characterization – Containment – Soil vapor extraction – Soil washing – Solidification and
stabilization – Electro-kinetic remediation – Thermal desorption – Vitrification – In-situ and Ex-situ Bioremediation
– Phytoremediation – Soil fracturing – Biostimulation – Bioaugumentation – Chemical oxidation and reduction.
UNIT V SITE SELECTION AND METHODS OF DISPOSAL 9
Criteria for sites for waste disposal facilities – Current practices for waste disposal – Sub surface techniques –
Passive contaminant system – Leachate contamination – Application of geo-membranes – Rigid and flexible
membrane liners
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Calvin Rose, “An introduction to the Environmental Physics of Soil, Water and Water Sheds”, Cambridge
University Press, 2004.
2. Paul Nathanail C. and Paul Bardos R., “Reclamation of contaminated Land”, John Wiley & Sons Limited,
2004.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Hari D. Sharama and Krishna R.Reddy, “Geo-Environmental Engineering: Site Remediation, Water
Contamination and Emerging Water Management Technologies”, John Wiley & Sons Limited, 2004.
2. Marcel Vander Perk, “Soil and Water contamination from Molecular to catchment Scale”, Taylor &Franncis,
2006.
EXTENSIVE READING:
1. William J. Deutsch, “Groundwater Geochemistry: Fundamentals and Applications to Contamination”, Lewis
Publishers, 1997.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://www.tutorialspoint.com/
125
15CEA05 PRINCIPLES OF GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
Introduce students to the basic principles of Global Positioning System
Familiarize with GPS signals and data
Impart knowledge on GPS data processing
Know about various errors in GPS data
provide students with the skills required to link locational data to certain projections and present same as
maps
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course students will be able to
Acquaint with the fundamentals of Global Positioning System
Employ various methods to collect GPS data by receiving signals from receiver
Perform basic GPS receiver operation and data processing
Check the accuracy of GPS data and able to do necessary adjustments.
Produce a simple map from field data acquired using hand-held GPS
COURSE PREREQUISITE:
Knowledge on Surveying
UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF GPS 9
Components of GPS - GPS receivers - Reference coordinates systems - Datum, geoid, ellipsoid, WGS 84
system –Time and signal propagation through atmosphere- Their modelling and estimation - Satellite orbit
andEngineering Applications.
UNIT II GPS SIGNALS AND DATA 9
Navigational data - Collection methods - static positioning, kinematic positioning, Pseudo - Kinematic and stop
and go methods -Observation planning and strategy.
UNIT III GPS OBSERVABLES 9
Pseudo range and carrier phase parameters - Estimations, data handling, cycle slip detection and correction,
ambiguity resolution- GPS data processing -Single, Double and Triple differences.
UNIT IV ERRORS IN GPS DATA 9
Satellite geometry -Errors in different segments - Multipath errors - accuracy of GPS data and measures -
Network adjustments.
UNIT V DATUM TRANSFORMATION AND DIFFERENTIAL GPS 9
Reduction of observation -Transformation to various map projection systems - Real time kinematic GPS -Multiple
reference stations -Virtual reference stations.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
126
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Satheesh, Gopi, “Global Positioning System and its Applications”, McGraw Hill, 2005.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Leick, A., “GPS Satellite Surveying”, John Wiley, 2004
2. Kaplan, E.D. and Hegarty, C.J., “Understanding GPS: Principles and Applications”, Artech House, 2006
3. Gunter, S., „Satellite Geodesy“, 2nd
Ed., WalterbdeGruyter, 2003.
4.
15CEA06
NON-CONVENTIONAL ENERGY RESOURCES L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To enable the students to acquire the knowledge of with various sources of Non-conventional energy
such as solar wind, small hydro, ocean & wave energy
To understand the working of solar thermal power plants
To know various aspects of geo-thermal energy
To have knowledge in wind and Thermo-electrical energy
To have exposure on biomass energy management
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the curse student will be able to
Learn fundamentals of solar radiation geometry, application of solar energy
Selection of sites for wind farm, different types of wind generators.
Realize the basic of small hydro, ocean & wave energy.
Have knowledge in geo-thermal energy
Appreciate bio mass energy management
COURSE PREREQUISITE:
Knowledge on alternate energy resources
UNIT I NON-CONVENTIONAL ENERGY RESOURCES 9
Various non-conventional energy resources- Introduction, availability, classification, relative Merits and Demerits -
Solar Cells - Theory of solar cells - Solar cell materials -Solar cell array -Solar cell power plant -Limitations.
UNIT II SOLAR THERMAL ENERGY 9
Solar radiation- Flat plate collectors and their materials - Applications and performance - Focussing of collectors
and their materials -Applications and performance -Solar thermal power plants - Thermal energy storage for solar
heating and cooling - Limitations.
UNIT III GEOTHERMAL ENERGY 9
Resources of geothermal energy - Thermodynamics of geo-thermal energy conversion- Electrical conversion and
non-electrical conversion -Environmental considerations - Magneto-hydrodynamics (MHD) - Principle of working
of MHD Power plant - performance and limitations - Fuel Cells - Principle of working of various types of fuel cells
and their working, performance and limitations.
UNIT IV WIND ENERGY 9
Wind Energy - Wind power and its sources- Site selection- Criterion - Momentum theory- Classification of rotors-
127
Concentrations and augments- Wind characteristics- Performance and limitations of energy conversion systems -
Thermo-electrical and thermionic Conversions - Principle of working - Performance and limitations.
UNIT V BIO-MASS 9
Bio-mass - Availability of bio-mass and its conversion theory - Ocean Thermal Energy Conversion (OTEC) -
Availability, theory and working principle -Performance and limitations -Wave and Tidal Wave - Principle of
working -Performance and limitations -Waste Recycling Plants.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. John Twideu and Tony Weir, “Renewal Energy Resources” BSP Publications, 2006.
2. M.V.R. KoteswaraRao, “Energy Resources: Conventional & Non-Conventional”, BSPPublications, 2006.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. D.S. Chauhan, “Non-conventional Energy Resources”, New Age International, 2002
2. C.S. Solanki, “Renewal Energy Technologies: A Practical Guide for Beginners”, PHI Learning, 2006
3. Raja, “Introduction to Non-Conventional Energy Resources”,SciTech Publications, 2008
EXTENSIVE READING:
1. Peter Auer, "Advances in Energy System and Technology - Vol. 1 & 2", Academic Press, 2005.
15CEA07 ENERGY CONSERVATION AND MANAGEMENT L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To enable the students to acquire the knowledge of energy conservation measures.
To understand conservation measures in steam systems
To know energy conservation aspects of fluid machinery
To have knowledge in electrical energy conservation in various industries
To have exposure on energy management
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course student will be able to
Have knowledge of energy conservation measures
Appreciate conservation measures in steam systems
Realize energy consumption and energy saving potentials
Have knowledge on electrical energy conservation
Practice energy management
COURSE PREREQUISITE:
Knowledge on energy conservation
UNIT I ENERGY CONSERVATION PRINCIPLES 9
Energy scenario - Principles of energy conservation - Resource availability - Energy savings - Current energy
consumption in India - Roles and responsibilities of energy managers in industries.
128
UNIT II ENERGY CONSERVATION IN STEAM SYSTEMS 9
Power plant components, conservation measures in steam systems - Losses in boiler - Methodology of upgrading
boiler performance - Blow down control - Excess air control - Pressure reducing stations - Condensate recovery -
Condensate pumping - Thermo compressors - Recovery of flash steam - Air removal and venting - Steam traps -
Cooling towers.
UNIT III ENERGY CONSERVATION IN FLUID MACHINERY 9
Centrifugal pumps - Energy consumption and energy saving potentials - Design consideration - Minimizing over
design - Fans and blowers -Specification - Safety margin - Choice of fans - Controls and design considerations -
Air compressor and compressed air systems - Selection of compressed air layout - Energy conservation aspects
to be considered at design stage.
UNIT IV ELECTRICAL ENERGY CONSERVATION 9
Potential areas for electrical energy conservation in various industries - Conservation methods - Energy
management opportunities in electrical heating, lighting system - Cable selection - Energy efficient motors -
Factors involved in determination of motor efficiency - Adjustable AC drives - Variable speed drives - Energy
efficiency in electrical system.
UNIT V ENERGY MANAGEMENT 9
Organizational background desired for energy management persuasion -Motivation - Publicity role, Tariff analysis
- Industrial energy management systems - Energy monitoring - Auditing and targeting - Economics of various
energy conservation schemes – Energy policy and energy labelling.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Reay.D.A, “Industrial energy conservation”, Pergamon Press, 1st edition, 2003.
2. White.L.C, “Industrial Energy Management and Utilization”, Hemisphere Publishers, 2002.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Smith.C.B, “Energy Management Principles”, Pergamon Press, 2006.
2. Trivedi.P.R and Jolka.K.R, “Energy Management”, Common Wealth Publication, 2002.
EXTENSIVE READING:
1. Hamies, “Energy Auditing and Conservation; Methods, Measurements, Management and Case study”,
Hemisphere, 2003.
15CEA08 ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To understand the concepts of sustainability and EIA
To expose the students to the need, methodology of EIA
To realize the documentation and application of Environmental Impact Assessment
To Understand the pollution control methods
To develop the skill to prepare Environmental Management Plan
129
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course student will be able to
Identify the impact on environment by the Infrastructural projects
Impart the knowledge in legal and regulatory aspect in India according to MoEF.
Comprehend the various components of EIA and its methods.
Appreciate the Methodologies, prediction and Assessment.
Prepare Environmental Management plan for Infrastructure engineering project.
COURSE PREREQUISITE:
Knowledge on environmental science
UNIT I BASIC FUNDAMENTALS COMPONENTS OF EIA 9
Historical Development of Environmental Impact Assessment - EIA in Project Cycle - Legal and Regulatory
Aspects in India - Types and Limitations of EIA - Cross Sectorial Issues and terms of references in EIA - Public
Participation in EIA.: EIA Process- Screening and Scoping - Setting - Analysis and Mitigation.
UNIT II METHODOLOGY 9
Matrices - Networks - Checklists - Connections and Combinations of Processes-Cost benefit analysis - Analysis
of Alternative - Software Packages for EIA - Expert Systems in EIA.
UNIT III PREDICTION AND ASSESSMENT 9
Prediction tools for EIA - Mathematical modelling for impact prediction - Assessment of Impacts on Air, Water and
Soil - Assessment of Impacts on Biological Community - Cumulative Impact Assessment - Documentation of EIA
findings -Report Preparation.
UNIT IV SOCIO-ECONOMIC IMPACT ASSESSMENT 9
Definition of Social Impact Assessment - Social Impact Assessment model and the planning process - Rationale
and measurement for SIA variables- Relationship between social impacts and change in community and
institutional arrangements - Individual and family level impacts - Communities in transition - Neighbourhood and
community impacts - Selecting, testing and understanding significant social impacts - Mitigation and
enhancement in social assessment - Environmental costing of projects.
UNIT V ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN 9
Environmental Management Plan - Preparation - EMP - Implementation and Review - Mitigation and
Rehabilitation plans - Policy and guidelines for planning and monitoring programmes - Post Project Audit - Ethical
and Quality aspects of Environmental Impact Assessment - Case Studies - EIA related to infrastructure,
Construction and Housing - Mining - Industrial Projects - Thermal Power - River Valley and Hydroelectric- Coastal
Projects -Nuclear Power.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Petts, J., “Handbook of Environmental Impact Assessment, Vol., I and II”, Blackwell science, London, 1999.
2. Canter, L.W., “Environmental Impact Assessment”, McGraw Hill, New York, 1996
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Lawrence, D.P., “Environmental Impact Assessment – Practical Solutions to recurrent problems”, Wiley-
Interscience, New Jersey, 2003.
130
15CEA09 FUNDAMENTALS OF SUPPLY CHAIN L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To introduce the fundamentals of the supply chain.
To provide knowledge on designing the supply chain network
To provide exposure on various types of facility location and network design
To impart knowledge on planning and managing of inventories in a supply chain.
To provide experience on sourcing, transportation and pricing products.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the students will be able to;
Comprehend the concepts behind the supply chain network.
Design the supply chain network.
Locate the facilities and design the network.
Plan and manage the inventories in a supply chain.
Do the sourcing, transportation and pricing products.
COURSE PREREQUISITE:
Knowledge on Engineering Economics & Cost analysis
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO SUPPLY CHAIN 9
Supply chain systems -Stages and decision phases and process view of supply chain - Supply chain flows -
Examples of supply chains -Competitive supply chain strategies -Drivers for supply chain performance.
UNIT II DESIGNING THE SUPPLY CHAIN NETWORK 9
Distribution Networking –Role, Design - Supply Chain Network - SCN – Role –Factors -Framework for design
decisions.
UNIT III FACILITY LOCATION AND NETWORK DESIGN 9
Models for facility location and capacity location - Impact of uncertainty on SCN -Discounted cash flow analysis -
Evaluating network design decisions using decision trees - Analytical problems.
UNIT IV PLANNING AND MANAGING OF INVENTORIES IN A SUPPLY CHAIN 9
Inventory concepts -Trade promotions -Managing multi-echelon cycle inventory -Safety inventory determination -
Impact of supply uncertainty aggregation and replenishment.
UNITV SOURCING, TRANSPORTATION AND PRICING PRODUCTS 9
Role of sourcing -Supplier- Scoring and assessment - Selection and contracts -Design collaboration -Role of
transportation -Models of transportation and designing transportation network - Revenue management.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Blanchard, D., “Supply chain management: Best practices”, John Wiley &Sons,New Jersey,2007.
2. Simchi-Levi, David, Xin Chen, and JulienBramel,“The Logic of Logistics: Theory, Algorithms, andApplications
for Logistics and Supply Chain Management” 2nd
edition. Springer, New York, 2004.
131
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Graves, S. C., and A. G. De Kok, “Handbook in operations research and management science” Vol.
11,Elsevier Publishing Company, 2003.
15CEA10 COASTAL ENGINEERING L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To provide knowledge on various aspects of coastal engineering
To provide an overview of the analysis and design procedures used in the field of coastal engineering
To understand the various issues connected with coastal sediment transport
To familiarize with planning and design of various coastal protection works
To impart knowledge on various types of modeling aspects
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course the student will be able to
Acquire knowledge on wave theory
Apply these engineering principles to solve the problems
Understand the basic concepts of coastal sediment transport
Design shore defense structures
Develop site specific physical and numerical models
COURSE PREREQUISITE:
Knowledge on Water Resources Engineering
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO COASTAL ENGINEERING 9
Introduction - Wind and waves - Sea and Swell - Introduction to small amplitude wave theory -Use of wave
tables- Mechanics of water waves - Linear (Airy) wave theory.
UNIT II WAVE PROPERTIES AND ANALYSIS 9
Introduction to non-linear waves and their properties - Waves in shallow waters - Wave Refraction - Diffraction
and Shoaling - Hinds east wave generation models -Wave shoaling -Wave refraction -Wave breaking - Wave
diffraction random and 3D waves- Short term wave analysis -Wave spectra and its utilities - Long term wave
analysis- Statistics analysis of grouped wave data
UNIT III COASTAL SEDIMENT TRANSPORT 9
Dynamic beach profile -Cross-shore transport -Along shore transport (Littoral transport) -Sediment movement
UNIT IV COASTAL DEFENSE 9
Field measurement -Models, groins, sea walls, offshore breakwaters and artificial nourishment -Planning of coast
protection works - Design of shore defence structures –Case studies
UNIT V MODELING IN COASTAL ENGINEERING 9
Physical modeming in Coastal Engineering - Limitations and advantages - Role of physical modelling in coastal
engineering - Numerical modelling - Modelling aspects -Limitations - Case studies using public domain models
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
132
TEXT BOOKS:
1. US Army Corps of Engineers, “Coastal Engineering Manual, Vol. I-VI”, Coastal Engineering Research
Centre, Department of the Army, Washington DC, 2006.
2. Kamphuis, J.W. “Introduction to Coastal Engineering and Management”, 2000.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. US Army Corps of Engineers, “Coastal Engineering Manual, Vol. I-VI”, Coastal Engineering Research
Centre, Department of the Army, Washington DC, 2006.
2. Kamphuis, J.W. “ Introduction to Coastal Engineering and Management”, 2000
3. Dean, R.G. and Dalrymple, R.A. “ Water wave mechanics for Engineers and Scientists”, Prentice-Hall, Inc.,
Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey, 1994
4. Sorenson, R.M. “Basic Coastal Engineering”, Wiley-Interscience Publication, New York, 1978.
15CEA11 MANUFACTURING COST ESTIMATION L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To understand the basics of cost estimation and different types of cost estimating methods.
To impart clear knowledge on cost and various factory expenses.
To gain knowledge on budget and measures of cost economics.
To compute the cost estimation in different shops.
To calculate machining time and cost for the different process.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Comprehend the different types of cost estimating methods.
Gain knowledge on calculating cost and expenses of various factory processes.
Acquire knowledge on measures of cost economics and able to create budget for the industry.
Calculate the process cost involved in different shops.
Work out machining time and cost for the different process.
COURSE PREREQUISITE:
Knowledge on Estimation
UNIT I COST ESTIMATION 9
Objective of cost estimation- Costing -Cost accounting- Classification of cost-Elements of cost- Types of
estimates -Methods of estimates -Data requirements and sources- Collection of cost- Allowances in estimation.
UNIT II COSTS AND EXPENSES 9
Aims of costing and estimation - Functions and procedure - Introduction to costs- Computing material cost- Direct
labor cost-Analysis of overhead costs - Factory expenses-Administrative expenses-Selling and distributing
expenses - Cost ladder - Cost of product.
UNIT III COST ECONOMICS 9
Budget -Need and Types - Budgetary control - Objectives and Benefits - Measures of cost economics - Make or
buy decision and Analysis - Depreciation - Causes of depreciation -Methods of Depreciation - Allocation of
overheads.
133
UNIT IV ESTIMATION OF COSTS IN DIFFERENT SHOPS 9
Estimation in Forging shop - Losses in forging - Forging cost-Estimation in welding shop - Gas cutting - Electric
welding-Estimation in foundry shop - Pattern cost - Casting cost - Illustrative examples.
UNIT V ESTIMATION OF MACHINING TIMES AND COSTS 9
Estimation of machining time for lathe operations - Drilling, Boring, Shaping, Planning, Milling and Grinding
operations - Illustrative examples.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. R. Kesavan, C. Elanchezhian, B. VijayaRamanath, “Process Planning And Cost Estimation”, New Age
International (P) Ltd., Second Edition, 2015
2. Chitale.A.K and Gupta.R.C, “Product Design and manufacturing”, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, Sixth
Edition, 2013.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Adithan. M, “Process Planning and Cost Estimation”, New Age International (P) Ltd., Second Edition, 2015.
2. Banga.T.R and Sharma.S.C, “Mechanical Estimating and Costing including contracting”, Khanna publishers,
New Delhi, 2012.
3. Joseph G. Monks, “Operations Management, Theory and Problems”, McGraw Hill Book Company, New
Delhi, 2001.
4. Narang.G.B.S and Kumar.V, “Production and Planning”, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, Fourth edition 2010.
5. Adithan.M. and Pabla.B.S, “Estimating and costing for the Metal Manufacturing Industries”, CRC press,
1992.
Offered by EEE Department
15EEA01 INDUSTRIAL INSTRUMENTATION L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To impart knowledge on
Measurement of force, torque and speed.
Measurement of industrial parameters like acceleration, Vibration and density.
Monitoring techniques for pressure in industrial process.
Advanced techniques for temperature and high temperature measurement.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course students will be able to
Analyze Instrumentation systems and explain their applications to various industries.
Measure the changes in pressure, temperature in an industry.
COURSE PREREQUISITES:
Basics of measurements standards – Instrumentation system – Basic knowledge on industrial process.
UNITI CHARACTERISTICS, ERRORS & STANDARDS OF INSTRUMENTS 9
Functional elements of generalized instrumentation systems- Static and dynamic characteristics of measuring
instruments- Absolute, gross, systematic, random and limiting errors in measurements - Statistical estimation of
134
measurements data (Arithmetic mean, Average deviation, Standard deviation, Variance and Probable error of
mean) – Standards and calibration.
UNITII MEASUREMENT OF ACCELERATION, VIBRATION AND FORCE 9
Accelerometers: - LVDT, Piezoelectric, Strain gauge and Variable reluctance type accelerometers - Seismic
instruments as accelerometer - Vibration sensor. Different types of load cells - Hydraulic, Pneumatic, strain
gauge and Piezoelectric load cells
UNITIII PRESSURE MEASUREMENT 9
Units of pressure – Manometers and their types,-McLeod Gauge-Elastic type pressure gauges: Bourdon tube,
bellows and diaphragms - Capacitive type pressure gauge – Piezo-resistive pressure sensor- Thermal
conductivity gauges – Ionization gauge - calibration of pressure gauges.Dead weight tester.
UNITIV LOW TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENT 9
Definitions and standards - Primary and secondary fixed points - Calibration of thermometers - Different types of
filled in system thermometers - Bimetallic thermometers - RTD - characteristics and signal conditioning-3 lead
and 4 lead RTDs - Thermistors.
UNITV HIGH TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENT 9
Thermocouples - Laws of thermocouple - Fabrication of industrial thermocouples – Compensating cable- Signal
conditioning for thermocouple - Radiation fundamentals - Radiation methods of temperature measurement - Total
radiation pyrometers - Optical pyrometers.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Doebellin, E.O.and Manik D.N., “Measurement systems Application and Design”, Special Indian Edition,
Tata McGraw Hill Education Pvt. Ltd, 2007.
2. Jones. B.E, "Instrument Technology”, Vol.2, Butterworth-Heinemann, International Edition, 2003.
3. A. K. Sawhney, Puneet Sawhney, “Course in Mechanical Measurements and Instrumentation and
Control”, Dhanpat Rai & Sons, New Delhi, 2013.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Liptak, B.G., “Instrumentation Engineers Handbook (Measurement)”, CRC Press, 2005
2. Patranabis,D., “Principles of Industrial Instrumentation”, 3rd Edition, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing
Company Ltd., New Delhi, 2010.
3. Eckman D.P., “Industrial Instrumentation”, Wiley Eastern Limited, 2003.
4. S.K.Singh., “Industrial Instrumentation and Control”, 3rd Edition, Tata McGraw - Hill Education, 2008.
5. Jain, R.K., “Mechanical and Industrial Measurements”, Khanna Publishers, Delhi, 1999.
15EEA02 Illumination Engineering L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To impart in-depth knowledge on illumination and requirements of energy efficient lighting.
To make the students familiar with measurement of illumination.
To make the students design a lighting scheme.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, students will be able to
135
Explicate the different types of lighting schemes.
Elucidate the measurement of light.
Explain the working of different lamps.
Demonstrate the ability to design illumination systems for desired specifications.
Demonstrate the awareness of impact of energy conservation approach to illumination systems.
COURSE PREREQUISITES:
Basics of Electrical Engineering, awareness about artificial lighting, Energy Conservation, Algebra, Trigonometry.
UNITI LIGHTING FUNDAMENTALS 9
Nature of light – Importance of lighting –sensitivity of eye – colour sensation – Quantum theory of light – Terms
used in illumination – Polar Curve – Laws of illumination – Illumination at a point – Types of reflection – Types of
lighting schemes – Requirements of good lighting – Stroboscopic effect – Factory lighting – Flood lighting –
Street lighting.
UNITII PHOTOMETRY 9
Grease Spot Photometer Head – Lummer - Brodhun Photometer Head – Flicker Photometer – Measurement of
MSCP by Integrating Sphere – Photovoltaic cell – Distribution photometry – Illumination Photometer.
UNITIII LAMPS AND FITTINGS 9
Filament lamps – Arc lamps – Fluorescent lamps – Mercury Vapour lamps – Sodium Vapour lamps – Halogen
lamps – Neon lamps – Induction lamps – Emergency Lamps –lighting for displays and signaling – neon signs,
Lamp fittings – Symmetrical fittings, Asymmetrical fittings.
UNITIV LIGHTING DESIGN AND CALCULATIONS 9
Basic design of illumination schemes for residential, commercial, street lighting, and sports ground. Selection of
lamps – Calculation of wattage, number and arrangement of lamps – Space height ratio – Calculation of
illumination level available.
UNITV ENERGY EFFICIENT LAMPS AND WIRING METHODOLOGY 9
Compact Fluorescent Lamp (CFL) – Selection of CFL – Lumens output – Disposal of waste CFL – Limitations of
CFL – Cold Cathode CFL, LED – Terminologies – Choice of LED Lamps for different lighting requirements –
Benefits of LED lighting – CFL Vs LED lighting, 12V DC home wiring – Solar powered lamps – Importance –
Constraints in 12V DC wiring – Voltage Regulation devices – wiring and distribution, Necessary Appliances.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Joseph B. Murdoch, "Illumination Engineering from Edison's Lamp to the Laser, second edition, Visions
Comm., 1994.
2. Jack L. Lindsey, "Applied Illumination Engineering" The Fairmont Press Inc., 1991.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Ronald N. Helms, M. Clay Beicher, "Lighting for Energy Efficient Luminous Environments", Prentice
Hall, 1991.
2. Marc Schiler, "Simplified Design of Building Lighting" John Wiley and Sons, 1992.
3. IES Lighting Handbook, 8th edition, 1993.
4. C.L. Wadhwa, ‘Generation, Distribution and Utilization of Electrical Energy’, New Age International Pvt.
Ltd, Third Edition 2015.
5. J.B. Gupta, ‘Utilization of Electric Power and Electric Traction’, S.K.Kataria and Sons, Eleventh Edition
2015.
136
6. G.C.Garg, ‘Utilization of Electric Power and Electric Traction’, Khanna Publishers, Ninth Edition 2009.
7. A.Chakrabarti, M.L.Soni, P.V.Gupta, U.S.Bhatnagar, ‘A text Book on Power System Engineering”,
Dhanpat Rai and Co, New Delhi, 2009.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://energy.gov/energysaver/articles/induction-lighting-old-lighting-technology-made-new-again
2. http://www.buildings.com/article-details/articleid/18718/title/led-vs-induction-lighting/viewall/true.aspx
3. http://www.edisontechcenter.org/InductionLamps.html
4. http://eartheasy.com/live_energyeff_lighting.htm
5. http://dreamgreenhouse.com/designs/12v/index.php
6. http://www.treehugger.com/sustainable-product-design/big-steps-in-building-change-our-wiring-to-12-
volt-dc.html
7. https://www.nelt.co.jp/english/products/ccfl/about.html
L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To impart knowledge on
Different types of power semi-conductor devices and their switching characteristics.
Operation, characteristics and performance parameters of controlled rectifiers.
Operation, switching techniques and basic topologies of DC-DC switching regulators.
Different modulation techniques of pulse width modulated inverters and to understand the harmonic
reduction methods.
Operation of AC voltage controllers
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course students will be able to
Identify and select the switching devices for different power converter applications.
Design a suitable DC power supply for given load specification from AC or DC supply.
Design and analyze the single or three phase inverter.
Analyze the AC voltage controller
COURSE PREREQUISITES:
Semiconductor physics, Steady state operation of single phase AC circuits, Differentiation, Integration and
Fourier series
UNITI POWER SEMI-CONDUCTOR DEVICES 9
Introduction to Power Electronics - Study of switching devices: structure, operation, static and switching
characteristics of SCR, TRIAC, BJT, MOSFET, IGBT-SCR: Two Transistor model, turn on circuits and
commutation circuits
UNITII PHASE-CONTROLLED CONVERTERS 9
1-pulse, 2-pulse converters - circuit, operation, waveforms - Estimation of average load voltage and average
load current for continuous current operation - Input power factor estimation for ripple free load current
UNITIII DC TO DC CONVERTER 9
Step-down and step-up chopper - Time ratio control and current limit control – Buck, boost, buck-boost
converter-Isolated Converters: Fly back and Forward converter
15EEA03 SWITCHED MODE POWER
CONVERTERS
137
UNITIV INVERTERS 9
Single phase and three phase inverters (both 1200
mode and 1800 mode) - PWM techniques: single, multiple,
sinusoidal PWM, modified sinusoidal PWM – Voltage and harmonic control
UNITV AC TO AC CONVERTERS 9
Single phase AC voltage controllers –Integral cycle control, phase angle control - Estimation of RMS load
voltage, RMS load current and input power factor - Single phase cycloconverter
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Muhammad H.Rashid, “Power Electronics Circuits, Devices and Applications”, Pearson Publication, 4th
Edition, 2004.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Mohan, Undeland, Robbins,”Power Electronics: Converters Applications and Design”, John Wiley &
Sons, 3rd Edition, 2003
2. Robert W. Erickson, Dragan Maksimovic, “Fundamentals of Power Electronics”, Springer Science &
Business Media, 2nd
edition 2001.
15EEA04 POWER PLANT INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To impart knowledge on
Power generation through various methods.
Importance of measuring devices in power plant.
Boiler control techniques and turbine control techniques.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course students will be able to
Demonstrate the measurement of various power plant parameters.
Implement various Control techniques in power generation process.
COURSE PREREQUISITES:
Basics of Measurements & instrumentation – Power plant working concepts - Knowledge on power plant
parameters controls – Fundamentals of control system.
UNITI MEASUREMENTS & INSTRUMENTATION IN POWER PLANT - I 9
Importance of measurement and instrumentation in power plant. Measurement of water purity- Measurement of
dissolved oxygen in feed water- Measurement of PH value of water- Measurement of O2,CO2, and CO content in
the gases - Measurement of Smoke and Dust- Dosimeters.
UNITII MEASUREMENTS & INSTRUMENTATION IN POWER PLANT - II 9
Measurement of feed water flow, air flow, steam flow and coal flow – Drum level measurement – Steam pressure
and temperature measurement – Turbine speed and vibration measurement.
UNITIII BOILER CONTROL 9
Combustion of fuel and excess air – Firing rate demand – Steam temperature control – Drum level control –
138
Single, two and three element control – Furnace draft control–flue gas dew point control.
UNITIV BURNER MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 9
Burners for liquid and solid fuels – Burner management – Furnace safety interlocks – Coal pulverizer control –
Combustion control for liquid and solid fuel fired boilers – air/fuel ratio control.
UNITV CONTROL OF TURBINE 9
Types of steam turbines – impulse and reaction turbines – compounding – Turbine governing system – Speed
and Load control- Basics of Automatic Load Frequency Control- Free Governor Mode of Operation (FGMO) -
Restricted Governor Mode of Operation (RGMO).
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. S.C.Arora,S. Domkundwar, “ Power plant Engineering”, Dhanpat Rai &Co (P)Ltd,2015.
2. Sam Dukelow, “Control of Boilers”, Instrument Society of America, 2009.
3. Everett Woodruff , Herbert Lammers, Thomas Lammers, “Steam Plant Operation”,9th Edition
McGraw Hill, 2012.
4. Rajput R.K., “A Text book of Power plant Engineering”. 5th Edition, Lakshmi Publications, 2013.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Liptak B.G., “Instrumentation in Process Industries”, Chilton Book Company, 2005.
2. Jain R.K., “Mechanical and Industrial Measurements”, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 2010.
3. P.K.Nag, “Powerplant Engineering”, Tata McGraw-Hill Education, 3rd edition, 2007.
4. Tamilmani, “Power plant instrumentation”, Sams Publishers, 2011.
5. Krishnaswamy.K and Ponnibala.M., “Power Plant Instrumentation”, PHI Learning Pvt.Ltd., New
Delhi, 2011.
15EEA05 Electrical Machines and Drives
L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To impart knowledge on
The basic concepts of different types of electrical machines and their performance.
The different methods of starting D.C motors and induction motors.
Conventional and solid-state DC and AC drives.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course students will be able to
Demonstrate the concepts and different types of electrical machines.
Deliver the impact of starting D.C motors and induction motors.
Explain about conventional and solid-state DC and AC drives.
COURSE PREREQUISITES:
Fundamentals of Electrical Engineering
UNITI INTRODUCTION TO D.C. MACHINES 9
DC Machine – Construction – DC generator - Principle of operation – EMF equation – Self and separately excited
generators – Characteristics of series, shunt and compound generators. DC motor–Principle of operation – Back
139
emf and torque equation – characteristics - applications.
UNITII A.C. MACHINES 9
Alternators – Construction – Types – Induced EMF – Voltage regulation – EMF and MMF methods. Three-phase
induction motors – Construction – Types – Principle of operation – slip-torque characteristics. Single-phase
induction motors – Construction–Types– Principle of operation.
UNITIII STARTING METHODS 9
Types of D.C Motor starters – Two point, three point and four point starter. Types of A.C Motor starters – DOL,
Auto transformer, Star-Delta and Rotor Resistance starter.
UNITIV CONVENTIONAL AND SOLID STATE SPEED CONTROL OF D.C.
DRIVES (Qualitative treatment only)
9
Speed control of DC series and shunt motors – Armature and field control, Ward- Leonard control system - Using
controlled rectifiers and DC choppers (Circuit diagram and operation) –applications.
UNITV CONVENTIONAL AND SOLID STATE SPEED CONTROL
OF A.C. DRIVES (Qualitative treatment only)
9
Speed control of three phase induction motor – Voltage control, V/f control, slip power recovery scheme – Using
inverters and AC voltage regulators (Circuit diagram and operation)– applications.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. A K Theraja & B L Theraja “A Text Book of Electrical Technology Vol-2,” 23rd
Edition S.Chand
Publications, 2007.
2. Dubey G.K., “Fundamentals of Electrical Drives”, Narosa Publishing House, Second Edition, 2015.
.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. P.C.Sen.,“Principles of Electrical Machines and Power Electronics”, Second Edition ,Wiley India Pvt.
Lt&Sons. 2013.
2. K. Murugesh Kumar, “Electric Machines”, Vikas publishing house Pvt Ltd, 2002.
3. M.D.Singh, K.B.Khanchandani, “Power Electronics”, Second Edition, McGraw-Hill, 2002.
4. Vedam Subramanyam, “Electric Drives – Concepts and Applications”, Second Edition, McGraw Hill,
2010.
5. Nagrath .I.J. & Kothari .D.P, “Electrical Machines”, Fourth Edition, McGraw-Hill, 2010.
15EEA06 Real Time Embedded Systems
L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To impart knowledge on
The architecture and programming of ARM processor.
The embedded computing platform design and analysis.
The basic concepts of real time Operating system.
The fundamentals of filters.
The system design techniques and networks for embedded systems
140
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the students will be able to:
Describe the architecture and programming of ARM processor..
Explain the basic concepts of real time Operating system design.
Use the system design techniques to develop software for embedded systems.
Model real-time applications using embedded-system concepts.
COURSE PREREQUISITES:
Basics of Microprocessor and Microcontrollers
UNITI INTRODUCTION TO EMBEDDED COMPUTING AND ARM
PROCESSORS
9
Complex systems and microprocessors– Embedded system design process –Design example: Model train
controller- Instruction sets preliminaries – ARM Processor – CPU: programming input and output- supervisor
mode, exceptions and traps – Co-processors- Memory system mechanisms – CPU performance- CPU power
consumption.
UNITII EMBEDDED COMPUTING PLATFORM AND DESIGN ANALYSIS 9
CPU buses – Memory devices – I/O devices – Component interfacing – Design with microprocessors –
Development and Debugging – Program design – Model of programs – Assembly and Linking – Basic
compilation techniques – Analysis and optimization of execution time, power, energy, program size – Program
validation and testing.
UNITIII PROCESSES AND OPERATING SYSTEMS 9
Multiple tasks and multi processes – Processes – Context Switching – Operating Systems –Scheduling policies -
Multiprocessor – Inter Process Communication mechanisms – Evaluating operating system performance – Power
optimization strategies for processes.
UNITIV SYSTEM DESIGN TECHNIQUES AND NETWORKS 9
Design methodologies- Design flows – Requirement Analysis – Specifications-System analysis and architecture
design – Quality Assurance techniques- Distributed embedded systems – MPSoCs and shared memory
multiprocessors.
UNITV CASE STUDY 9
Data compressor – Alarm Clock – Audio player – Software modem-Digital still camera – Telephone answering
machine-Engine control unit – Video accelerator.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Wayne Wolf, “Computers as Components - Principles of Embedded Computer System Design”, Morgan
Kaufmann Publisher, 2006.
2. Marilyn Wolf, “Computers as Components – Principles of Embedded Computing System Design”, Third
Edition “Morgan Kaufmann Publisher (An imprint from Elsevier), 2012.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Jonathan W.Valvano, “Embedded Microcomputer Systems Real Time Interfacing”, Third Edition
Cengage Learning, 2012.
2. David. E. Simon, “An Embedded Software Primer”, 1st Edition, Fifth Impression, Addison-Wesley
Professional, 2007.
3. Raymond J.A. Buhr, Donald L.Bailey, “An Introduction to Real-Time Systems- From Design to
Networking with C/C ”, Prentice Hall, 1999.
4. C.M. Krishna, Kang G. Shin, “Real-Time Systems”, International Editions, Mc Graw Hill 1997
5. K.V.K.K.Prasad, “Embedded Real-Time Systems: Concepts, Design & Programming”, Dream Tech
141
Press, 2005.
6. Sriram V Iyer, Pankaj Gupta, “Embedded Real Time Systems Programming”, Tata Mc Graw Hill, 2004.
15EEA07 Fundamentals of Electric Power Utilization
L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To impart knowledge on
Different types of lamps
Methods of heating and welding
Refrigeration and Air Conditioning
Electrolytic processes and storage of electricity
Electric traction systems
Electrical energy conservation
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, students will be able to
Elucidate the working of various electric lamps and the various types of electric heating, electric welding
and design a heating element
Explain the working principle of refrigerators and Air Conditioning System
Explain about electrolytic processes and storage of electricity
Explain about electric traction.
Explicate the importance of electrical energy conservation and apply various measures for economic
aspects of utilising electrical energy
COURSE PREREQUISITES:
Basics of Electrical Engineering, Effects of electric current, Chemical reactions in electrolyte, awareness about
artificial lighting, refrigeration and air conditioning, Characteristics and application of different electric motors,
awareness about traction, Algebra, Trigonometry.
UNITI ILLUMINATION, INDUSTRIAL HEATING AND WELDING 9
Different types of lamps - incandescent – fluorescent – mercury vapour lamps.
Role of electric heating for industrial applications – resistance heating – induction heating – dielectric heating -
electric arc furnaces.
Brief introduction to electric welding – welding generator, welding transformer and their characteristics.
UNITII REFRIGERATION AND AIR CONDITIONING 9
Principle of a refrigerator – Vapour Compression System – Mechanical and Electrical circuits – Voltage Regulator
– Water Cooler – Coefficient of Performance – Standard rating – Maintenance and trouble shooting of
refrigerators – Air conditioning system – Types – operation – Mechanical and Electrical circuits – Cooling
capacity – Thermo-electric Refrigeration – Central Air Conditioning System.
UNITIII ELECTROLYTIC PROCESSES AND STORAGE OF ELECTRICITY 9
Electrolysis, Faraday’s laws of Electrolysis – Electroplating – Electrical Equipments – Agitation and Filtration
Plant – Extraction and refining of metals – Storage of Electricity – Lead Acid Battery – Characteristics –
Indications of a fully charged battery – Nickel iron and Nickel cadmium batteries – Applications –Capacity rating
of batteries – Charging and maintenance of batteries – Battery chargers.
142
UNITIV ELECTRIC TRACTION 9
Merits of electric traction – requirements of electric traction system – supply systems – traction motors – d.c.
series motor – mechanics of train movement – Speed Time curve –tractive effort – specific energy consumption.
UNITV ECONOMIC ASPECTS OF ELECTRICAL ENERGY UTILISATION 9
Introduction to Energy conservation and Energy auditing - Tools for Energy auditing – Energy conservation in
Chemical industry, Pulp and Paper industry, Sugar industry, Cement industry, Textile industry, Iron and Steel
Industry – Energy Conservation in household and commercial sectors – Energy Conservation Legislation –
Tariffs - Influence of power factor – The most economic power factor - PF improvement.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. C.L. Wadhwa, ‘Generation, Distribution and Utilization of Electrical Energy’, New Age International Pvt.
Ltd, Third Edition 2015.
2. E. Openshaw Taylor, ‘Utilization of Electrical Energy in SI Units’, Orient Longman Pvt. Ltd, Eleventh
Edition 2007.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. H. Partab, ‘Art and Science of Utilisation of Electrical Energy’, Dhanpat Rai and Co, New Delhi, Third
Edition 2014.
2. J.B. Gupta, ‘Utilization of Electric Power and Electric Traction’, S.K.Kataria and Sons, Eleventh Edition
2015.
3. G.C.Garg, ‘Utilization of Electric Power and Electric Traction’, Khanna Publishers, Ninth Edition 2009.
4. A.Chakrabarti, M.L.Soni, P.V.Gupta, U.S.Bhatnagar, ‘A text Book on Power System Engineering”,
Dhanpat Rai and Co, New Delhi, 2009.
5. N.V.Suryanarayana, ‘Utilisation of Electric Power: Including Electric Drives and Electric Traction’, New
Age International Publishers, Second Edition 2014.
6. V.K.Mehta, Rohit Mehta, ‘Basic Electrical Engineering’, S.Chand Limited, 2008.
15EEA08 Soft Computing Techniques and Applications L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To provide an introduction to the emerging area of intelligent control and optimization.
To impart knowledge on expert systems, fuzzy logic systems, artificial neural networks and optimization
techniques.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, students will be able to
Explain the concept of intelligent control and their applications.
Analyze Fuzzy Logic and Artificial Neural Networks through case studies.
Design Genetic Algorithms system through case study.
COURSE PREREQUISITES:
Basic understanding of problem solving, design and analysis of algorithms, Algebra, Elementary differential
Calculus, probability, basic knowledge on human nervous system and nervous cells.
143
UNITI INTRODUCTION 9
Approaches to intelligent control – Architecture for intelligent control – Symbolic reasoning system – rule-based
systems – the AI approach – Knowledge representation – Expert systems.
UNITII ARTIFICIAL NEURAL NETWORKS 9
Concept of Artificial Neural Network and its basic mathematical model – McCulloch-Pitts neuron model – simple
perceptron – Adaline and Madaline – Feed-forward Multilayer Perceptron – Learning and Training the neural
network – Hopfield network – Self-organizing network – Neural Network based controller.
UNITIII GENETIC ALGORITHM AND ANT-COLONY OPTIMIZATION
TECHNIQUE
9
Basic concept of Genetic algorithm and detailed algorithmic steps – Flowchart – GA operators – adjustment of
GA parameters – Concept of ant-colony search technique for solving optimization problems.
UNITIV FUZZY LOGIC SYSTEM 9
Introduction to crisp sets and fuzzy sets – basic fuzzy set operation and approximate reasoning – Introduction to
fuzzy logic modeling and control – Fuzzification – inferencing and defuzzification – Fuzzy knowledge and rule
bases.
UNITV APPLICATIONS 9
Applications of Neural Network to engineering problems – GA applications to engineering optimisation problems
– Fuzzy modeling and control schemes for non-linear systems.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Sivanandam S.N., Deepa S.N., “Principles of Soft Computing”, Wiley India Pvt. Ltd., Reprint 2012.
2. Jang J.S.R., Sun C.T. and Mizutani E., “Neuro-Fuzzy and Soft Computing: A Computational Approach
to Learning and Machine Intelligence”, PHI Learning Private Limited, New Delhi, 2014.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Jacek.M.Zurada, “Introduction to Artificial Neural Systems”, Jaico Publishing House, 1999.
2. Klir G.J., Folger T.A., “Fuzzy sets, uncertainty and Information”, Prentice-Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., 1993.
3. Zimmerman H.J., “Fuzzy set theory-and its Applications”, Kluwer Academic Publishers, 1994.
4. Driankov D., Hellendoorn H., Reinfrank M., “Introduction to Fuzzy Control”, Narosa Publishers, 2001.
5. Goldberg D.E., “Genetic algorithms in Search, Optimization and Machine learning”, Addison Wesley,
1989.
6. Padhy N.P., “Artificial Intelligence and Intelligent System, Oxford University Press, 2005.
7. Allain Bonnet, “Artificial Intelligence – Promise and Performance, Prentice Hall International Publishers,
1985.
8. Sivanandam S.N., Paulraj M., “Introduction to Artificial Neural Networks”, Vikas Publishing House Pvt.
Ltd., First Edition, 2003.
9. Donald A. Waterman, “A Guide to Expert Systems”, Addison-Wesley Publishers, Second Edition, 1993.
15EEA09 FUNDAMENTALS OF POWER QUALITY
L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To impart knowledge on
144
Various Power Quality issues.
Power quality problems and methods of control.
Various methods of power quality monitoring and suppression.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course students will be able to
Analyze the various power quality issues.
Analyze the power quality events and assessment.
Mitigate the power quality problems using relevant devices.
COURSE PREREQUISITES:
Fundamentals of Electrical Engineering
UNITI INTRODUCTION TO POWER QUALITY 9
Terms and definitions: Overloading, under voltage, sustained interruption; sags and swells; waveform distortion,
Total Harmonic Distortion (THD), Computer Business Equipment Manufacturers Associations (CBEMA) curve.
UNITII VOLTAGE SAGS ANDSWELLS 9
Sources of sags and interruptions, estimating voltage sag performance, motor starting sags, estimating the sag
severity, fast transfer switches- Sources of over voltages: Capacitor switching, lightning, ferro-resonance;
mitigation of voltage swells
UNITIII HARMONICS 9
Harmonic distortion: Voltage and current distortion, THD-TDD, harmonic sources from commercial and industrial
loads, locating harmonic sources- resonance-harmonic distortion evaluation, devices for controlling harmonic
distortion, passive filters, active filters
UNITIV Power Quality Benchmarking 9
Benchmarking Process-RMS voltage variation Indices-Harmonic Indices-Power Quality Contracts-Power Quality
Insurance
UNITV POWER QUALITY MONITORING 9
Monitoring consideration-Power quality measurement equipment: harmonic / spectrum analyzer, flicker meters,
disturbance analyzer- applications of expert system for power quality monitoring.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Roger.C.Dugan, Mark.F.McGranagham, Surya Santoso, H.Wayne Beaty, “Electrical Power Systems
Quality”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Ltd, New Delhi, Third Edition, 2013.
2. Math H.J.Bollen, “Understanding Power Quality Problems-Voltage Sag & Interruptions”, (New York:
IEEE press, 2000).
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. C.Sankaran, “Power Quality”, CRC press, 2002.
2. Arindam Ghosh, “Power Quality Enhancement Using Custom Power Devices”, Springer International
Edition, 2002
3. PSCAD User Manual.
4. J.Arrilaga, N.R.Watson, S.Chen, “ Power System Quality Assessment”, John Wiley & Sons, 2000.
145
15EEA10 WIRING, ESTIMATION AND COSTING L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To impart knowledge on
Electrical supply systems and its protection equipments
Different wiring methods
Estimation for electrical wiring
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course students will be able to
Address Electrical supply systems and its protection equipments
Explain about different wiring methods
Estimate for a wiring system
COURSE PREREQUISITES:
Fundamentals of Electrical Engineering
UNITI INTRODUCTION 9
Electrical supply system-Three-phase four wire distribution system-Types of domestic loads-Protection against
Electric shock-Earthing- Domestic Wiring Protection equipments: Fuse-Miniature Circuit Breaker – Residual
Current Circuit Breaker or Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker-General requirements of Electrical Installations
UNITII TYPES AND INSTALLATION OF WIRING SYSTEMS 9
Types of wires, Factors influencing the choice of wiring system, Types of wiring system, Conduit Wiring System,
Accessories, Advantages and Disadvantages of Conduit Wiring Systems, IE rules, 1956: rules 50, 56, 57, 58,
60,61 – Internal wiring systems – Looping-in system – Ring system – tree system - Position of switches, cutouts,
main switch board, sub-distribution boards
UNITIII DESIGN OF SIMPLE ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT 9
System of Connection of Appliances and accessories-Schematic diagram and Wiring diagram of Light and Fan
circuits-Wiring diagram of a single tube light controlled by a switch-Alarm circuits without relays-Alarm circuits
with relays
UNITIV ELEMENTS OF ESTIMATION 9
Introduction -Purpose of Estimating and Costing-Qualities of a good Estimator-Essential Elements of Estimating
and Costing-Tender-Guidelines for Inviting Tenders-Quotation-Other Important Factors of Estimating and Costing
UNITV DOMESTIC ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION AND ESTIMATES 9
Estimation of load requirements-Estimation of connected load, Maximum demand, and type of supply required for
a domestic building and related problem- Determination of size of distribution boards – Different types of
commonly available distribution boards-Estimation of Accessories required, wiring materials and labour
requirement for a domestic building and related problem-Pre-commissioning tests for domestic wiring Installation:
Visual Inspection, Testing- Special features applicable for High-Rise apartment buildings
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Uppal S.L, “Electrical Wiring - Estimating and Costing”, Khanna Publishers, 6th
Edition, 2011
2. Giridharan M.K., “ Electrical Systems Design”, I.K. International Publishing House, New Delhi, 2011
146
3. Raina K.B., Bhattacharya S.K., “Electrical Design Estimating and Costing”, New Age International Pvt.
Ltd., Publishers, 1991.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. J.B. Gupta, “A Course in Electrical Installation Estimating and Costing”, S. K. Kataria & Sons, 9th
Edition, 2012
Offered by ECE Department
15ECA01 COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To introduce analog and digital communication techniques.
To impart knowledge on data and pulse communication techniques.
To introduce source and Error control coding.
To develop knowledge on multi–user radio communication
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course students will be able to
Apply analog and digital communication techniques.
Apply data and pulse communication techniques.
Analyze Source and Error control coding.
Utilize multi–user radio communication.
PRE REQUISITES:
Basic knowledge of Bessels function, Time domain and frequency domain signals representation, Basicelectronic circuits,
UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF ANALOG COMMUNICATION 9
Principles of amplitude modulation – AM envelope, frequency spectrum and bandwidth – modulation index
and percent – modulation, AM Voltage distribution, AM powerdistribution – Angle modulation – FM and PM
waveforms – phase deviation and modulation index – frequency deviation and percent modulation – Frequency
analysis of angle modulated waves – Bandwidth requirements for Angle modulated waves.
UNIT II DIGITAL MODULATION TECHNIQUES 9
Amplitude shift keying – frequency shift keying – FSK bit rate and baudrate – FSK transmitter – BW
consideration of FSK – FSK receiver – phase shift keying – binary phase shift keying – QPSK – Quadrature
Amplitude modulation – bandwidth efficiency – DPSK.
UNIT III DATA AND PULSE COMMUNICATION 9
Data Communication:History of Data Communication – Standards Organizations for Data Communication –
Data Communication Circuits – Data Communication Codes – Error Detection and Correction Techniques –
Data communication Hardware – serial and parallel interfaces.
Pulse Communication: Pulse Amplitude Modulation (PAM) – Pulse Time Modulation (PTM) – Pulse code
Modulation (PCM) – Comparison of various Pulse Communication System (PAM – PTM – PCM).
UNIT IV SOURCE AND ERROR CONTROL CODING 9
Entropy – Source encoding theorem – Shannon Fano coding – Huffman coding – mutual information – channel
capacity – channel coding theorem – Error Control Coding – linear block codes.
147
UNIT V MULTI–USER RADIO COMMUNICATION 9
Advanced Mobile Phone System (AMPS) – Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) – Code division
multiple access (CDMA) – Cellular Concept and Frequency Reuse – Channel Assignment and Hand off –
Satellite Communication – Bluetooth.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Wayne Tomasi, “Advanced Electronic Communication Systems”, 6th
Edition, Pearson Education, 2009. 2. Simon Haykin, “Communication Systems”, 4
th Edition, John Wiley & Sons, 2004.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Rappaport T.S, "Wireless Communications: Principles and Practice", 2nd
Edition, Pearson Education, 2007.
2. Martin S.Roden, “Analog and Digital Communication System”, 3rd
Edition, Prentice Hall of India, 2002.
3. B.Sklar,”Digital Communication Fundamentals and Applications” 2nd
Edition PearsonEducation, 2007.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://www.wirelesscommunication.nl/reference/chaptr01/telephon/amps.html
2. http://ecee.colorado.edu/~liue/teaching/comm_standards/gsm/index.html
3. http://edu.eap.gr/pli/pli23/documents/Parallila_Keimena/GSM.pdf
4. https://www.eff.org/files/filenode/global_system_for_mobile_communication_technology.pdf
5. http://users.ece.utexas.edu/~jandrews/publications/cdma_talk.pdf
6. http://nptel.ac.in/courses/106105080/pdf/M5L8.pdf
7. www.intel.com/education/.../lectures/lecture_06_80211bandBT.ppt
15ECA02 MICROPROCESSORS AND APPLICATIONS
L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To apply knowledge of the architecture for programming of 8085 & 8086 microprocessor.
To develop skills in interfacing of peripheral devices with 8085 microprocessor.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course students will be able to
Write assembly language program for 8085 & 8086 microprocessor.
Interface peripheral devices with 8085 & 8086 microprocessor.
Design 8085 and 8086 microprocessor based system.
PRE REQUISITES:
Digital logic circuits, binary and other number systems, electronic circuits, memory and interfacing concepts,
UNITI 8 BIT MICROPROCESSOR ARCHITECTURE AND PROGRAMMING 9
Microprocessor based system blocks – Number system – Address bus – data bus – control bus – Tristate bus –
Data Transfer Scheme – 8085 Microprocessor Architecture – Instruction set – Assembly Language Programming
– Interrupts
148
UNITII 16 BIT MICROPROCESSOR ARCHITECTURE 9
Intel 8086 Internal Architecture – signals– Minimum mode and Maximum mode operation and bus cycles –
Interrupts – Interrupt Service Routines – Memory Interfacing
UNITIII 16 BIT MICROPROCESSOR INSTRUCTION SET AND ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE
PROGRAMMING
9
Programmer’s model of 8086 – operand types – operand addressing – assembler directives,instruction set –
Data transfer group – Arithmetic group – logical group – Flag manipulation group – control transfergroup –
Shift/rotate group – Machine or processor control group – 8086 Assembly Languageprogramming.
UNITIV MICROPROCESSOR PERIPHERAL CHIP INTERFACING
9
Introduction to I/O Ports – Architecture and interfacing of Programmable Peripheral Interface (8255) – Serial
Communication (8251) – Programmable Interval timers (Intel 8253/8254) – Keyboard and Display Controller
(8279)
UNITV SYSTEM DESIGN USING MICROPROCESSORS 9
Switches and LEDs – Seven–segment Displays – D to A converter – A to D converter – Relay, Motor Control –
DC & Stepper Motor – Case studies – Microprocessor based Digital Scale system – Temperature controller –
Traffic Light control
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Ramesh S Gaonkar, “Microprocessor Architecture – Programming and application with 8085”, 4th
Edition,Penram International Publishing, New Delhi, 2000.
2. Douglas V Hall, “Microprocessors and Interfacing, Programming and Hardware” TMH, 2006.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Barry B. Brey, “Intel Microprocessors Architecture Programming and Interfacing”, Pearson Prentice Hall,
2009.
2. M. Rafi Quazzaman, “Microprocessors Theory and Applications” Intel and Motorola prentice Hall of India,
Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2003.
3. A.K. Ray and K.M.Burchandi, “Advanced Microprocessors & Peripherals”, Tata McGraw–Hill Education,
2013.
4. Sunil Mathur, “Microprocessor 8086: Architecture, Programming and Interfacing”, PHI Learning Pvt Ltd.
2011.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://www.zseries.in/embedded%20lab/
2. http://nptel.ac.in/courses/106108100/pdf/Teacher_Slides/mod1/M1L3.pdf
3. http://nptel.ac.in/downloads/106108100/
15ECA03 MATLAB PROGRAMMING L T P C
2 0 2 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To gain knowledge of the MATLAB functions to manipulate complex values, arrays and matrices.
To develop skills in M File Programming and Elementary Solution Methods.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course students will be able to
149
Analyze the MATLAB Concepts and Debugging methods.
Create M–files using IF, SWITCH, FOR, WHILE statements.
Evaluate the results of Elementary Solution Methods.
PRE REQUISITES:
Familiarity with using Windows applications, calculus, Boolean laws, probability,arrays and vectors, use of a
scientific calculator,
UNITI MATLAB CONCEPTS 6+3
Directory and Defined Path – Menus and the toolbar – Saving & Loading Files – Using the command line to call
functions – Computing with MATLAB – Reading and Writing from a file: Reading and Writing data from/to a .mat
file, MATLAB Help System.
Lab Component: Get and Set values – Numerical computations
UNITII DATA STORAGE AND MANIPULATION 6+3
Rational Operators on Single Values – Boolean Operators on Single Values – MATLAB functions to manipulate
complex values – Arrays and Matrices – Declaring a vector – Dot product – Cross Product.
Lab Component: Matrix generators – Data conversion & Data Normalization.
UNITIII GRAPHICS 6+3
2D Graphics: XY– plotting functions, Subplots and Overlay plots – Special Plot types, Bar, Grid, Legend,
Lineseries properties, Semilogx, Regression – 3D Graphics – Mesh – Contour – Developing GUI.
Lab Component: Multiple data sets in one plot – Setting x and y axis limits to match the actual range of the
data using xlim and ylim.
UNITIV m FILE PROGRAMMING 6+3
m-files– syntax guidelines – Nested functions – Placing comments – Control Flow: IF statement, SWITCH
statement, FOR statement, WHILE statement – Program Flow: Arithmetic errors – Indexing errors, Assignment
errors, Struct array errors.
Lab Component: Histogram – Interpolation – Break and Continue – Fibonacci series
UNITV MATHEMATICAL MANIPULATIONS 6+3
Operations – Linear Algebraic Equations : Elementary Solution Methods, Statistics and probability, Special
Matrices– Row reduced echelon form – Inverse, Cofactor, minor
Lab Component: Differential equation solver – factorial finding – Eigenvalues and eigenvectors.
L : 30 ; P : 15 ; TOTAL:45 Periods
TEXTBOOK:
1. Linda Coulson, “MATLAB Programming”, Global Media, Delhi,2009
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. William J. Palm III,” Introduction to Matlab 7 for Engineers”, McGraw Hill, 2005.
2. G. H. Golub and C. F. Van Loan,” Matrix Computations”, 3rd
Editon, Johns Hopkins University
Press,1996.
3. Stephen J. Chapman, “MATLAB Programming for Engineers”, 4th
Edition ThomsonLearning,2007
WEB REFERENCES:
1. www.mathworks.com/academia/student_center/tutorials/launchpad.html
2. http://ocw.mit.edu/resources/res–18–002–introduction–to–matlab–spring–2008/
15ECA04 ANTENNA FUNDAMENTALS L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
150
To introduce the working principles of various types of antenna.
To study various antennas, arrays and radiation patterns of antennas.
To know various techniques involved in various antenna parameter measurements.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course students will be able to
Analyze the properties and parameters of antenna
Analyze the operation of different antennas
Design antenna array systems
PRE REQUISITES:
electromagnetic field theory, analog electronics, Maxwell's equations, electromagnetic wave propagation,
polarization
UNIT I ELECTROMAGNETIC RADIATION AND ANTENNA FUNDAMENTALS
9
Review of electromagnetic theory: Vector potential – Solution of wave equation – retarded vector and scalar
potential –Hertzian dipole. Antenna characteristics: Radiation pattern, Beam solid angle, Directivity, Gain, Input
impedance, Polarization, Beam width, Bandwidth, Reciprocity – Equivalence of Radiation patterns – Equivalence
of Impedances – Effective aperture – Effective length – Antenna temperature.
UNIT II WIRE ANTENNAS
9
EM radiation and working of Short dipole – Radiation resistance and Directivity – Half wave Dipole – Monopole –
Small loop antennas.
UNIT III ANTENNA ARRAYS
9
Linear Array and Pattern Multiplication – Two–element Array – Uniform Array – Polynomial representation –
Array with non–uniform Excitation – Binomial Array.
UNIT IV APERTURE ANTENNAS
9
Magnetic Current and its fields – Uniqueness theorem – Field equivalence principle – Duality principle –
Method of Images – Pattern properties – Slot antenna, Horn Antenna – Pyramidal Horn Antenna – Reflector
Antenna –Flat reflector – Corner Reflector
UNIT V SPECIAL ANTENNAS AND ANTENNA MEASUREMENTS
9
Long wire – V and Rhombic Antenna –Yagi–Uda Antenna – Turnstile Antenna – Helical Antenna – Axial mode
helix, Normal mode helix –Biconical Antenna – Log periodic Dipole Array – Spiral Antenna –Microstrip Patch
Antennas.
Antenna Measurements: Radiation Pattern measurement – Gain and Directivity Measurements – Impedance
measurement and Anechoic Chamber measurement.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. John D.Kraus, Ronald J Marhefka and Ahmad S Khan, “Antennas for all Applications”, 3rd
Edition, Tata
McGraw–Hill Book Company, 2012.
2. Constantine A. Balanis,”Antenna Theory Analysis and Design”, 2nd
Edition, John Wiley, 2011.
151
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. E.C.Jordan and Balmain, “Electromagnetic waves and Radiating Systems”, Pearson Education / PHI,
2006
2. A.R.Harish, M.Sachidanada, “Antennas and Wave propagation”, Oxford University Press, 2007.
3. G.S.N.Raju, “Antenna Wave Propagation”, Pearson Education, 2004.
4. R.E.Collins, “Antenna and Radiowave propagation”,McGraw–Hill, 1985
5. W.L Stutzman and G.A. Thiele, “Antenna analysis and design”, John Wiley, 2000.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://www.authorstream.com/Presentation/Ani_Kate–508171–wave–propagation/
2. http://classes.soe.ucsc.edu/cmpe123a/Fall07/doc/AntBrief123A12–6–07.ppt
3. http://muse.widener.edu/~rpj0001/courses/ENGR647/ClassNotes/LECT04.ppt
4. http://www.authorstream.com/Presentation/aSGuest125391–1319926–unit–antenna–engineering/
15ECA05 TELEVISION ENGINEERING L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To understand the construction details of TV Receiver Picture Tubes, Television Camera tubes and
Composite Video Signal details
To understand principles of operation of Monochrome Television Transmitter and Receiver systems.
To study PAL Color Television system operation.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course students will be able to
Analyse the transmission of video signals and importance of television standards
Analyse the functioning of circuits related to broadcasting applications.
Apply the knowledge gained in digital video and television transmission.
PRE REQUISITES:
Electromagnetic spectrum, electromagnetic wave propagation, basic modulation theory, transducers, electronic
circuits, signals representation.
UNITI TELEVISION SIGNALSCOMPOSITE VIDEO SIGNAL 9
Audio and video transmission – scanning principle – TV broadcasting, system – Aspect ratio – Resolution –
Video bandwidth. Video signals – composite video signal – blanking signal – horizontal, vertical blanking and
sync pulses.
UNITII TELEVISION CAMERAS AND SIGNAL TRANSMISSION 9
Image orthicon –Vidicon–plumbicon– characteristics of camera tubes –video processing of camera pickup signal
–Picture signal transmission – positive and negative modulation – VSB transmission – Sound signal transmission
– Standard channel bandwidth
152
UNITIII TV TRANSMITTER & RECEIVER 9
TV standards – TV transmitter – Block diagram of TV Reciever – Receiver controls – RF tuners – Video
channel and picture tube – AGC and synchronization circuits – Deflection circuit (Horizontal and vertical ) –
video detector – Sound section
UNITIV COLOUR TV PRINCIPLES 9
Compatibility –colour fundamentals – chromaticity diagram –colour picture tubes (Delta – gun, P.I.L &trintron) –
purity and convergence. Colour Signal Transmission and Reception – modulation of colour difference signals –
formation of chrominance signal – NTSC, PAL and SECAM colour systems.
UNITV DIGITAL TV SYSTEMS 9
Cable TV – Cable Signal Sources – Cable Signal Processing, Distribution & Scrambling – DVB – Video
Recording – Video Disc recording and playback – Digital television –Transmission and reception –Projection
television – Flat panel display TV receivers – Digital TV – LCD and Plasma screen receivers – LEDTV – 3DTV
TOTAL: 45 Periods
TEXT BOOKS:
1. R.R.Gulati, “Monochrome Television Practice, Principles, Technology and servicing” , 3rd
Edition, New Age
International (P) Publishers, 2006
2. R.R.Gulati,”Monochrome & Color Television,” New Age International Publisher, 2003.
3. Bernard Grob, Charles Herndon, “Basic television and video systems” , McGraw–Hill, 1998
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. A.M Dhake, “Television and Video Engineering”, 2nd
Edition, TMH, 2003.
2. R.P.Bali, “Color Television, Theory and Practice,” 4th
Edition, Tata McGraw–Hill, New York, 1997.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://seminarprojects.net/q/principles–of–television–engineering–ppt /
2. www.focalpress.com/
3. www.hobbyprojects.com
15ECA06 REMOTE SENSING TECHNIQUES L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To familiarize the principles of Remote Sensing
To gain fundamental knowledge on the physics of remote sensing
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course students will be able to
Apply the Electromagnetic Radiation principles for Remote Sensing Applications
Analyse various imaging systems
Interpret Multispectral and Hyperspectral data for Land cover/ Land use studies
Classify the data for application specific analysis
153
PRE REQUISITES:
fundamental principles of electromagnetic wave propagation and scattering, Optics, satellite communication
fundamentals, basics of communication engineering
UNITI PHYSICS OF REMOTE SENSING 9
Electro Magnetic Spectrum – Physics of Remote Sensing – Effects of Atmosphere – Scattering – Different types
–Absorption – Atmospheric window – Energy interaction with surface features – Spectral reflectance of
vegetation, soil ,and water –atmospheric influence on spectral response patterns.
UNITII REMOTE SENSING SYSTEMS 9
Satellites and orbits – Polar orbiting satellites – Spectral – radiometric and spatial resolutions – Temporal
resolution of satellites – Multispectral – thermal and hyperspectral Sensing. Remote Sensing platforms –
airborne and space borne sensors. Some remote sensing satellites, Radars and their features.
UNITIII IMAGE PROCESSING TECHNIQUES FOR REMOTE SENSING 9
Geometric corrections – Co–registration of Data – Ground Control Points (GCP) – Atmospheric corrections –
Solar illumination corrections. Image Enhancement: Concept of color – Color composites – Contrast stretching –
linear and non–linear stretching – Filtering techniques – Edge enhancement – Density slicing –Thresholding –
Intensity–Hue–Saturation (IHS) images – Time composite images – Synergetic images.
UNITIV INFORMATION EXTRACTION FROM REMOTE SENSED DATA 9
Multispectral classification – Ground truth collection – Supervised and unsupervised classification – Change
detection analysis – Principal component analysis – Ratio images – Vegetation indices. Introduction to Image
Processing Softwares: MATLAB – Introduction to Multispectral classification algorithms.
UNITV REMOTE SENSING APPLICATIONS 9
Watershed management – Rainfall–runoff modeling – Irrigation management – Flood mapping – Drought
assessment –Environmental monitoring.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Lillesand T.M., and Kiefer R.W., “Remote Sensing and Image interpretation”, 6th
Edition, John Wiley
&Sons, 2000.
2. Jensen, J.R., “Remote sensing of the environment”, 2nd
Edition,Prentice Hall, 2000.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. John A.Richards, “Remote Sensing Digital Image Analysis”, Springer,1999.
2. John R.Jensen, “Introductory Digital Image Processing: A Remote Sensing Perspective”, 2nd
Edition,
Prentice Hall, 1995.
3. Paul Curran P.J., “Principles of Remote Sensing”, ELBS, 1995.
4. Charles Elachi and Jakob J. van Zyl, “Introduction to the Physics and Techniques of Remote Sensing”,
Wiley Series in Remote Sensing and Image Processing, 2006.
5. Sabins, F.F.Jr,” Remote Sensing Principles and Image interpretation”, W.H.Freeman& Co, 1978.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://www.itc.nl/~bakker/rs.html
2. rst.gsfc.nasa.gov
3. www.isprs.org
4. www.nrsa.gov.in
15ECA07 EMBEDDED SYSTEMS L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
154
To introduce embedded systems, its hardware and software.
To introduce devices and buses used for embedded networking.
To explain programming concepts and embedded programming in C and C++.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course students will be able to
Apply the knowledge applications
Develop an embedded product.
Validate the program for system development.
PRE REQUISITES:
Basics of Assembly Language, C, C++, Python, basic knowledge of electronics, digital electronics, knowledge of
microcontrollers, I/O, analog and digital interfacing, and peripherals.
UNITI EMBEDDED COMPUTING 9
Embedded system examples – Parts of Embedded System – Processor – Power supply – clock – memory
interface – interrupt – I/O ports – Buffers, Programmable Devices – ASIC – interfacing with memory and I/O
devices – Memory Technologies – EPROM,Flash, OTP, SRAM,DRAM, SDRAM
UNITII EMBEDDED SYSTEM DESIGN 9
Embedded System product Development Life cycle (EDLC) – Hardware development cycles – Specifications –
Component selection – Schematic Design – PCB layout – fabrication and assembly. Product enclosure Design
and Development.
UNITIII EMBEDDED SYSTEM DEVELOPMENT ENVIRONMENT 9
Reset Circuit – Brown–out Protection Circuit – Oscillator Unit – Real Time Clock – Watchdog Timer.
Development and Debugging – Program design – Model of programs– Assembly and Linking – Basic compilation
techniques– Program validation and testing.
UNITIV OPERATING SYSTEMS 9
Concept of firmware – Operating system basics – Real Time Operating systems – Tasks, Processes and
Threads – Multiprocessing and Multitasking – Task scheduling – Task communication and synchronization –
Device Drivers.
UNITV SYSTEM DESIGN EXAMPLES 9
Design Example: Alarm Clock – Elevator Controller – Ink jet printer– Hardware Design and Software Design –
Set–top Boxes.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Shibu K.V, “Introduction to Embedded Systems “,Tata McGraw Hill, 2009.
2. Marylin wolf, “Computer as Components” Elsevier, 2013,
3. Raj Kamal, “Embedded Systems”, 2nd
Edition, TMH, 2008.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Frank Vahid, Tony Givargis, “Embedded System Design”, John Wiley,2001
2. Lyla, “Embedded System”, Pearson, 2013.
3. C.M. Krishna, Kang G. Shin, “Real – Time Systems”, McGraw – Hill International Editions, 1997
4. David E. Simon, “An Embedded Software Primer”, Pearson Education, 2007.
5. Rajib Mall, ”Real–time systems: theory and practice”, Pearson Education, 2007
155
6. Philip.A.Laplante, “Real Time System Design and Analysis”, 3rd
Edition, Prentice Hall of India, 2004.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://nptel.ac.in/courses/108102045/
2. http://www.learnerstv.com/Free-Engineering-Video-lectures-ltv118-Page1.htm
15ECA08 OPTICAL COMMUNICATION L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To learn the basic elements of light sources, Wavelength and frequencies of light
To understand the different kind of fibers, losses, and fiber slicing and connectors
To learn different types of photo detectors and its operation
To learn the fiber optical receivers and its measurements
To learn, Optical networks, operational principles of WDM
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course students will be able to
Analyze the different kinds of light sources and Detectors used in any applications
Design any optical communication system
Analyze the performance measure of the optical parameters
PRE REQUISITES:
Electromagnetic spectrum and its uses, Snells law, optical signal propagation methods and electromagnetic
theory
UNITI OPTICAL SOURCES 9
Light sources : Sunlight, Torch light, LED and Laser light – Optical frequencies and Wavelength – LED internal –
quantum efficiency –Relationship between speed of light, wavelength and frequency – light as an
Electromagnetic waves – comparison of LED and Laser diode
UNITII OPTICAL FIBER 9
Refractive Index –Ray theory of transmission – Total internal reflection – Acceptance angle – Numerical aperture
– Attenuation Fiber Bend losses and Dispersion – Structure of an optical fiber – Optical domain signal –
electrical domain signal Optical pulses for the digital data – Optical fiber connectors – Fiber alignment and Joint
Losses – Fiber Splices – Fiber connectors – Fiber couplers
UNIT III OPTICAL DETECTORS 9
Optical Detectors: PIN Photo detectors, Avalanche photo diodes – construction, characteristics and properties –
Comparison of performance, Photo detector noise –Noise sources – Signal to Noise ratio – Detector response
time.
UNITIV FIBER OPTIC RECEIVER AND MEASUREMENTS 9
Fundamental receiver operation – Pre amplifiers – Error sources – Receiver Configuration – Probability of Error –
Quantum limit.
Fiber Attenuation measurements– Dispersion measurements –Optical Spectrum Analyzer–OTDR
UNITV OPTICAL NETWORKS 9
Basic Networks – Broadcast and select Networks – WDM Networks –Bus topology – Star topology –
Wavelength Routed Networks – Routing and wavelength Assignment – Different types of wavelength
Assignment
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
156
1. Gerd Keiser, "Optical Fiber Communication" 5th
Edition, McGraw Hill International, 2014.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. J.Gower, “Optical Communication System”, Prentice Hall of India, 2001.
2. Rajiv Ramaswami, “Optical Network”, 2nd
Edition, Elsevier, 2004.
3. Govind P. Agrawal, “Fiber–optic communication systems”, 3rd
edition, John Wiley & sons, 2004.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. www.nptel.ac.in/courses/117101002/downloads/Lec19.pdf
2. www.ece466.groups.et.byu.net/notes/notes_source.ppt
15ECA09 MOBILE COMMUNICATION L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To impart the fundamentals concepts of mobile communication systems.
To provide the student with an understanding of advanced multiple access techniques.
To give the student an understanding digital cellular systems.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
After the completion of this course, students will be able to
Analyze the cellular radio concepts such as frequency reuse, handoff and how interference between
mobiles and base stations affects the capacity of cellular systems.
Apply the concepts on basic diversity, equalization and spread spectrum techniques in mobile
communication.
Analyze the current and future cellular mobile communication systems (GSM, IS95, WCDMA, etc.)
PRE REQUISITES:
Radio frequency propagation fundamentals,basics ofdigital communications, basic telephony
UNIT I CELLULAR MOBILE SYSTEMS 9
Historic perspective and overview of Mobile Communication Systems – A basic cellular system – operation of
cellular systems – overview of generations of cellular systems – concept of frequency reuse – co–channel
interference reduction factor – desired C/I from a normal case in an omni directional antenna system – co–
channel interference and Non–co–channel interference – design of antenna system – antenna parameter and
their effects – diversity receiver –Traffic theory – Erlang B system
UNIT II CELL COVERAGE, CELL SITE, FREQUENCY MANAGEMENT AND
HANDOFF
9
Cell coverage for signal and traffic – cell site and mobile antennas – frequency management and channel
assignment – Handoff – dropped calls and cell splitting
UNIT III MODULATION METHODS AND CODING FOR ERROR DETECTION AND
CORRECTION
9
Digital modulation methods in cellular wireless systems – OFDM – Block Coding – convolution coding and Turbo
157
coding.
UNIT IV SPREAD SPECTRUM AND MULTIPLE ACCESS TECHNIQUES 9
Spread Spectrum Techniques – DSSS – FHSS – Frequency division multiple access (FDMA) – Time–division
multiple access (TDMA) – code division multiple access (CDMA) – CDMA capacity – probability of bit error
considerations – CDMA vs TDMA.
UNIT V SECOND And THIRD GENERATION WIRELESS SYSTEMS 9
GSM, IS–136 (D–AMPS), IS–95 – Third generation wireless systems – GPRS – EDGE – WCDMA – LTE.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. William, C. Y. Lee, “Mobile Cellular Telecommunications”, 2nd
Edition, McGraw Hill, 2006.
2. Mischa Schwartz, “Mobile Wireless Communications”, Cambridge University Press, UK, 2005
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Jerry D. Gibson, “Mobile Communication Hand Book”, 3rd
Edition, IEEE Press, 2012.
2. Theodore S Rappaport, “Wireless Communication Principles and Practice”, 2nd
Edition, Pearson
Education, 2010.
3. Lawrence Harte, “3G Wireless Demystified”, McGraw Hill Publications, 2001.
4. KavehPahlavan and Prashant Krishnamurthy”, Principles of Wireless Networks”, Prentice Hall PTR,
2002
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://webmail.aast.edu/~khedr/Courses/Graduate/Wireless%20Communications_F08/Lecture%20four%
20channel%20II.pdf.
2. http://staff.neu.edu.tr/~fahri/wireless_chp6.pdf.
15ECA10 VERY LARGE SCALE INTEGRATED CIRCUITS L T P C
3 0 0 3
Course Objectives:
To understand the characteristics of CMOS systems
To discuss the delay models and interconnects in CMOS circuits
To study the HDL fundamentals
Course Outcomes:
At the end of this course students will be able to
Analyze the operation of various CMOS circuits
Apply the techniques for circuit characterization
Synthesize the combinational and sequential circuits using Verilog HDL
PRE REQUISITES:
Basic electronic devices and circuits, CMOS circuits, integrated circuits
158
UNIT I SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES 9
PN junction diode – forward and reverse bias characteristics – Bipolar Junction Transistors – Input and Output
characteristics of CE, CB& CC Configuration.
UNIT II FIELD EFFECT TRANSISTOR 9
JFETs – Drain and Transfer characteristics – Pinch off voltage and its significance – MOSFETCharacteristics –
DMOSFET – E MOSFET.
UNIT III IC FABRICATION 9
IC classification – fundamental of monolithic IC technology – epitaxial growth, masking and etching – diffusion of
impurities. Realisation of monolithic ICs and packaging – Fabrication of diodes – capacitance, resistance and
FETs.
UNIT IV MOS DEVICE CHARACTERISTICS 9
Ideal I–V and C–V characteristics – non ideal I–V effects – DC transfer characteristics – Scaling of Devices.
UNIT V HARDWARE DESCRIPTION LANGUAGE 9
Verilog HDL fundamentals – Types of Modeling – HDL for Logic Gates – Half Adder – Full Adder – Half / Full
Subtractor – Comparators.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Donald A Neaman, “Semiconductor Physics and Devices”, 3rd
Edition, Tata McGrawHill Inc. 2007
2. D.RoyChoudhary, SheilB.Jani, “Linear Integrated Circuits”, 2nd
Edition, New Age, 2003.
3. N.H.E.Westeetal, “CMOS VLSI Design”,3rd
Edition, Pearson, 2005
4. Samir Palnitkar, “Verilog HDL – A Guide to Digital Design and Synthesis”, Pearson, 2003.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Wayne Wolf, “FPGA– based System Design”, Pearson, 2004
2. Mark Gordon Arnold, “Verilog Digital – Computer Design”, Prentice Hall (PTR), 1999.
3. MichealD.Ciletti, “Modeling, Synthesis and Rapid Prototyping with the Verilog HDL”, Prentice Hall, 1999.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://www.eolss.net/sample-chapters/c05/e6-195-04.pdf
2. http://web.ewu.edu/groups/technology/Claudio/ee430/Lectures/L1-print.pdf
3. http://www.circuitstoday.com/integrated-circuits
4. http://www.tutorialspoint.com/vlsi_design/vlsi_design_digital_system.htm
Offered by CSE Department
15CSA01 INTERNET PROGRAMMING L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To identify the basics of Internet and its protocol
To learn HTML5 controls for the creation of static web pages
To present HTML documents using Cascading Style Sheets (CSS).
159
To learn to create user interactive web pages using JavaScript and DOM
To handle the clients’ requests at the server end using PHP
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Exploit the basics of Internet and realize the significance of HTTP protocol in the WWW.
Develop website using HTML5
Design interesting and appealing HTML pages using CSS
Validate the users’ data using JavaScript
Access and process various elements of web pages using DOM
Generate dynamic response to client request using PHP
PREREQUISITES:
Programming Principles
UNIT I BASICS OF NETWORK AND WEB CONCEPTS 9
Types of Network – Reason for Networks – Communication between Computers – Serial and Parallel
Communication – Asynchronous and Synchronous Communication – Simplex, Half-Duplex, Full-Duplex
Communications – Data Rate, Bandwidth and Throughput – Switched Connections – Topologies used in
Networking – Basic Internet Protocols – The World Wide Web – HTTP Request Message – HTTP Response
Message – Web Clients – Web Servers
UNIT II HTML5 9
Introduction to HTML5 – Editing HTML5 – W3C HTML validation service – Headings – Linking - Images – Special
characters and horizontal rules – Lists – Tables – Forms – Internal linking - Meta elements – New HTML5 Form
input types – Input and datalist elements and auto complete attribute – Page structure elements – Introduction to
Canvas – Canvas Coordinate System – Rectangles – Drawing arcs and circles – Shadows
UNIT III CSS3, JAVASCRIPT 9
Types of CSS – Conflicting style sheets – Positioning Elements – Element Dimension – Box model and Text Flow
– Media types – Media Queries – Drop-Down Menus – Text shadows – Rounded corners – Color – Box
Shadows. Introduction to JavaScript – Syntax - Variables and Data types – JavaScript Control Statements –
Operators – Literals - Functions – Objects – Arrays – Built-in objects
UNIT IV DOCUMENT OBJECT MODEL 9
Introduction to the Document Object Model – Intrinsic Event Handling – Modifying Element Style – The Document
Tree – Properties of window – DOM Collections – Using Timer and Dynamic Styles to create animated effects –
JavaScript Event Handling – Reviewing the load, mousemove, mouseover, mouseout events – Form processing
with focus, blur, submit, reset – Event Bubbling – More Events
UNIT V PHP 9
Introduction – Converting Between Data Types – Arithmetic Operators – Initializing and Manipulating Arrays –
String Comparisons – String processing with regular expressions – Form Processing and Business Logic –
Reading from a database – Using Cookie – Dynamic Content
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. P.J. Deitel, H.M. Deitel, “Internet and World Wide Web – How to program”, Pearson Education
Publishers, Fifth Edition, 2009.
2. Jeffrey C. Jackson, "Web Technologies - A Computer Science Perspective", Pearson Education, 2007.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. John Cowley, "Communications and Networking An Introduction", Springer, Second Edition, 2013
2. Robert. W. Sebesta, "Programming the World Wide Web", Pearson Education, Fourth Edition, 2007.
3. Kogent Learning Solutions Inc., “Html5 Black Book: Covers CSS3, JavaScript, XKL, XHTML, AJAX,
160
PHP and jQuery”, Dreamtech Press, 2011.
4. Bates, “Developing Web Applications”, Wiley, 2006.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. www.nptel.ac.in
2. http://www.echoecho.com/javascript.htm
3. http://www.w3schools.com/php/
4. http://www.theshulers.com/whitepapers/internet_whitepaper/index.html
5. http://www.protocols.com/pbook/tcpip2/#UDP
15CSA02
FUNDAMENTALS OF SOFTWARE ENGINEERING L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To explore the fundamental concepts of software engineering
To learn the requirements engineering process and planning for software development
To understand the software design principles
To know coding standards and different testing strategies
To learn the project management principles and quality assurance standards
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Apply software engineering principles for software development.
Formulate software requirement specification and plan for software development
Design software according to the specification
Code the software using guidelines / standards and conduct testing
Manage and maintain the software process by assuring the quality
PREREQUISITES:
Knowledge of Problem Solving Techniques is preferred
UNIT I SOFTWARE AND SOFTWARE ENGINEERING 8
The Nature of Software - Software Engineering - Software Myths – Process Models: Prescriptive Process
Models, Specialized Process Models, Personal and Team Process Models – Overview of Agile Process -
Overview of CMMi
UNIT II REQUIREMENTS ENGINEERING AND PLANNING 10
Requirements Engineering: Establishing the Groundwork - Eliciting Requirements - Negotiating Requirements -
Validating Requirements - Requirements Analysis using scenario based modeling. Process and Project Metrics:
Software Measurement - Metrics for Software Quality. Estimation: The Project Planning Process – Resources -
Software Project Estimation - Decomposition Techniques - Empirical Estimation Models - Project Scheduling
UNIT III MODELLING AND DESIGN 9
Modelling: Data Modeling Concepts - Class-Based Modeling - Flow-Oriented Modeling - Creating a Behavioral
Model Design Concepts - Architectural Design: Software Architecture, Architectural Styles, Architectural Design,
Architectural Mapping Using Data Flow - User Interface Design: The Golden Rules, User Interface Analysis and
Design, Interface Analysis
UNIT IV CODING AND SOFTWARE TESTING 9
Coding standards and guidelines - Testing: Strategic approach to Software Testing - Test Strategies for
Conventional Software - Validation Testing - System Testing – Debugging – White-box Testing - Basis Path
Testing - Control Structure Testing - Black-box Testing
UNIT V PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND SOFTWARE QUALITY 9
161
Project Management Concepts: The Management Spectrum, People, Product and Process – Software
Configuration Management – Risk Management - Quality Management: Software Quality, Achieving Software
Quality - Elements of Software Quality Assurance - The ISO 9000 Quality Standard
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOK:
1. Roger S. Pressman and Bruce R. Maxim, “Software Engineering – A practitioner’s approach”, McGraw
Hill Publications, Eighth Edition, 2014
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Pankaj Jalote, ”An Integrated Approach to Software Engineering”, Springer, Third Edition, 2005
2. Ian Sommerville, “Software engineering”, Pearson Education Asia, Seventh Edition, 2007.
3. Watts S.Humphrey, ”A Discipline for Software Engineering”, Pearson Education, 2007.
4. James F.Peters and Witold Pedrycz, ”Software Engineering, Engineering Approach”, Wiley-India, 2007.
5. Stephen R.Schach, “Software Engineering”, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2007.
6. S.A.Kelkar, ”Software Engineering”, Prentice Hall of India Pvt, 2007
WEB REFERENCES:
1. www.mhhe.com/pressman
2. www.rspa.com/spi/
3. http://www.comp.lancs.ac.uk/computing/resources/IanS/
4. http://www.ee.umanitoba.ca/~cilab/main.html
5. http://www.wiley.com/college/comp/peters189642
15CSA03
INTRODUCTION TO DATABASE L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To correlate the role of database management systems in information technology applications
To structure data using relational model
To explore the features of structured query language
To reduce the anomalies using Normalization
To manage transaction and concurrency control techniques.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Draw the ER Diagram for enterprise applications
Design databases using relational model
Query the database using SQL
Apply normalization techniques on the databases
Perform transaction and concurrency control techniques.
PREREQUISITES:
Knowledge of Data Files is preferred
UNIT I DATABASE FUNDAMENTALS 9
Purpose of Database Systems – View of Data - Database System Architecture – Database Users and
Administrators – Data Models – Structure of Network Model – Structure of Hierarchical Model – Entity
Relationship Model – Constraints – Removing Redundant Attributes in Entity Sets – E-R Diagrams - Design
Issues – Extended E-R Features – Introduction of Relational Model – E-R Reduction to Relational Schemas
UNIT II RELATIONAL DATABASE MODEL 9
Structure of Relational Databases – Database Schema – Schema Diagrams – Relational Query Languages -
162
Relational Algebra – Tuple Relational Calculus -– Domain Relational Calculus
UNIT III STRUCTURED QUERY LANGUAGE 9
Overview of SQL query language – SQL Data definition – Basic Structure of SQL Queries – Additional Basic
Operations – Set Operations – Null values – Aggregate Operations – Nested Subqueries – Joins – Views –
Integrity Constraints – Authorization. Introduction to Advanced SQL: Functions and Procedures – Triggers
UNIT IV NORMALIZATION 9
Functional Dependencies – Non-loss Decomposition – Dependency Preservation - First, Second, Third Normal
Forms – Boyce Codd Normal Form
UNIT V TRANSACTION AND CONCURRENCY CONTROL 9
Transaction Model – ACID properties – Transaction States – Serializability - Conflict serializability – View
Serializability – Testing Serializability. Concurrency Control – Lock Based Protocols – Deadlocks – Multiple
Granularity – Time Stamp Based Protocols – Validation Based Protocols
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Henry F Korth, Abraham Silberschatz, S. Sudharshan, “Database System Concepts”, McGraw Hill, Sixth
Edition, 2011.
2. C.J. Date, A. Kannan and S. Swamynathan, ”An Introduction to Database Systems”, Pearson
Education, Eighth Edition, 2006.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. R. Elmasri, S.B. Navathe, “Fundamentals of Database Systems”, Pearson Education/Addison Wesley,
Sixth Edition, 2010.
2. Thomas Cannolly and Carolyn Begg, “Database Systems, A Practical Approach to Design,
Implementation and Management”, Pearson Education, Fifth Edition, 2009.
3. Raghu Ramakrishnan, Johannes Gehrke, “Database Management Systems”, McGraw Hill, Third Edition
2004.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. www.nptel.ac.in
2. http://www.1keydata.com/datawarehousing/data-modeling-levels.html
3. http://www.cs.uwaterloo.ca/~gweddell/cs448/Arch.pdf
4. http://www.sql-tutorial.net/SQL-tutorial.asp
5. http://sqlzoo.net/
6. http://www.service-architecture.com/database/articles/ acid_properties.html
15CSA04
INTRODUCTION TO DATA STRUCTURES AND ALGORITHMS L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To introduce the basics of problem solving techniques and analysis of algorithms
To learn the various searching and sorting techniques
To impart knowledge on ADTs such as List, Stack, Queue
To explore the binary trees and priority queues
To get exposure on hashing techniques and graphs
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Analyze recursive and non recursive algorithms for complexity
Apply various searching / sorting algorithms for solving real-world problems
Implement List, Stack and Queue with appropriate data structures
Work with binary trees and heap based priority queue
163
Exploit the hashing technique and graph algorithms
PREREQUISITES:
Knowledge of Memory Organization, Fundamentals of C Programming
UNIT I ANALYSIS OF ALGORITHMS 9
Introduction to Algorithms and algorithmic problem solving – Problem types. Analysis of Algorithms: Analysis
Framework - Asymptotic Notations – Best case, worst case and average cases - Mathematical analysis of
non-recursive algorithms - Recurrence equations – Solving recurrence equations - Mathematical analysis of
recursive algorithms.
UNIT II SEARCHING AND SORTING ALGORITHMS 9
Search Algorithms: Linear search - binary search - Analysis of Search algorithms. Sorting Algorithms: Bubble
sort - Exchange sort - Insertion sort – Merge sort – Quick sort – Heap sort - Analysis of Sorting Algorithms.
UNIT III LISTS, STACKS AND QUEUES 9
Abstract Data Types – The List ADT – Singly Linked List – Doubly Linked List – Circular Linked List –
Applications and analysis of List. The Stack ADT – Applications and Analysis of Stack. The Queue ADT –
Applications and Analysis of Queues.
UNIT IV TREES AND HEAPS 9
Preliminaries – Binary Trees – Expression Trees- Traversals. The Search Tree ADT – Binary Search Trees –
Applications of BST. Priority Queues – Binary heap – Heap operations - Applications of heaps.
UNIT V HASHING AND GRAPHS 9
Hashing – Closed hashing: Separate Chaining – Open Addressing - Linear probing. Graph ADT – Representation
of graph – Graph Traversals: DFS and BFS. Applications of Graph - Finding Shortest Path - Connected
components.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Anany Levitin, “Introduction to the Design and Analysis of Algorithm”, Pearson Education Asia, 2003.
2. Mark Allen Weiss, “Data Structures and Algorithm Analysis in C”, Pearson Education Asia, Second
Edition, 1997.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Alfred V. Aho, John E. Hopcroft and Jeffry D. Ullman, “Data Structures and Algorithms”, Pearson
Education, New Delhi, 2006
2. Ellis Horowitz, Sartaj Sahni and Dinesh Mehta, “Fundamentals of Data Structures in C”, Orient
Longman, Second Edition, 2008.
3. Jean-Paul Tremblay and Paul G. Sorenson, “An Introduction to Data Structures with Applications”, Tata
McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, Second Edition, 1991.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://nptel.ac.in/courses/106101059/
2. http://www.personal.kent.edu/~rmuhamma/Algorithms/algorithm.html
3. http://www.mif.vu.lt/~algis/dsax/DsSort.pdf
4. http://cslibrary.stanford.edu/103/LinkedListBasics.pdf
5. www.cs.cornell.edu/courses/cs312/2005sp/lectures/rec19.html
15CSA05
FUNDAMENTALS OF OPERATING SYSTEMS L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To acquire basic knowledge of operating system structures and its functioning
To study the concept of process management
164
To learn the basics of memory management
To understand the structure of file systems
To familiarize with different operating systems
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Identify the components of operating system and their functionalities
Analyze the various process management algorithms
Evaluate the performance of various memory management techniques
Design a simple file system and analyze the performance
Work with some popular operating systems like Linux, Windows
PREREQUISITES:
Working Principles of Computers
UNIT I OPERATING SYSTEMS OVERVIEW 9
Introduction to operating systems – Computer system organization - architecture – Operating system structure -
operations – Process, memory, storage management – Open source operating systems – OS services – User
interface – System calls – System programs – Process concept - scheduling – Operations on processes –
Cooperating processes – Inter-process communication – Threads
UNIT II PROCESS MANAGEMENT 9
Basic concepts – Scheduling algorithms – Algorithm evaluation – The critical section problem – Synchronization
hardware – Semaphores – Classic problems of synchronization – Deadlocks – Deadlock characterization –
Methods for handling deadlocks – Deadlock prevention – Deadlock avoidance – Deadlock detection – Recovery
from deadlock.
UNIT III MEMORY MANAGEMENT 9
Memory management – Swapping – Contiguous memory allocation – Paging – Segmentation - Virtual memory:
Background – Demand paging – Copy on write – Page replacement – Allocation of frames – Thrashing
UNIT IV FILE MANAGEMENT 9
File concept – Access methods – Directory structure – File-system mounting – Protection – Directory
implementation – Allocation methods – Free space management – Disk scheduling – Disk management
UNIT V CASE STUDY 9
The Linux system – History – Process management – Scheduling – Memory management – File systems – Inter
Process Communication
Windows OS - History – Design principles
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOK:
1. Abraham Silberschatz, Peter B. Galvin, Greg Gagne, “Operating System Concepts Essentials”, John
Wiley & Sons Inc., 8th Edition, 2011.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Andrew S. Tanenbaum, “Modern Operating Systems”, Addison Wesley, Second Edition, 2001.
2. Charles Crowley, “Operating Systems: A Design-Oriented Approach”, Tata McGraw Hill Education,
1996.
3. D M Dhamdhere, “Operating Systems: A Concept-based Approach”, Tata McGraw-Hill Education,
Second Edition, 2007.
4. William Stallings, “Operating Systems: Internals and Design Principles”, Prentice Hall, Seventh Edition,
2011.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. www.nptel.ac.in
165
2. http://cseweb.ucsd.edu/classes/fa06/cse120/lectures/120-fa06-l13.pdf
3. http://www.cs.kent.edu/~farrell/osf03/oldnotes/
15CSA06
FUNDAMENTALS OF CLOUD COMPUTING
L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To learn the basics and challenges of Cloud Computing
To introduce the virtualization concepts and cloud file system
To get an exposure on third-party cloud solutions
To understand the cloud security and efficiency issues
To explore the possibilities of applying cloud solutions in various applications
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Identify the challenges in Cloud Computing adoption
Implement virtualization and work with cloud file system
Identify the various cloud-based solutions available with different providers
Secure and optimize the cloud for delivering better performance
Identify and provide cloud-based solution for the problem under consideration
PREREQUISITES:
Knowledge of Computers, Networking is preferred
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO CLOUD COMPUTING 9
Overview of Distributed computing - Introduction to Cloud Computing: Definitions - Central idea - Properties and
Characteristics - Benefits - Cloud service and deployment model - Organizational scenario - Architecture -
Vocabulary - Challenges - Supporting services - Management and administration of Cloud services
UNIT II VIRTUALIZATION AND FILE SYSTEM 9
Virtualization Techniques: Virtualization Technology - Overview of x86 virtualization - Types of virtualization -
Virtualization products - VLAN - SAN - VM Migration - VM Consolidation and Management - Cloud interoperability
standards
Cloud File System: Distributed file system - GFS - HDFS
UNIT III CLOUD SOLUTIONS 9
Different Cloud Providers and service comparison: Infrastructure service providers - Comparison between
infrastructure service providers - Identification of business requirement - Cloud infrastructure setup procedure -
Platform service providers - Comparison between platform service providers - Identification of business
requirement - Cloud platform setup procedure - Cloud application development - Software service providers -
Comparison between software service providers
Cloud Database - Cloud programming model - Private cloud computing platforms
UNIT IV CLOUD SECURITY - MIDDLEWARE AND TESTING 9
Cloud Security: Fundamentals - Cloud Risk - Division - Security Architecture - VM Security Challenges -
Vulnerability assessment tool for cloud - Open source security solution products
Cloud Middleware: Need for Cloud Middleware - QoS issues in cloud - Data migration and Streaming -
Performance monitoring tools in cloud - Best practices
Cloud Testing: Types - Testing strategy
UNIT V CLOUD APPLICATIONS AND CASE STUDIES 9
Advanced Cloud Applications - Sharing and Collaborative services in cloud - Outside the cloud services - Cloud
Analytics - Software plus services - Cloud Content Delivery Network services (CDN) - Mobile cloud computing -
Sky computing - Cloud governance
166
Case Study: Cloud infrastructure adoption case study - Cloud platform adoption case study - Cloud software
services adoption case study - Cloud simulation tools - Future of cloud computing
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Rishabh Sharma, “Cloud Computing Fundamentals, Industry Approach and Trends”, Wiley India, 2015.
2. Kai Hwang, Geoffrey C Fox, Jack G Dongarra, “Distributed and Cloud Computing from Parallel
Processing to the Internet of Things”, Morgan Kaufmann Publishers, 2012
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Ronald L. Krutz, Russell Dean Vines, “Cloud Security – A comprehensive Guide to Secure Cloud
Computing”, Wiley – India, 2010.
2. John W.Rittinghouse and James F.Ransome, “Cloud Computing: Implementation, Management, and
Security”, CRC Press, 2010.
3. George Reese, “Cloud Application Architectures: Building Applications and Infrastructure in the Cloud”
O'Reilly
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://whatiscloud.com/basic_concepts_and_terminology/cloud
2. http://www.vmware.com/in/virtualization/overview
3. http://www.csoonline.com/article/2125258/cloud-security/cloud-security--the-basics.html
4. http://thecloudtutorial.com/cloudvendors.html
5. http://thecloudtutorial.com/freecloudcomputingapplications.html
15CSA07
PRINCIPLES OF MULTIMEDIA
L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To study the basic concepts related to Multimedia
To explain the basic multimedia building blocks and application development tools.
To demonstrate online multimedia application creation tools
To understand computer animation basics and needs
To demonstrate various computer animation techniques.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Identify the architectural components for multimedia applications.
Work with various elements of multimedia.
Develop audio, video, and images using multimedia tools.
Identify issues and solutions in implementing security for multimedia applications.
Model and render the 3D objects using animation tools.
Develop interactive animations using multimedia tools
PREREQUISITES:
Fundamental Knowledge of Graphics, Data is preferred
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO MULTIMEDIA 9
Multimedia overview: Components , Hypermedia ,File formats – Color models – Digital Audio representation –
Digital music making – MIDI - Digital Video: Video compression techniques – Multimedia for portable devices
UNIT II MULTIMEDIA BUILDING BLOCKS 9
Multimedia building blocks: Text, Graphics, Video Capturing, Sound capturing and editing - Introduction to 2D &
3D graphics – Surface characteristics and texture – Lights – Animation: key frames & tweening – Techniques –
Principles of animation – 3D animation – File formats
167
UNIT III MULTIMEDIA APPLICATIONS 9
Databases: Properties of MMDBMS, Multimedia queries, Management of continuous data, document modeling,
Media Servers- Security: Digital Signatures, steganographic methods: single images, motion pictures, audio data,
3D scenes, copyright protection.
UNIT IV COMPUTER ANIMATION BASICS 9
History of Computer Animation - Modeling digital objects : Modeling Concepts - Modeling Techniques –
Rendering Concepts : Lights, Camera and Materials - color- Rendering Process - Hidden surface removal - Z-
Buffer - Ray tracing
UNIT V COMPUTER ANIMATION TECHNIQUES 9
Principles of animation - Computer Animation techniques: keyframe Techniques, camera animation, light
animation, animation file formats - Advanced Computer Animation techniques: Motion Capture, Facial animation,
crowd animation - Visual effects techniques: Crowd replications, 3-d morphing, motion control.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. John F. Koegel Bufend, “Multimedia systems”, Pearson Education, Delhi, 2002
2. Parekh R, “Principles of Multimedia”, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2006.
3. Isaac V.Kerlow, “The Art of 3D Computer Animation and Effects”, Wiley Publications, 4th Edition,2009
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Mohammed Dastbaz, “Designing Interactive Multimedia”, McGraw Hill Publication, 2002.
2. Ralf Steinmetz and Klara Nahrstedt, “Multimedia Applications”, Springer, 2007
15CSA08
INTRODUCTION TO GENETIC ALGORITHMS
L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To learn the fundamental concepts of genetic algorithms
To solve optimization problems using advanced GA operators
To understand the multi objective optimization concepts
To learn the significance of evolutionary algorithms
To study the applications of genetic algorithms
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Explore the basics of genetic algorithms
Solve real world problems using advanced operators of GA
Work with multi objective optimization problems
Identify the different evolutionary algorithms for solving problems
Apply genetic algorithms to solve real-world domain problems
PREREQUISITES:
Knowledge of Problem Solving Techniques towards Optimization is preferred
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO GENETIC ALGORITHMS 9
Introduction - Comparison of Biological and GA terminology – Mutation – Selection – Elitism – Crossover -
Initialization
UNIT II ADVANCED OPERATORS OF GA 9
Combinatorial optimization – Constraints - Multicriteria optimization - Hybrid algorithm - Alternative selection and
crossover methods - Meta Gas – Mutation - Parallel GA
UNIT III MULTIOBJECTIVE OPTIMIZATION 9
168
Multi objective optimization problem - Principles of Multi objective optimization problem - Difference with single
objective optimization - Dominance and Pareto optimality - Optimality conditions
UNIT IV EVOLUTIONARY ALGORITHMS 9
Difficulties with classical optimization algorithms - Genetic algorithms - Evolution strategies - Evolution
programming - Genetic programming – Multi-model function optimization
UNIT V APPLICATIONS OF GENETIC ALGORITHMS 9
Image registration - Recursive prediction of night light levels - Estimation of the optical parameter of liquid
crystals - Design of energy - efficient buildings - Multi objective network rehabilitation of Messy GA
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. David A Coley, “An Introduction to Genetic Algorithms for Scientists and Engineers”, World Scientific
Publishing Company,1997.
2. Kalyamoy Deb,” Multi objective optimization using Evolutionary Algorithms”, John Wiley & Sons, First
Edition, 2003.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Melaine Mitchell “An Introduction to Genetic Algorithms”, First MIT Press paperback edition, 1998.
2. S.N. Sivanandam, S.N. Deepa “Introduction to Genetic Algorithms”, Springer, 2008.
3. David E. Goldberg “Genetic Algorithms”, Pearson Education, Fourth Edition, 2009.
4. Koza, John, Wolfgang Banzhaf, Kumar Chellapilla, Kalyanmoy Deb, Marco Dorigo, David Fogel, Max
Garzon, David Goldberg, Hitoshi Iba, and Rick Riolo(Eds.), "Genetic Programming", Academic Press.
Morgan Kaufmann, USA, 1998.
5. John R.Koza, Forrest H Bennett III , David Andre, Martin A Keane, "Genetic Programming III: Darwinian
Invention and Problem Solving" Morgan Kaufmann, USA, 1999.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://www.doc.ic.ac.uk/~nd/surprise_96/journal/vol1/hmw/article1.html
2. http://www.obitko.com/tutorials/genetic-algorithms/
3. http://intelligence.worldofcomputing.net/machine-learning/genetic-algorithms.html#.VtVvblLlwgQ
4. http://epubs.siam.org/doi/abs/10.1137/0202009
5. http://study.com/academy/lesson/genetic-algorithms-examples-lesson.html
6. http://www.csbdu.in/pdf/Practical_Genetic_Algorithms.pdf
7. http://www.obitko.com/tutorials/genetic-algorithms/ga-basic-description.php
8. https://www.cs.wmich.edu/~elise/courses/cs6800/Genetic-Algorithms.ppt
15CSA09
XML PROGRAMMING L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To learn the basics of markup languages and CSS
To acquire knowledge on XML and its DTD structure.
To understand XML schema creation.
To familiarize with DOM-based and SAX-based parsers.
To study XSLT documents and different custom markup languages.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Construct / design web pages using HTML and CSS
Experiment XML document validation using DTD
Validate XML documents using schemas
Conduct experiments on XML documents using DOM / SAX parsers
Transform XML documents to HTML using XSLT and review other custom markup languages
PREREQUISITES:
169
Basic Principles of Programming is preferred
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO MARKUPS AND CSS 9
History of WWW – History of SGML – History of XML – Review of HTML tags: Lists – tables – links – images -
frames. Cascading Style Sheets (CSS): Inline styles – creating CSS with style, element – external CSS.
UNIT II XML MARKUP CREATION AND DTD 9
XML Markup introduction – Parsers, well-formed and valid XML documents – Parsing XML document with msxml
– characters – markup – XML namespaces - Document Type Declaration - Element Type Declarations - Attribute
Declarations – Simple DTD creation.
UNIT III XML SCHEMAS 9
Schema versus DTDs - Microsoft XML Schema: Describing elements - Describing attributes – Data types –
Simple XML schema creation.
UNIT IV DOM AND SAX PARSERS 9
DOM with JavaScript – DOM components – Traversing the DOM – SAX-based parsers – Events – Simple SAX
program – DOM versus SAX
UNIT V EXTENSIBLE STYLESHEET LANGUAGE TRANSFORMATION (XSLT) 9
Templates – Creating elements and attributes – Iteration and sorting – Conditional processing – Combining
stylesheets – Variables.
Introduction to Custom Markup Languages: Mathematical Markup Language (MathML) - Chemical Markup
Language (CML) - Wireless Markup Language (WML) - NewsML.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOK:
1. H.M. Deitel, P.J. Deitel, T.R. Nieto, T.M. Lin, and P. Sadhu, “XML How to program”, Pearson Education
India, 2001.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Heather Williamson, “XML: The Complete Reference”, Tata McGraw-Hill Education, 2001.
2. Cliff Binstock, “The XML Schema Complete Reference”, Addison-Wesley Professional, 2003.
3. Steven Holzner, “Inside XML”, New Riders, 2001.
4. Erik T. Ray, “Learning XML”, Second Edition, O'Reilly Media, Inc., 2003.
5. Elliotte Rusty Harold, W. Scott Means, “XML in a Nutshell”, O'Reilly Media Inc., 2004.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://www.w3schools.com/xml/default.asp
2. http://www.tutorialspoint.com/xml/
3. http://www.xmlmaster.org/en/article/d01/
4. http://www.javatpoint.com/xml-tutorial
15CSA10
INTRODUCTION TO UML
L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To introduce object oriented modelling concepts and the role of UML
To learn to model the requirements and work flows
To explore the ways to model logical structure
To know how to how to represent dynamic behavior in UML
To understand the representation of behavior modelling in UML
COURSE OUTCOMES:
170
Model a scenario using Object Oriented Modelling
Identify use cases and draw Use case and activity diagrams
Represent logical design using class and object diagrams
Represent dynamic behavior using sequence and collaboration diagrams
Model the behaviors using state transition diagram
PREREQUISITES:
Knowledge of Modelling, Object Oriented Principles is preferred
UNIT I INTRODUCTION AND OBJECT ORIENTED MODELLING 9
Introduction to UML - UML and Process - Perspectives of UML - Object Oriented Paradigm-Models - Object
Modelling - Models and Diagrams - Views of a Model
UNIT II MODELLING REQUIREMENT AND WORKFLOW 9
Modelling Requirements as Use cases - Use Case Diagrams – Relationships - Levels of Use Cases - Use cases
and features. Activity Diagrams: Basics – Activities and Action - Decisions and merges - Swim lanes -
Concurrency
UNIT III MODELLING LOGICAL STRUCTURE 9
Classes – Objects – Class relationship - Class Diagram – Multiplicity - Types – Implementation classes –
Interfaces – packages and subsystems – Object diagrams.
UNIT IV MODELLING ORDERED INTERACTION 9
Sequence Diagrams – Participants - Time-event, signals and messages - Use case and sequence diagram -
Collaboration Diagram
UNIT V BEHAVIOUR MODELLING 9
State Diagrams: States, Transitions, Advanced state diagrams. Component and Deployment Diagrams -
Extension using stereo types and properties
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOK:
1. Kim Hamilton and Russell Miles, “Learning UML 2.0”, O'Reilly, 2006
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Sinan Si Alhir, “Learning UML”, O'Reilly, 2003.
2. Martin Fowler, “UML Distilled”, Addison Wesley, Third Edition, 2004.
3. Grady Booch, James Rumbaugh, Ivar Jacobson, “The Unified Modeling Language User Guide”,
Addison-Wesley, 2005.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://www.uml.org/
2. http://www.omg.org/ocup-2/coveragemap-found.htm#FoundationRefs
3. https://www.gliffy.com/uses/uml-software/
4. http://www.tutorialspoint.com/uml/
15CSA11
INTRODUCTION TO COMPUTER ORGANIZATION L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To have a knowledge on basic digital principles.
To understand the basic structure and operation of a digital computer.
To explore the basic processing unit
To study the hierarchical memory system.
To learn the pipelining architecture concepts.
171
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Apply digital principle concepts to design logical circuits
Design the arithmetic circuits for faster operations
Analyze the main processing units of a computer.
Analyze memory hierarchy and its impact on computer cost/performance.
Design a pipeline for consistent execution of instructions with minimum hazards
PREREQUISITES:
Knowledge in Working Principles of Computers is preferred
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO DIGITAL PRINCIPLES 9
Boolean functions – Simplifications of Boolean functions using Karnaugh map- Implementation of Boolean
functions using logic gates - Decoders and encoders - Multiplexers and demultiplexers
UNIT II BASIC STRUCTURE OF COMPUTERS 9
Functional units – Basic operational concepts – Performance – Instructions and instruction sequencing –
Addressing modes – RISC and CISC Styles – Arithmetic: Design of fast adders – Multiplication of unsigned and
signed numbers – Fast Multiplication – Floating point numbers and operations.
UNIT III BASIC PROCESSING UNIT 9
Fundamental concepts – Instruction Execution – Hardware Components - Instruction Fetch and Execution Steps
– Control Signals – Hardwired control
UNIT IV MEMORY SYSTEM 9
Basic concepts – Memory hierarchy - Semiconductor RAM – Read-only Memories – Direct Memory Access –
Cache memories – Performance considerations – Virtual memory
UNIT V PIPELINING 9
Basic concepts – Pipeline organization and issues – Data dependencies – Memory and branch delays –
Performance evaluation
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Carl Hamacher, Zvonko Vranesic, Safwat Zaky, and Naraig Manjikian, “Computer Organization and
Embedded Systems”, McGraw Hill Higher Education, Sixth Edition, 2011.
2. M.Morris Mano, “Digital Design”, Pearson Education, 3rd edition, 2007.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. David A. Patterson and John L. Hennessy, “Computer Organization and Design: The
Hardware/Software interface”, Elsevier, Third Edition, 2005.
2. “Computer Organization”, ISRD Group, Tata McGraw Hill, 2006.
3. William Stallings, “Computer Organization and Architecture – Designing for Performance”, Pearson
Education, Sixth Edition, 2003.
4. Charles H.Roth, Jr. “Fundamentals of Logic Design”, Jaico Publishing House, Cengage Earning, 4th
Edition, 2005.
5. Donald D.Givone, “Digital Principles and Design”, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2007.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://www.ics.p.lodz.pl/~dpuchala/CompArch/Lecture_6.pdf
2. http://www.dauniv.ac.in/downloads/CArch_PPTs/
3. www.nptel.ac.in
4. http://cse.iitk.ac.in/users/karkare/courses/2011/cs220/html/notes.html
172
Offered by IT Department
15ITA01 INTRODUCTION TO COMPUTER GRAPHICS L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To learn the output primitives like line, circle and ellipse using algorithms.
To study the 2-D and 3-D viewing and transformations.
To understand various, color models modeling and animation techniques.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Apply the line, circle and ellipse drawing algorithms
Apply the two dimensional geometric transformations and clipping
Apply the three dimensional geometric transformations
Work with color and illumination models
Apply different methods for Modeling COURSE PREREQUISITES:
C Programming
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Introduction-Applications-Graphics systems-Output Primitives-representing Image-Straight Line-Line drawing
Algorithms-DDA Algorithm-Bresenhams’ Line Algorithm-Circle Generating Algorithm- Bresenhams’ Circle Algorithm-
Midpoint Circle Algorithm-Ellipse Generating Algorithm-Midpoint Ellipse Algorithm.
UNIT II TWO DIMENSIONAL TRANSFORMATIONS 9
Introduction-Representation of points-Matrix Algebra and Transformation-Transformation of points- Straightlines-
Midpoint Transformation-Transformation of parallel lines-Intersecting lines- Rotation - Reflection and scaling of
straight lines-Combined Transformations-Translation and Homogeneous Coordinates-Rotation about Arbitrary point-
Reflection about Arbitrary line-Windowing and clipping
UNIT III THREE DIMENSIONAL TRANSFORMATION 9
Introduction-3D Transformation-Rotation about an axis parallel to coordinate Axis-Reflection about an arbitrary axis in
space-Reflection through an arbitrary plane-3D Modeling schemes-Projection-Orthographic-Isometric-oblique-
perspective-3D clipping
UNIT IV COLOR AND ILLUMINATION MODELS 9
Introduction –colors-Illumination model and light sources-specular Reflection-Intensity Attenuation-Shadow-
Reflectivity and refractivity- Radiosity Model-Texturing-Surface-Bump mapping-Environment Mapping-Shading
Methods
UNIT V MODELLING CONCEPTS AND TECHNIQUES 9
Introduction - structures and Hierarchical Modeling-Advanced Modeling Techniques-Procedural Models-Fractals-
Grammar based Models-Physical based Modeling-Animation-Devices-Computer assisted-video formats-Frame by
Frame animation-Real Time Animation Techniques
TOTAL: 45 Periods
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Amarendra N Sinha, Arun D Udai, ”Computer Graphics”,Tata Mc-Graw Hill ,2008
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Foley, van Dam, Feiner and Hughes ,”Computer Graphics Principles and Practice”, Addison Wesley,2004 2. D Hearn and P M Baker ,”Computer Graphics”, Prentice Hall of India Second Edition,2008 3. F .S. Hill, “Computer Graphics using OPENGL”, Second edition, Pearson Education 2003
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://ocw.mit.edu/courses/electrical-engineering-and-computer-science/6-837-computer-graphics-fall-2003/
173
2. http://www.moshplant.com/direct-or/bezier/
3. http://www.cs.mtu.edu/~shene/COURSES/cs3621/NOTES/spline/B-spline/bspline-curve-prop.html
4. http://nptel.ac.in/
15ITA02 RICH INTERNET APPLICATION L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To create websites combining HTML/CSS
To develop an understanding in the basics of html like forms, lists, frames etc
To develop a design with CSS
To increase the quality of website design by formatting with styles
To evaluate a web page design and consider the issues
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Design a website in HTML
Apply concepts of element header in HTML
Design a webpage using frames, forms, images etc..
Create styles for the HTML document
Apply presentation techniques for webpage with CSS COURSE PREREQUISITES:
NIL
UNIT I INTRODUCTION : MARKUP WITH HTML 9
HTML & XHTML – markup instructions & Language – Rules of XHTML - HTML Values and Units – Tag
Attributes- Text and Comments – Uniform Resource Indicators - Document Structure – Head & Body – Styles
Definition – Block Elements – Inline Elements – Organisational Elements – Link – Images - Comments
UNIT II ELEMENT HEADER 9
Head – Document Title – Script & Style sections – Document background color and image – Text Structuring –
Character Formatting – Lists – Ordered – Unordered – Definition Lists – Links to a web page – Tables – Borders
and Rules – Rows and Cells – Formatting with Tables
UNIT III FRAMES, FORMS AND MULTIMEDIA 9
Framesets – frame – links to frames – nested framesets – Forms – GET and POST – Form attributes – Textbox –
checkbox – radiobutton – listbox – Buttons – Hidden fields – Images - Insert a Image – sizing – image maps –
multimedia – animated images & videos – embedding media
UNIT IV PRESENTATION WITH CSS 9
Styles and HTML – defining styles – cascading styles – style definitions – understanding selectors –
understanding style inheritance – pseudo-class – pseudo-elements – CSS value and units – inheritance and
cascade
UNIT V FORMATTING WITH CSS 9
CSS Inheritance and cascade – Font properties – Text Formatting – CSS lists – Padding, margin and borders –
CSS layouts – CSS positioning – Pseudo-elements and generated content – Dynamic HTML with CSS
TOTAL: 45 Periods
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Steven M.Schafer, “HTML, XHTML and CSS”, Wiley Publishing, Inc., Fifth edition 2010.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Chuck Musciano Bill Kennedy, “HTML & XHTML: The Definitive Guide”, O’Reilly, 6th Edition, October 24, 2006
174
2. Thomas A. Powell, “Web Design: The Complete Reference”, McGraw Hill, June 2000
3. Jeffrey C.Jackson, "Web Technologies--A Computer Science Perspective", Pearson Education, 2006
4. Thomas Powell,”HTML & CSS: The Complete Reference”, McGraw Hill, Fifth Edition, Mar 2010
5. Jon Duckett ,”Beginning Web Programming with HTML, XHTML, and CSS”, Wrox Publications, 2008
WEB REFERENCES:
1. www.codecademy.com
2. http://www.w3schools.com/html/
3. http://www.w3schools.com/css/
4. https://www.khanacademy.org/computing/computer-programming/html-css
5. http://tutorialehtml.com/en/
6. http://www.alternetwebdesign.com/htmltutorial/lesson1.htm
7. http://www.htmlhelp.com/reference/css/
15ITA03 INTRODUCTION TO JAVA L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
Understand fundamentals of programming such as variables, conditional and iterative execution, methods, etc.
Understand fundamentals of object-oriented programming in Java, including defining classes, invoking methods, using class libraries, etc
Have the ability to write a computer program to solve specified problems
Be able to use the Java SDK environment to create, debug and run simple Java programs
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Write basic programs using fundamental structures.
Create basic programs using object oriented concepts.
Create classes that can handle exception and various errors handling mechanism.
Create Simple applications with GUI
Develop applications using applet and graphics.
COURSE PREREQUISTE:
Object Oriented Programming using C++
UNITI JAVA FUNDAMENTALS 9
Overview of JDK framework – Identifiers – variables – Assignment statements and Expressions – Constants -
Numeric data types, operations and conversions – String Type – Scanner class – if switch statements – while – do
while – for loop – nested loop- Defining a method- Calling a method – Passing parameters by values – Overloading
methods.
UNITII OBJECT ORIENTED PROGRAMMING CONCEPTS 9
Class Fundamentals-Using predefined classes--Constructors-Access control-Modifiers -Methods-Dealing with Static
Members and Methods-Method Overloading-Interfaces-Importing Packages-Understanding Class Path-Implementing
Packages-Java Doc Comments-Inheritance-Polymorphism.
UNITIII EXCEPTION / ERROR HANDLING 9
Garbage Collection-Finalize () Method-Exceptions & Errors-Types of Exception-Control Flow In Exceptions-Use of try
-catch-finally-throw-throws in Exception Handling -In-built and User Defined Exceptions-Checked and Un Checked
Exceptions
UNIT IV APPLICATION PROGRAMMING WITH GUI 9
175
Event-Driven Programming- Event and Event Sources – Listeners, Registration and handling events – Mouse events
– Key events -Introduction to Swings-Frame-Components-Text Input-Choice Components-Menus-Dialog Box-Layout
Management
UNIT V APPLETS AND GRAPHICS 9
Applet class – JApplet class – Enabling applets to run as application – Passing string to applets – Html file and applet
tag- Graphics class – paint component method – Drawing graphics on panels – Drawing strings , lines, Rectangles,
and Ovals, Polygons , Polylines, FontMetrics class.
TOTAL: 45 Periods
TEXT BOOK
1. Y.Daniel Liang “ Introduction to Java Programming” 7th
Edition, Pearson Education,2013
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. P.J.Deitel & H.M.Deitel, “Java: How to Program Java 2”, Prentice Hall, Seventh Edition, 2011.
2. Herbert Schildt, “Java The Complete Reference“,Tata McgrawHill, Eight Edition, 2011.
3. E.BalaGurusamy, “Programming with java A Primer”, Tata McGraw, Hill Education, Fourth Edition, 2009
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://mark.random-article.com/weber/java/schedule.html
2. http://www.oracle.com/technetwork/java/index.html
3. http://docs.oracle.com/javase/tutorial/ -
4. http://horstmann.com/corejava
5. www.deitel.com
6. http://www.kodejava.org/
7. http://www.tutorialspoint.com/java
15ITA04 PERL L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To teach how to do programs in Perl
To study the basics of Perl syntax and constructs
To introduce list, arrays and hashes implementation in Perl
To read and write subroutines and data files
To parse and manipulate text with Perl regular expressions
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Devise Perl programs using scalar data and control structures
Develop simple programs in Perl using lists, arrays and hashing
Implement Perl Input Output programming
Apply and match regular expressions using Perl
Validate data using regular expressions
COURSE PREREQUISTE:
C Programming
UNITI SCALAR DATA 9
Perl programming introduction– Simple Perl program – Scalar data: Numbers – Strings – Variables – Operators–
Output with print – Getting user input – - The undefined value – Defined functions control structure - if – elseif - while
– unless – until – for control – loop control – conditional operator – logical operator
176
UNITII LIST, ARRAYS AND HASHES 9
Array elements – indices – List literals – Assignment – Interpolating arrays into strings – For each control structure –
Scalar and list context – Hash – Hash Element Access – Hash Assignment – Hash Functions – Use of Hash - %Env
Hash
UNITIII SUB ROUTINES AND IO 9
Sub routines definition– invoking sub routines – return variables – arguments – private variables – variable length
parameter list – lexical variables – non-scalar return values – persistent private variables – Standard input output –
formatted output – opening and using file handle
UNITIV REGULAR EXPRESSION 9
Regular expression definition – using simple patterns – character classes – matching with regular expression –
anchors – match variables - precedence
UNITV PROCESSING REGULAR EXPRESSION 9
Substitution – split operator – join operator - list context – powerful regular expression – Perl Modules – finding
modules – installing modules – using modules – strings and sorting
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Tom Christiansen, Randal L. Schwartz, Larry Wall, “Learning Perl”, O'Reilly Media, Sixth Edition, 2011.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Tom Christiansen, brian d foy, Larry Wall, Jon Orwant “Learning Perl”, O'Reilly Media, Fourth Edition, 2012.
2. Harvey M. Deitel, Paul J. Deitel, Tem R. Nieto, D. C. McPhie, “Perl How to Program”, Prentice Hall, First edition, 2001.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://www.tutorialspoint.com/perl/
2. https://www.perl.org
3. http://www.cs.cf.ac.uk/Dave/PERL/
15ITA05 FUZZY SYSTEMS L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To understand the role of fuzzy logic for decision making problems
To choose various fuzzy inference systems and approximate reasoning for decision making
To understand the impact of fuzzy system for group decision making
To understand how to evaluate the criteria in structured situations
To learn to hybrid fuzzy with decision making methods
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Identify the decision making problems in fuzzy environments
Identify the suitable FIS for decision making
Implement fuzzy concepts for multi-person decision making
Solve complex problems using multi-criteria decision making
Integrate fuzzy with decision making methods for ranking
COURSE PREREQUISITE:
NIL
UNITI INTRODUCTION 9
177
Introduction – The Logic of Decisions, Behavioral Decision Theory and Decision Technology – Optimization –
Outranking – Evaluation – Basics of Fuzzy Set Theory – Individual Decision Making in Fuzzy Environments
UNITII DECISION SUPPORT SYSTEMS 9
Knowledge Based Vs Data based Systems – Linguistic Variables – Fuzzy logic – Approximate Reasoning – An
Interactive Decision Support System – Fuzzy and Semi Fuzzy Multi Objective Problems – Expert Systems and Fuzzy
Sets
UNITIII MULTI-PERSON DECISION MAKING IN FUZZY ENVIRONMENTS 9
Basic Models – Fuzzy Games – Fuzzy Team Theory – Fuzzy Group Decision Making – Fuzzy Mathematical
Programming - Fuzzy Linear and Non Linear Programming – Fuzzy Multi Stage Programming
UNITIV MULTI CRITERIA DECISION MAKING IN STRUCTURED SITUATIONS 9
Fuzzy Multi Criteria Programming – Multi Attribute Decision Making – Fuzzy Outranking – Operators and
Membership functions in Decision Models
UNITV DECISION MAKING WITH FUZZY INFORMATION 9
Fuzzy Synthetic Evaluation – Fuzzy Ordering – Non Transitive Ranking – Preference and Consensus – Multiobjective
Decision Making – Fuzzy Bayesian Decision Method – Decision Making under Fuzzy States and Fuzzy Actions
TOTAL: 45 Periods
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Hans J.Zimmermann, “Fuzzy Sets, Decision Making and Expert Systems”, International Series in Management Science/Operations Research, Kluwer Academic Publishers, 1987
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Timothy J.Ross , “Fuzzy Logic with Engineering Applications”, Third Edition , Wiley Publication, 2012 2. S. N. Sivanandam & S. N. Deepa, Principles of Soft Computing, Wiley - India, 2007. 3. S. Rajasekaran & G.A. Vijayalakshmi Pai, “Neural Networks, Fuzzy Logic and Genetic Algorithm: Synthesis and
Applications” Prentice Hall of India ,2003
WEB REFERENCES:
1. https://www.uic.edu/classes/idsc/ids422/lect2.ppt
2. www.clei.org/cleiej/papers/v13i3p4.pdf
3. www.math.ucdenver.edu/~wlodwick/m4-5779/lecture3fuzzylogic.ppt
15ITA06 GRAPHICS PROGRAMMING
L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To explore the basic Primitives and attributes in OpenGL
To study the geometric objects and transformations
To Understand the various lighting and shading effects
To gain a proficiency with OpenGL by applying Modeling techniques, curves and surfaces
COURSE OUTCOMES:
178
Apply basic Primitives and Attributes for 2D transformations
Work with 3D transformations using OpenGL
Implement Lighting and shading effects
Apply various Modeling Techniques
Apply various Curves and Surfaces for different objects
COURSE PREREQUISTE:
C Programming
UNITI GRAPHICS PROGRAMMING 9
Introduction-Sierpinski Gasket-Programming 2D Applications-OpenGL Application Programming Interface-Primitives
and Attributes-Color-Viewing-Control Functions-Gasket program-Polygons and Recursions-3D Gasket-Adding
Interaction-Menus
UNITII GEOMETRIC OBJECTS AND TRANSFORMATIONS 9
Scalars points and Vectors-3D primitives-Coordinate systems and Frames-Frames in open GL-Modeling a colored
cube-Affine Transformations-Translation - Rotation and scaling-Transformation in homogeneous coordinates-
Transformation matrices in OpenGL-spinning of the cube-Interface to 3D applications- quaternion-classical and
computer viewing-parallel, Perspective Projections with OpenGL-Hidden surface Removal
UNITIII LIGHTING AND SHADING 9
Light and Matter-Light sources-The Phong Reflection Model-computation of vectors-Polygonal Shading-specifying
Light Parameters-Implementing a Lighting Model-Shading of the sphere Model-Per Fragment Lighting-Vertices to
fragments-Clipping-Line Segment Clipping-Polygon Clipping-Clipping in 3D-Rasterization-Bresenhams Algorithm-
Polygon Rasterization-Hidden Surface Removal
UNITIV MODELING AND HIERARCHY 9
Symbols and Instances-Hierarchical Models-A Robot Arm-Trees and Traversal-Animation –Graphical objects-Scene
Graphs-Open Scene Graphs-Graphics and Internet-Procedural Methods-Algorithmic Models-Newtonion Particles-
Constraints-A Simple Particle System-Language Based Models-Recursive Methods and fractals-Procedural Noise
UNITV CURVES AND SURFACES 9
Representation of curves and surfaces-Design Criteria-Parametric cubic Polynomial Curves-Interpolation-Hermite
curves and surfaces-Bezier curves and surfaces-Cubic B Splines-General B Splines-Rendering curves and surfaces-
Utah teapot-Advanced Rendering-Parallel-volume-Direct Volume-Image Based Rendering
TOTAL: 45 Periods
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Edward Angel,Dave Shreiner ,”Interactive Computer Graphics: A Top-Down Approach with Shader-Based OpenGL” ,Sixth Edition,2011
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Sumanta Guha Computer Graphics Through OpenGL: From Theory to Experiments, CRC Press, Second Edition, 2014
2. Tom McReynolds, David Blythe,”Advanced Graphics Programming Using OpenGL”Morgan Kauffmann,2005
3. Clayton Walnum,”3-D graphics programming with OpenGL,” Que, 1995
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://learnopengl.com/ 2. http://www.videotutorialsrock.com/
179
3. http://www.cs.uccs.edu/~ssemwal/indexGLTutorial.html 4. http://www.opengl-tutorial.org/ 5. http://courses.cs.vt.edu/~cs4204/lectures/opengl_basics.pdf
15ITA07 PHP PROGRAMMING L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To introduce web development with PHP
To work with various operations in PHP
To model the design in a web environment
To develop a webpage with database
To test and work with a PHP application
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Create simple basic PHP programs
Create programs using functions and strings
Explore the usage of arrays and objects
Implement graphics, security and web techniques in designing
Implement database connectivity with PHP
COURSE PREREQUISTE:
NIL
UNITI INTRODUCTION TO PHP 9
PHP – History and Evolution – Installation – Language Basics – Lexical Structure – Data types – Variables –
Expression & Operators – Flow Control statements – embedding PHP in web pages
UNITII FUNCTIONS & STRINGS 9
Calling a function – Defining a function – Variable scope – function parameters – return values – variable functions –
Strings – Quoting string constants – Printing string – cleaning strings – encoding and escaping – comparing strings –
manipulating and searching strings -
UNITIII ARRAYS & OBJECTS 9
Indexed versus Associative Arrays – Identifying elements of an array – Storing data in arrays – Multidimensional
arrays –Extracting multiple values – Conversion between arrays and variables – Traversing arrays – Sorting –
Working with arrays – Objects – Creation – Accessing Properties and methods – Declaration of class – Introspection
UNIT IV WEB TECHNIQUES, GRAPHICS & SECURITY 9
HTTP basics – Server Information – Processing Forms –Setting Response Headers – Maintaining State – SSL –
Graphics – Embed an image – Create and draw images – Images with text – Dynamic buttons – Color handling –
Security – Cross site scripting – File uploads and Access
UNIT V DATABASE ACCESS &APPLICATION 9
PHP to access a database – Relational databases and SQL – MySQL object interface – Connectivity – Direct file
level manipulation – Application techniques – code libraries – handing output - error reporting and suppression –
performance tuning
TOTAL: 45 Periods
180
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Kevin Tatroe, Peter MacIntyre & Rasmus Lerdorf, “Programming PHP”, Creating Dynamic
Web Pages, O'Reilly Media, 3rd Edition, 2013
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Steven Holzner ,”PHP: The Complete Reference”, McGraw Hill Education,2008
2. Timothy Boronczyk , Martin E. Psinas,”PHP and MYSQL: Create - Modify – Reuse”, Wiley India Private Limited ,2008
3. Matt Doyle,”Beginning PHP 5.3”, Wiley Publishing Inc., 2009
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://php.net/
2. http://www.tutorialspoint.com/php/
3. http://www.toves.org/books/php/ch03-first/index.html
4. http://www.codecademy.com/en/tracks/php
5. http://www.w3schools.com/php/
15ITA08 ANDROID APPLICATION DEVELOPMENT L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To build your own android application for you mobile devices
To understand how android application works.
To utilize the power of background services, thread and notifications
Secure, tune, package and deploy android applications.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Use Android SDK for simple applications
Create Graphical user interfaces for Android application.
Create Android application for data processing and management
Create location based services using android
Test the Android application
COURSE PREREQUISTE:
Java Programming
UNITI INTRODUCTION TO ANDROID 9
Introduction to Android Architecture: Introduction, History, Features and Android Architecture. Android Application
Environment, SDK, Tools: Application Environment and Tools, Android SDK. Programming paradigms and Application
Components Intents, Content providers, Broadcast receivers, Services
UNITII USER INTERFACE DESIGN 9
User Interface Design Views &View Groups, Views : Button, Text Field, Radio Button, Toggle Button, Checkbox,
Spinner, Image View, Image switcher, Event Handling, Listeners, Layouts : Linear, Relative, List View, Grid View, Table
View, Web View, Adapters. Menus, Action Bars, Notifications: Status, Toasts and Dialogs, Styles and Themes, Creating
181
Custom Widgets, Focus, Touch Mode, Screen Orientation. Designing for Tablets – Working with tablets: Developing for
the Honeycomb and Ice Cream Sandwich platforms, Manipulating objects with drag and drop, Optimizing applications for
high screen resolution, combining fragments into a multilane UI. Resources, Assets, Localization: Resources and
Assets, Creating Resources, Managing application resources and assets, Resource-Switching in Android. Localization,
Localization Strategies, Testing Localized Applications, Publishing Localized Applications
UNITIII DATA STORAGE 9
Content Providers: Contents provider, Uri, CRUD access, Browser, CallLog, Contacts, Media Store, and Setting. Data
Access and Storage: Shared Preferences, Storage External, Network Connection. SQLite - SQLite Databases
UNIT IV NATIVE CAPABILITIES 9
Camera, Audio, Sensors and Bluetooth: Android Media API: Playing audio/video, Media recording. Sensors - how
sensors work, listening to sensor readings. Bluetooth. Maps & Location: Android Communications: GPS, Working with
Location Manager, Working with Google Maps extensions, Maps via intent and Map Activity, Location based Services.
Location Updates, location-based services (LBS), Location Providers, Selecting a Location Provider, Finding Your
Location, Map - Based Activities, Load maps, Map API key.
UNIT V TESTING 9
Testing: Testing and Commercializing Applications - Basics of Testing, Testing from an IDE (Eclipse), Activity testing,
Service testing, Content provider testing, Test Classes, Debugging using DDMS.
TOTAL: 45 Periods
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Reto Meier, “Professional Android 4 Development”, John Wiley and Sons, 2012 2. W. Frank Ableson, RobiSen, Chris King and C. Enrique Ortiz, “Android in Action”, Third Edition, 2012
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Wei-Meng Lee, “Android Application Development Cookbook”, John Wiley and Sons, 2013. 2. Grant Allen, “Beginning Android 4, Apress, 2011.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. W1. https://developer.android.com 2. W2. http://www.androidcentral.com/apps 3. W3. https://www.opensesame.com/c/android-app-development-beginners-training-course
15ITA09 PYTHON PROGRAMMING L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
Understand fundamentals of programming such as variables, conditional and iterative execution, methods, etc.
Understand fundamentals of object-oriented programming in python, including defining classes, invoking methods, using class libraries, etc.,
Have the ability to write a program to solve specified problems
COURSE OUTCOMES:
182
Develop basic programs using fundamental structures.
Create programs using various collection data types.
Apply appropriate Python control flow structure.
Implement user defined python functions.
Design classes and use them
COURSE PREREQUISTE:
NIL
UNITI INTRODUCTION 9
Python object types – Numeric Type Basics – Numeric Literals –Built in Numeric Tools – Python Expression operators –
Numbers in action – Other numeric types – String Literals – Strings in action – String methods – String formatting
expressions – String formatting method calls – General type categories
UNITII LISTS AND DICTIONARIES 9
Lists in action – Basic list operations – List Iteration and comprehensions – Indexing, Slicing and Matrixes – Changing
list in place – Dictionaries – Dictionaries in action – Basic dictionary operations – Changing Dictionaries In place –
Dictionary methods – A language table – Dictionary usage notes – Other ways to make dictionary – Tuples – Files –
Python Type Hierarchies
UNITIII STATEMENT AND SYNTAX 9
Introducing Python statements- A Tale of Two ifs – Assignment statements – Expression statements – Print operations –
if statements – Python syntax rules – while loops – for loops – Loop coding techniques – Iterators – List comprehension -
UNIT IV FUNCTIONS 9
Coding functions- Scope basics – scope rules – global statement – Scopes and nested functions – Nonlocal statement –
Argument Passing Basics – Special Argument Matching modes – function design concepts- Recursive functions –
function objects – Anonymous functions – mapping functions
UNIT V CLASSES AND OOP 9
Class coding basics – Class Statement – Methods – Inheritance – Attribute tree construction – specializing Inherited
methods – Class Interface Techniques – Abstract super classes -Namespaces –simple names – Attribute names –
Namespace dictionaries – Operator overloading – Designing with classes
TOTAL: 45 Periods
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Mark Lutz , “Learning Python” , Fifth Edition, O,Reilly, 2013
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Jason Cannon, “Python Programming for Beginners” O,Reilly, 2010
2. David Beazley , Brain K Jones “Python CookBook” Third edition,2013
3. CHUN, WESLEY J ”Core Python Programming”, Pearson Education 2012
4. GUTTAG, JOHN V ”Introduction to Computation and Programming Using Python”, PHI Learning Private Limited, New Delhi, 2014
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://www.tutorialspoint.com/python/ 2. http://www.learnpython.org/ 3. http://www.codecademy.com/en/tracks/python
183
4. http://www.pyschools.com/ 5. http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=cpPG0bKHYKc&noredirect=1 6. http://www.python-course.eu/python3_course.php
15ITA10 DECISION MAKING METHODS L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To understand the logic of MCDM Methods
To learn how to do pairwise comparison
To learn to do normalization of attributes
To understand the role of fuzzy logic for decision making problems
To understand various MCDM methods to choose the best alternative
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Explore various MCDM methods for decision making
Apply quantification methods for decision making problems
Evaluate using relative weights for the attributes in order of relative importance
Apply fuzzy with MCDM methods for decision making
Evaluate the results of fuzzy with MCDM to choose the best alternative
COURSE PREREQUISTE:
NIL
UNITI INTRODUCTION 9
Multi- Criteria Decision Making – A General Overview – Classification of MCDM Methods – WSM – WPM – AHP –
Revised AHP – TOPSIS
UNITII QUANTIFICATION 9
Qualitative data for MCDM problems – Scales for Quantifying Pair wise Comparisons – Evaluating different scales –
Simulation – Analysis of the Computational Results
UNITIII EVALUATION OF WEIGHTS 9
Deriving Relative Weights – Sensitivity Analysis – Evaluation of methods – Process a decision matrix – Ranking
abnormalities
UNITIV FUZZY MULTI- CRITERIA DECISION MAKING 9
Fuzzy Operations – Ranking of Fuzzy Numbers - Fuzzy WSM method – Fuzzy WPM method – Fuzzy AHP method –
Fuzzy Revised AHP method – Fuzzy TOPSIS method
UNITV FUZZY EVALUATION CRITERIA 9
Testing the methods – First Evaluative Criterion – Second Evaluative Criterion - Computational Experiments - Analysis
TOTAL: 45 Periods
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Evangelos Triantaphyllou, “Multi-criteria Decision Making Methods: A Comparative Study”, Kluwer Academic
184
Publishers, Springer 2000.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Witold Pedrycz, Petr Ekel, Roberta Parreiras, “Fuzzy Multicriteria Decision-Making: Models, Methods and Applications” , Wiley 2010
2. Hans J.Zimmermann, “Fuzzy Sets, Decision Making and Expert Systems”, International Series in Management Science/Operations Research, Kluwer Academic Publishers, 1987
3. Timothy J.Ross , “Fuzzy Logic with Engineering Applications”, Third Edition , Wiley Publication, 2012
WEB REFERENCES:
1. www.ccse.kfupm.edu.sa/.../Multi-Criteria%20Decision%20Making.ppt
2. www.ccse.kfupm.edu.sa/~duffuaa/download/Courses/.../TOPSIS.ppt
3. https://www.uic.edu/classes/idsc/ids422/ahp.ppt
Offered by Bio-Tech Department
15BTA01 BASIC CELL AND MOLECULAR BIOLOGY L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
Understand the basics of cellular structure and function.
Gain knowledge about the genetic basis of life.
Understand the regulation of gene expression at transcript and protein level.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon the completion of the course students will be able to
Know the basic structure and function of cell and its organelles and its significance for proper functioning
of the cell.
Be aware of the nature of the genetic materials, mechanism of replication and expression.
Be able to appreciate and analyse the basic differences between the cellular organization and
regulation of genes between eukaryotes and prokaryotes.
COURSE PREREQUISITES:
Basic understanding of Biological Sciences.
UNITI CELL STRUCTURE 9
Structural Organization: Prokaryotic and Eukaryotic cell - Cell wall: Primary and Secondary structure model and
function - Plasma membrane: Channels, pumps and receptors - Plasmodesmata - Cell organelles: structure and
functions - Ultra structure and semi autonomous nature of chloroplast and mitochondria.
UNITII CELLULAR ORGANELLES 9
Structure and function of Organelles: Nucleus, ER, golgi complex, ribosome, lysosome, chromosome-
Lampbrush, polytene - Microscopy – light microscope, compound microscope, electron microscope, dark field
microscope, phase contrast microscope - Cell cycle and cell division.
UNITIII GENETIC MATERIAL 9
Identification of DNA as genetic material – Watson and Crick model of DNA - Structure of DNA and RNA - DNA
replication: Semi conservative Nature of replication - DNA polymerases in prokaryotes- the processes of DNA
185
replication- Replication in eukaryotes - Mitochondrial DNA replication.
UNITIV GENE EXPRESSION 9
Transcription – RNA polymerase, sigma factors - Difference between prokaryotic and eukaryotic transcription -
Regulation of gene expression - Operon concept.
UNITV THE GENETIC CODE AND PROTEIN SYNTHESIS 9
Genetic code - Codons - Anticodons - Wobble hypothesis - Protein synthesis- the stages of protein synthesis -
the process of translation in prokaryotes, factors involved in translation - the triplet nature of genetic code - an
overview of comparisons with eukaryotic translation.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. De Robertis, E.D.P. and Robertis, E.M.C., “Cell and Molecular Biology”. Lippincott William & Wilkins, NY,
8thEdition, 2010.
2. Freifelder, D. “Molecular Biology”. Narosa Publishing House, 2nd Edition, 2008.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Benjamin L., “Gene VII” Oxford University Press: 2000.
2. Watson J. D., Hopkins N. H., Roberts J. W., Steitz J. A., Weiner A. M., “Molecular biology of the Gene”, The
Benjamin/Cumming Publishing Company Inc., 4th Edition 1992.
3. Snyder L & Wendy W., “Molecular Genetics of Bacteria”, ASM press, Washington DC, 2nd Edition, 2003.
15BTA02 BASIC MICROBIOLOGY L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To impart knowledge on
History of microbiology and techniques used in microbiology.
Characteristic features of prokaryotes, eukaryotes and viruses.
Impact of microbes on environment, health and disease.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon the completion of the course students will be able to
Understand the diversity of microbes.
Have knowledge of culturing and controlling the microbes.
Become familiarized with the significance of microbes in daily life.
COURSE PREREQUISITES:
Basic understanding of Biological sciences
UNITI INTRODUCTION TO MICROBIOLOGY 9
History & Development of microbiology - Microscopy: Simple, Compound Microscopy - Staining: Principle and
technique of simple & differential staining, (Gram, Acid-fast & Endospore staining).
UNITII STRUCTURE OF MICROORGANISMS 9
Prokaryotes and Eukaryotes - Virus; Bacteria: Bacterial morphology & subcellular structures (General
morphology of bacteria, shapes & sizes) - Slime layer & capsule, Cell wall structure of gram positive and gram
186
negative cells - General account of Ribosome, Flagella & Fimbriae - Chromatin materials, plasmids and
episomes - Endospore: Detailed study of endospore structure & its formation - Basis of resistance.
UNITIII BACTERIAL GROWTH AND NUTRITION 9
Cultivation of microbes: Growth rate and generation time - Nutritional types of microbes - Culturing bacteria
Media, Sterilization – Physical and chemical sterilizing agents – Principle, Mode of action and application -
culturing techniques.
UNITIV ENVIRONMENTAL MICROBIOLOGY 9
Role of microorganisms in biogeochemical cycles (N, P and C cycles) – Biodegradation of xenobiotics
(pesticides) – Microbes in waste treatment: solid and liquid wastes – sewage treatment (Primary, secondary &
tertiary treatments) – COD & BOD – pollution indicating microbes – Biofertilizers.
UNITV MICROBES IN HEALTH AND DISEASE 9
Human Normal Microflora: Skin, stomach, Small Intestine, Large Intestine, Genitourinary tract - Relationship
between normal microbiota and the host - Principles of Infectious Diseases: Epidemiology, Infectious Disease
cycle - Pathogen transmission - control of epidemics – Case study, disease caused by viruses, bacteria, fungi
and protists, food borne and water borne diseases - an overview.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Pelczar M.J., Chan E.C.S., Krein N.R., “Microbiology”, Tata McGraw Hill Edition, 5th Edition, 2008.
2. Prescott L.M., Harley J.P., Klein D.A., “Microbiology”, Wm. C. Brown Publishers, 9th Edition, 2013.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Black, J.G., Black, L.J. “Microbiology-Principles and Explorations”, Wiley 9th Edition, 2014.
2. Murray R., “Manual of Clinical Microbiology: Illustrations”, American Society for Microbiology, 9th Edition,
2007.
15BTA03 BASIC BIOCHEMISTRY L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To impart basic knowledge of chemistry of biomolecules.
To understand the structure, function and metabolism of carbohydrates, proteins and lipids.
To learn the biochemistry of the genetic material.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon the completion of the course students will be able to
Understand the chemical nature of biologically significant molecules.
Correlate the function and significance of the biomolecules with their chemical structure.
Appreciate the chemical nature of biological processes.
COURSE PREREQUISITES:
Basic understanding of Biological sciences.
UNITI INTRODUCTION TO BIOMOLECULES 9
187
Water and Life – pH and Buffers - Law of Thermodynamics: Entropy and enthalpy - Chemical bonds in
biochemistry-molecular structures, Biomolecules and their functional groups - Biochemical evolution.
UNITII CARBOHYDRATES 9
Structure of monosaccharides, sterioisomerism and optical isomerism of sugars - Reactions of aldehydes and
ketone groups - Ring structure and anomeric forms – mutarotation - Structure, occurrence and biological
importance oligosaccharides and polysaccharides - Carbohydrate metabolism: glycolysis, gluconeogenesis -
TCA cycle.
UNITIII PROTEINS 9
Structure and Function - Primary, Secondary, Tertiary and Quaternary structures - Enzymes and their
classifications - General properties of enzymes (pH, Temperature, Substrate concentrations) - 3-D structure of
proteins - amino acid sequencing - Metabolism of amino acids - Metabolism of aromatic amino acids – Inborn
errors of metabolism.
UNITIV LIPIDS 9
Definition and classification - Fatty acids: Introduction, classification, nomenclature, structure and properties of
saturated and unsaturated fatty acids - Essential fatty acids - Triacylglycerols: nomenclature, physical properties,
chemical properties and characterization of fats - hydrolysis, saponification - rancidity of fats - Biological
significance of fats.
UNITV NUCLEIC ACIDS 9
Chemical nature of nucleic acids - Double helical structure - Nucleic acid denaturation - Classes of nucleic acids-
Metabolism of nucleic acids - Synthesis of purines and pyrimidines.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Nelson, D.L., M.M. Cox, “Lehninger’s Principles of Biochemistry”, W.H.Freeman & Co., 6th Edition, 2012.
2. Stryer L., “Biochemistry”, W.H.Freeman & Co., 7th Edition, 2011.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Voet D., Prat W.C., Voet J., “Principles of Biochemistry”, John Wiley and Sons, 4th Edition 2012.
2. Wilson K., Walker J., “Principles and Techniques of Biochemistry and Molecular Biology”, Cambridge
University Press, 7th Edition, 2010.
15BTA04 BASIC IMMUNOLOGY L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To impart knowledge about the organization of immune system.
To familiarize students with basic components in innate immunity.
To introduce students to the critical role of adaptive immune system and vaccination concepts.
To familiarize students with immune system disorders.
To make students understand the importance of transplantation and immunotherapy.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Able to understand the various types of cells and organs involved in immune system.
Able to illustrate the various barriers of innate immunity and importance of complement system.
188
Able to understand the various concepts and molecules of adaptive immunity and methods involved in
vaccine designing.
Able to analyze the reason behind the various autoimmune disorders.
Able to apply the concepts of immunology immunotherapy of infectious diseases and transplantation.
COURSE PREREQUISITES:
Basic knowledge in microbiology, genetics, and cell biology.
UNITI ORGANIZATION OF IMMUNE SYSTEM 9
History - Hematopoiesis - Primary & Secondary lymphoid organs - Myeloid cells, Lymphoid cells, Dendritic cells
and Natural killer cells.
UNITII INNATE IMMUNITY 9
Innate immunity: Anatomical, Physiological, Phagocytic and Inflammatory barriers - The complement system:
Overview - Induced innate responses to infections.
UNITIII THE ADAPTIVE IMMUNE AND INFECTION 9
Cell-Mediated Immune response: T cell mediated response, Humoral Immune Response - Antibodies:Structure
of Immunoglobulins, Immunoglobulin subtype - T cell receptor - Cytokines: functions, Infectious agents and how
they cause disease: Bacterial (Tuberculosis), viral (Influenza) and parasitic infection (helminthes) - vaccines:
history, principle of vaccination - Conventional and recombinant vaccines.
UNITIV IMMUNE DISORDERS 9
Inherited immunodeficiency diseases: SCID, DiGeorge’s syndrome, X-linked agammaglobulinemia - Acquired
Immune Deficiency Syndrome: AIDS - Hypersensitivities: Type I, II, III and IV - Autoimmune responses: Graves
disease, Rheumatoid Arthritis, Diabetes Mellitus Type I, II - Myesthenia gravis.
UNITV TRANSPLANTATION AND IMMUNOTHERAPY 9
Tissue typing and matching transplantation: Heart, Liver, Kidney – Immunosuppression - Transplant rejection -
Immunotherapy: Infections, Cancer.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Kuby J., “Immunology”, WH Freeman & Co., 6th Edition, 2000.
2. Roitt I., Brostoff M., “Immunology”, Mosby Publication, 8th Edition, 2012.
3. Immunobiology by Janeway , Travers, Walport, Sclomchik, Garland Science; 7th edition, 2007.
4. Abbas, K.A., Litchman, A.H., Pober, J.S., “Cellular and Molecular Immunology”, W.B. Saunders Co.,
Pennsylvania, 7th
Edition, 2011.
5. William E.P., “Fundamental Immunology”, Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 7th Edition, 2012.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Ashim K.C., “Immunology and Immunotechnology”, Oxford University Press, 1st Edition, 2006.
2. Christine D., “Clinical Immunology and Serology: A laboratory Perspective”; F.A. Davis Co., 3rd revised
Edition, 2009.
189
15BTA05 CHEMICALS IN ENVIRONMENT AND PUBLIC HEALTH L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
Define the major sources and types of environmental agents and discuss the transport and fate of these
agents in the environment.
Identify the carriers or vectors that promote the transfer of these agents from the environment to the
human.
To understand the procedures and requirement for hazardous waste management and gain the
knowledge on the policies, legislations.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon the completion of the course students will be able to
Understand the relationship between environment and human health.
Able to understand the impact of hazardous waste on environment and human health.
Acquire the knowledge about the Environmental Management Policies and Practices.
COURSE PREREQUISITES:
Environmental Science, Physics, Chemistry.
UNITI ENVIRONMENT AND HEALTH 9
Human impact on the environment - Environment-human interaction - Environmental impact on humans - Indoor
and outdoor air - Water & Soil pollution - Exposure, dose and Response - Food and water-borne disease.
UNITII IMPACT OF INDUSTRIAL PRODUCTS AND HAZARDOUS WASTE 9
Non Hazardous wastes - Hazardous wastes: Metals, chemical, drugs, leather, pulp, electroplating, dye, rubber -
Hazardous wastes on environment and human heath: case studies (chemical accumulation in plants - Cadmium
in rice, Hexachlorobenzene in seed grains : Cancer, neurological disorder, acute lung diseases, behavioural and
mental effects - Carbamate pesticide in watermelons: Gastrointestinal, skeletal, muscle, autonomic and central
nervous system effects, , Lead in paint) - Food adulterants and their impact on human health.
UNITIII IMPACT OF BIOMEDICAL WASTES 9
Characteristics & sources – BMW: Segregation, collection, transportation, disposal - Liquid BMW - Radioactive
waste - Metals / Chemicals / Drug waste - Modern technology for handling BMW Monitoring & controlling of cross
infection - Health and Environmental effect: case studies.
UNITIV IMPACT OF NUCLEAR WASTES 9
Sources - Types of Nuclear waste - Nuclear power plants and fuel production Waste generation from nuclear
power plants - Disposal options, Defining risk and environmental risk - Methods of risk assessment - Measures
and health effects: case studies.
UNITV ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT POLICIES AND PRACTICES 9
Environment and pollution - definition as per Environmental law - General powers of Central and state
Government under EPA - Important Notification in EPA 1986 - Constitution of Pollution Control Boards - Powers,
functions, Accounts, Audit etc. - Equitable remedies for pollution control - Solid waste management – Hazardous
Wastes (Handling and Management) Rules 1998, Biomedical Wastes (Handling and Management) Rules 1998.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
190
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Rodricks J.V., “Calculated Risks- The Toxicity and Human Health Risks of Chemicals in Our Environment”,
Cambridge University press, 2nd Edition, 2007.
2. Lippmann M., “Environmental toxicants: Human exposures and their health effects”, New York: Van
Nostrand Reinhold, 1992.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Philp, R. B., “Environmental hazards and human health”, Boca Raton: Lewis Publishers, 1995
2. Eckenfelder Jr. W .W., “Industrial Water Pollution Control”, McGraw-Hill Book Company, New Delhi, 2000.
3. Michel, Mckinney, Robert, Logan, “Environmental Science – Systems & Solutions”, Jones & Barlett
Publishers, Canada, 2007.
15BTA06 BIOLOGICAL WASTE MANAGEMENT L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To impart knowledge on
Hazardous wastes and its effects.
Disposal of biological wastes.
Safe handling and management of biological wastes.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon the completion of the course students will be able to
To understand about hazardous wastes, its origin and effects on public health.
To impart knowledge about sources of biohazardous wastes, risks associated and regulatory aspects of
health care wastes.
To understand the methods of treatment, disposal and management of biological wastes.
COURSE PREREQUISITES:
Environmental Science, Physics, Chemistry.
UNITI INTRODUCTION TO HAZARDOUS WASTE 9
Hazardous waste - Classifications of hazardous waste and its sources - Effects on public health and
environment.
UNITII BIO HAZARDOUS WASTE 9
Biological, Biomedical and Healthcare wastes – Sources - Bio hazardous wastes classification - Risks associated
with bio hazardous waste - Need for control.
UNITIII LEGISLATIVE, REGULATORY AND POLICY ASPECTS OF HEALTH-
CARE WASTE
9
National policies and its five guiding principles - Available guidance – World health organization (WHO), The
International Solid Waste Association (ISWA) and its policy document.
UNITIV BIOLOGICAL WASTE TREATMENT AND DISPOSAL 9
Segregation, storage and transport of healthcare and biological wastes - Treatment and disposal method
191
healthcare waste - Disposal of biological and sharp wastes - Health and safety practices for health-care
personnel and waste workers.
UNITV MANAGEMENT OF BIO HAZARDOUS WASTES 9
Healthcare waste - Management planning - Infectious waste management plans - Healthcare waste minimization,
reuse and recycling.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Blackman W. C., “Basic Hazardous Waste Management”, CRC Press, 3rd Edition, 2001.
2. Henry J. G., Heinke G. W., “Environmental Science and Engineering”, Pretice Hall of India, 2nd Edition,
2004.
3. Cheremisinoff, N. P., Cheremisinoff P. N., “Hazardous Materials and Waste Management: A Guide forthe
Professional Hazards Manager”, Noyes Publications, 1995.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Panda H., “The Complete Book on Biological Waste Treatment and their Utilization”, NIIR Project
Consultancy Services, 2013.
EXTENSIVE READING:
1. Safe Management of Wastes from Health-Care Activities, 2nd Edition, WHO, 2014.
2. Biomedical waste (Management and Handling) Rules, Ministry of Environment & Forests, 1998.
15BTA07 NANOBIOTECHNOLOGY L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To provide the knowledge in basics of Nanobiotechnology.
Understand the application of nanomaterials in biotechnology and acquire the knowledge about the
DNA, proteins, amino acids, drug delivery, biomedicine etc.,
To make the students understand about the functional principles of bionanotechnology.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Able to understand physicochemical properties of nanomaterials and the unique changes that happen at
nanoscale.
Able to understand nanoscale view of the natural biomolecular processes, synthesis, modification, and
characterization of nanomaterials.
Able to understand the application of nanomaterials to biological problems including nanomedicine.
COURSE PREREQUISITES:
Basic understanding of Biological Sciences.
UNITI NANOSCALE AND NANOBIOTECHNOLOGY 9
Introduction to Nanoscience and Nanotechnology - Milestones in Nanotechnology - Overview of
Nanobiotechnology and Nanoscale processes - Physicochemical properties of materials in Nanoscales - Lessons
from Nature on making nanodevices.
UNITII NANOMATERIALS 9
192
Types and synthesis of Nanomaterials: Quantum dots, Nanoparticles, Nanocrystals, Dendrimers, Buckyballs,
Nanotubes - Gas, liquid, and solid phase synthesis of Nanomaterials - Lithography techniques (Photolithography,
Dip-pen and Electron beam lithography) - Thin film deposition – Electrospinning - Bio-synthesis of nanomaterials.
UNITIII PROPERTIES AND MEASUREMENT OF NANOMATERIALS 9
Optical Properties: Absorption, Fluorescence, and Resonance - Methods for the measurement of Nanomaterials -
Microscopy measurements: SEM, TEM, AFM and STM - Confocal and TIRF imaging.
UNITIV PROTEIN AND DNA BASED NANOSTRUCTURES 9
Protein based nanostructures: building blocks and templates – Proteins as transducers and amplifiers of
biomolecular recognition events – Nanobioelectronic devices and polymer nanocontainers – Microbial production
of inorganic nanoparticles –Magnetosomes .DNA based nanostructures – Topographic and Electrostatic
properties of DNA and proteins – Hybrid conjugates of gold nanoparticles – DNA oligomers – Use of DNA
molecules in nanomechanics and Computing.
UNITV APPLICATIONS 9
Nanoparticles as carrier for genetic material – Nanotechnology in agriculture – Nanomedicine - Drug delivery -
DNA computing - Molecular design using biological selection - Harnessing molecular motors - Artificial life -
Hybrid materials – Biosensors - Future of Bionanotechnology - Health and environmental impacts of
nanotechnology.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Christof M. Niemeyer and Chad A. Mirkin, “Nanobiotechnology: Concepts, Applications and Perspectives”,
Wiley VCH, 1st Edition, 2004.
2. Oded Shoseyov and Ilan Levy “NanoBiotechnology: BioInspired Devices and Materials of the Future”,
Humana Press; 1st Edition 2007.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Sandra J Rosenthal and David W. Wright, “NanoBiotechnology Protocols (Methods in Molecular Biology)”,
Humana Press; 1st Edition, 2005.
2. Clarke. A.R. and Eberhardt C. N. (Editors), “Microscopy Techniques for Material Science”, CRC Press. 1st
Edition, 2002.
15BTA08 HUMAN PHYSIOLOGY L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To impart knowledge on
The basic architecture of human body.
Organization of human organ systems.
Physiological significance of the human organ system.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course students will be able to
Understand basic human anatomy.
193
Know the functions of different organs and their significance.
Implement the knowledge for up-keeping good health.
COURSE PREREQUISITES:
Basic understanding of Biological Sciences.
UNITI GENERAL ANATOMY OF THE BODY 9
Introduction to basic concepts of: Body planes, Tissues (Types, origin & function) organs.
UNITII BLOOD 9
Composition of blood – Haemopoesis - Structure and function of hemoglobin - Haemostasis (all types of clotting
mechanisms) - Blood groups and introduction to basic concepts of transfusion.
UNITIII NERVE PHYSIOLOGY 9
Origin of resting membrane potential and action potential - Electrophysiology of ion channels - Structure and
function of neuron - Conduction of nerve impulse in a neuron - Synapse, its types and synaptic transmission -
Neurotransmitters, types and functions.
UNITIV MUSCULAR SYSTEM AND ENDOCRINOLOGY 9
Types of muscles - Functional anatomy of muscular system - Concepts of degeneration and regeneration of
muscle - Neuromuscular transmission - Muscle excitation and contraction - Types of contraction and its
properties - General mechanism of hormone action - Glands and their hormone, structure, function, regulation.
UNITV CARDIOVASCULAR SYSTEM 9
Structure and function of heart - Cardiac cycle - Basic concepts of electrocardiogram (ECG) - Circulatory system
and hemodynamic - Lymph and lymphatic circulation - Blood pressure (causes and factors affecting it).
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Stuart I. F H., “Human Physiology” McGraw- Hill, 13th
Edition, 2012.
2. Guyton and Hall, “Text book of Medical Physiology”, W B Saunders and Company, 13th Edition, 2015.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Gerad J. T., Sandra R. G., “Principles of Anatomy and Physiology - Control systems of human body, Vol-3”,
Wiley and Sons, 10th Edition, 2006.
2. Barett K.E., Barman S.M., Boitans S., Brook H., “Ganong’s Review of Medical physiology”, Tata McGraw
Hill, 23rd Edition (Lange basic science), 2009.
Offered by MBA Department
15BAA01 ESSENTIALS OF FINANCE L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To develop an understanding of business related finance.
To have an understanding of finance in order to contribute to the organization’s success.
To improve the financial skills in order to make critical business decisions involving budgets, cost savings
and growth strategies.
194
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course the student will be able to:
understand financial terms
interpret financial statements
make decision on budgeting and investment
communicate with financial experts
UNITI Introduction to Finance 9
Role for Finance for Individual and Organization – Goals and Functions of Finance - Time Value of Money –
Significance
UNITII Financial Planning and Decisions 9
Financial Planning – Decisions – Investment Decision – Financing Decision - Dividend Decision - Evaluation of
Investment Projects and Financing – Working Capital
UNITIII Funds Management 9
Funds Mobilization – Sources – Internal and external
UNITIV Financial Statements 9
Financial Statements - Balance Sheet – PL account - Cash/Fund Flow - Analysis
UNITV Overview of Indian Financial Markets 9
Financial System – Bank and Financial Institutions – Capital Market - Money Market
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. I. M. Pandey, “Financial Management”, (10th
ed.), Vikas Publishing House Pvt. Ltd., 2013.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Prasanna Chandra, “Financial Management”, (7th
ed.), Tata McGraw Hill, 2008.
2. Khan M Y and Jain P K, “Financial Management”, (6th
ed.), McGraw Hill, 2013.
15BAA02 ESSENTIALS OF MARKETING
L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To understand the basics of Marketing Management as a functional area of an organisation.
To understand the basic elements that makes up the marketing function.
To understanding the functions of a marketing department.
To understand the importance of marketing to an organisation.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course students will be able to:
Describe a Marketing Department and the functions of a marketing department.
Choose and understand the needs of the customers.
Combine the four Ps of marketing to design a marketing model
195
Have a basic ideas on how a market segmented and customers are targeted.
Have a basic understanding on the elements of the marketing mix
UNITI Understanding Marketing Management – an overview 9
Introduction, Marketing department functions, Selling vs Marketing, Marketing concepts (Marketers and
Prospects, Needs, Wants, and Demands, Value and Satisfaction), Basics of Market segmentation, Target
markets and Positioning.
UNITII The Marketing mix element – Product 9
Introduction, Characteristics of the product life cycle and their marketing implications, Facets of the PLC, New
product development, The market diffusion process, Organizing for new product development
UNITIII The Marketing mix element – Price 9
Introduction, Price and the marketing mix, Pricing objectives, Factors affecting pricing decisions, Setting a price,
Pricing industrial goods, Pricing and information technology
UNITIV The Marketing mix element – Promotion 9
Communications contact techniques (Promotion mix) - Advertising, Direct marketing, Sales promotion, Personal
selling, Sponsorship, Publicity
UNITV The Marketing mix element – Place: channels of distribution 9
Introduction, Intermediaries in channels of distribution - Sales agents, Distributors, Wholesalers, Retailers, Franchising,
Internet marketing.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Marilyn A. Stone, John Desmond, “Fundamentals of Marketing” (Special Indian Edition), Routledge, Taylor
& Francis Group, 2014.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. William J. Stanton, Michael J. Etzel, Bruce J. Walter, “Fundamentals of Marketing”, (10th ed.), TMH, 1994.
2. Philip Kotler, “Marketing Management: A South Asian Perspective”, (14th
ed.), Pearson India, 2012.
15BAA03 ESSENTIALS OF HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT
L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To make the participant understand the role of HR Department in an organization
To know the various functional areas of HRM
To understand the recent developments in HR
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Students will understand the basic concepts in HRM
Students will be aware of human resource requirement for an organization
Students will be aware of the ways for developing the skills and knowledge of the employees
Students will be able to understand the motivation model in an organization
Students will be aware of present development in HR
UNITI Introduction 9
196
Introduction to HRM – Meaning, Importance and Objectives, History of Managing Human Resources,
Environment of HR. Functions and Roles of HR Manager
UNITII Procurement of Human Resources 9
Job Analysis – Meaning, Process and Methods, Human Resource Planning – Importance, Process, HR Demand
and Supply Forecasting Techniques. Recruitment – Importance, Recruitment Sources, Selection – Process
Socialization / Induction – Importance and Types
UNITIII Development / Training 9
Training – Purpose, Process – Need Identification, On-the-Job Methods and Off-the-Job Methods. Executive
Development Programmes – Difference from training. Performance Appraisal – Process, Techniques – MBO and
360 Degree Feedback. Job Changes - Promotion, Demotion and Transfer
UNITIV Compensation and Motivation 9
Job Evaluation – Meaning, Process, Compensation Plan – Deciding factors & Framing Process. Human Needs –
Motivation Theories – Maslow’s Need theory and Herzberg’s two factor theory, Applications – Rewards and
Reinforcement. Grievances – Causes and Redressal methods. Disciplinary Action – Nature and Types
UNITV Maintenance and Separation 9
The Factories Act, 1948 – Health, Safety and Welfare Provisions. The Industrial Employment (Standing Orders)
Act, 1946 – Framing Standing Order. Separation – Retirement, Layoff, Out-placement & Discharge. Latest trends
in HRM - HRIS – Meaning and Implementation Process. E-HRM.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Arun Monappa, “Managing Human Resources”, (1st ed.), Trinity Press Publications, 2014.
2. Dessler, “Human Resource Management”, (12th
ed.), Pearson Education Limited, 2011.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Aswathappa K., “Human Resource Management”, (7th ed.), 2013, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi.
2. Decenzo and Robbins, “Human Resource Management”, (10th
ed.), Wiley, 2010.
3. Mamoria C.B & Mamoria S., “Personnel Management”, Himalaya Publishing Co., 2010.
4. Eugence Mckenna & Nic Beach, “Human Resource Mgmt”, (2nd
ed.), Pearson Education Ltd, 2008.
5. Wayne Cascio, “Managing Human Resource”, (9th
ed.), Tata McGraw Hill, 2012.
6. Ivancevich, “Human Resource Management”, (12th ed.), Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2012.